Key Benefits:
The Organic Law of 19 June, of the Qualifications and of Vocational Training aims at the ordination of a comprehensive system of vocational training, qualifications and accreditation, which responds effectively and transparently to social and economic demands through the various forms of training. To this end, it creates the National System of Qualifications and Vocational Training, defining it in article 2.1 as the set of instruments and actions necessary to promote and develop the integration of the offers of vocational training, through the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications, as well as the evaluation and accreditation of the corresponding professional skills, in order to promote the professional and social development of the people and to cover the needs of the productive system.
The National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications, as set out in Article 7.1, is designed to facilitate the integrated nature and the adequacy of vocational training and the labour market, as well as training throughout life, the mobility of workers and the unity of the labour market. This catalogue consists of the qualifications identified in the production system and the training associated with them, which is organised in training modules.
Under Article 7, the structure and content of the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications were established, by means of Royal Decree 1128/2003 of 5 September, as amended by Royal Decree 1416/2005 of 25 November. According to Article 3.2, according to the wording given by this last royal decree, the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications will make it possible to identify, define and order professional qualifications and establish the specifications of the training associated with each unit of competence; as well as to establish the benchmark for evaluating and crediting the professional skills acquired through the work experience or non-formal training pathways.
By this royal decree, seven new professional qualifications are established, corresponding to the Family Professional Arts, which are defined in Annexes 415 to 421, as well as their corresponding training modules, thus advancing in the construction of the National System of Qualifications and Vocational Training.
According to Article 5.1 of the Organic Law of June 19, of the Qualifications and of Vocational Training, it corresponds to the General Administration of the State, in the field of exclusive competence that is attributed to it by article 149.1.1. and 30. of the Spanish Constitution, the regulation and the coordination of the National System of Qualifications and Vocational Training, without prejudice to the competences that correspond to the autonomous communities and the participation of the social agents.
According to Article 7.2 of the same organic law, the Government is entrusted, after consulting the General Council of Vocational Training, to determine the structure and content of the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications and to approve the qualifications to be included in it, as well as to guarantee its permanent update. The present royal decree has been informed by the General Council of Vocational Training and by the School Board of the State, in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.1 of Royal Decree 1128/2003 of 5 September.
In its virtue, on the proposal of the Ministers of Education and of Work and Immigration, and after deliberation of the Council of Ministers at its meeting of 18 December 2009,
DISPONGO:
Article 1. Object and scope of application.
This royal decree aims to establish certain professional qualifications which are included in the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications and their corresponding training modules, regulated by Royal Decree 1128/2003 of 5 September, as amended by Royal Decree 1416/2005 of 25 November. These qualifications and their associated training are valid and are applicable throughout the national territory and do not constitute a regulation of professional practice.
Article 2. Professional qualifications that are established.
The professional qualifications that are established correspond to the Professional Family Graphic Arts and are listed below, ordered by Qualification Levels, the specifications of which are described in the following annexes:
Corrugated cardboard. Level 2. Annex CDXV
Manufacture of complexes, packaging, packaging, and other items
of paper and cardboard. Level 2. Annex CDXVI
Printing on flexography. Level 2.
annex CDXVIIPrint on Engraving. Level 2.
annex CDXVIIIPrint in screen printing and tampography. Level 2. Annex CDXIX
Industrial binding operations in paperback
and hardcover. Level 2. Annex CDXX
Artistic Encuadernación. Level 3. Annex CDXXI
Single additional disposition. Update.
Taking into account the evolution of the needs of the production system and the possible social demands, as regards the qualifications established in this royal decree, an update of the content of the annexes will be carried out when necessary, in any case before the end of the five-year period since its publication.
Final disposition first. Competence title.
This royal decree is dictated by the powers conferred on the State by Article 149.1.1. on the regulation of the basic conditions guaranteeing the equality of all Spaniards in the exercise of the rights and in the fulfilment of constitutional duties and the 30th of the Constitution which attributes to the State the competence for the regulation of the conditions for obtaining, issuing and approving the academic and professional titles.
Final disposition second. Entry into force.
This royal decree will enter into force on the day following its publication in the "Official State Gazette".
Given in Madrid, on December 18, 2009.
JOHN CARLOS R.
The First Vice President of the Government and Minister of the Presidency,
MARIA TERESA FERNANDEZ DE LA VEGA SANZ
ANNEX CDXV
PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: PROCESSING OF CORRUGATED CARDBOARD
Professional Family: Graphic Arts
Level: 2
Code: ARG415_2
General competition:
Elaborate corrugated cardboard in its different varieties, preparing the raw materials, operating in auxiliary equipment, coordinating the process and controlling the finished product, according to the productivity and quality established for the process, applying the plan of prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
Competition Units:
UC1335_2: Prepare raw materials and auxiliary products for paper processing, cardboard, and other materials.
UC1336_2: Operate on auxiliary equipment and facilities in the corrugated cardboard processing process.
UC1337_2: Perform corrugated cardboard processing operations.
UC1338_2: Electronic panels control corrugated cardboard.
Professional environment:
Professional scope:
Develops its professional activity in the graphic industry, in the area of transformed paper and cardboard. In medium or large companies, with very different organizational/technological levels. He is integrated into a work team where he develops individual and group tasks in the processing of corrugated cardboard. In general it will depend organically on an intermediate command. The work is carried out on behalf of others.
Productive Sectors:
Within the sector of graphic industries, in the subsector of paper and cardboard, in the area of packaging and packaging and processed paper and cardboard. It can also be part of any other sector in which different processes are carried out, some of them being.
Relevant Occupations and Jobs:
Driver of the wavy train.
Machine driver for the manufacture of corrugated cardboard.
Ondular body operator.
Operator of the double-strainer.
Calderer and queue preparer.
Scavenger operator in corrugated cardboard processing companies.
Cogeneration operator in corrugated cardboard manufacturing companies.
Cut shredder operator.
Associated training: (420 hours)
Training Modules
MF1335_2: Raw materials and auxiliary products in paper, cardboard and other materials processing processes. (120 hours)
MF1336_2: Equipment and auxiliary facilities in the processing of corrugated cardboard. (90 hours).
MF1337_2: Corrugated cardboard processing operations. (120 hours)
MF1338_2: Control of corrugated cardboard. (90 hours)
COMPETITION UNIT 1: PREPARING RAW MATERIALS AND ANCILLARY PRODUCTS FOR THE PROCESSING OF PAPER, CARDBOARD AND OTHER MATERIALS
Level: 2
Code: UC1335_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Interpret work orders, checking that they contain the precise instructions for preparing the raw materials and auxiliary products needed for the transformation of paper, cardboard and other materials into graphic products with quality and productivity criteria.
CR1.1 The work order is verified by checking that it contains all the necessary technical information regarding quality and productivity.
CR1.2 The technical and production information shown in the work order is interpreted according to the instructions regarding raw materials, auxiliary products and intermediate materials: papers, plastics, glues, adhesives, inks, polymer granars, paraffins and others.
CR1.3 The model, test or any other product that serves as a model is contrasted by checking the consistency with the raw materials, auxiliary products and intermediate materials and other indications of the work order.
CR1.4 The characteristics and specifications of the raw materials and the auxiliary products to be transformed: information of the supports, systems of attachment of the materials, types of grits, types of tails and adhesives, finishes and others are contrasted verifying that they meet the standards or standards of quality.
RP2: Prepare the paper supports, plastics and other complexes for processing in graphic products, according to the technical specifications of the work order, in order to guarantee correct food and the continuity of production.
CR2.1 The supply of the media to be transformed is coordinated with the warehouse ensuring continuity in production.
CR2.2 The media to be transformed is handled and manipulated according to established work procedures and is deposited on a machine foot to facilitate power during production.
CR2.3 The dimensions, quantity, and quality of the media to be transformed are checked by ensuring their correspondence with the work order specifications.
CR2.4 The intermediate to transform supports are reviewed by checking the absence of defects in previous phases, recording the incidents or informing the person responsible for taking corrective action.
CR2.5 The media to be transformed is checked by ensuring the absence of hits, cuts, curvature or other defects that hinder production.
CR2.6 The temperature, relative humidity, and other characteristics of the paper and paperboard media are measured by checking that their values are within the tolerance margins established in the work order.
CR2.7 Thickness, static electricity, stiffness, flexibility and other characteristics of non-paper supports and others as well as previous surface treatments are measured by checking that their values are within the tolerance margins established in the work order.
CR2.8 All operations for the preparation and control of the media to be transformed are carried out in accordance with the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
RP3: Prepare the auxiliary products and intermediate materials involved in the processing of paper, cardboard and other materials in graphic products, taking into account their technical specifications and conditions of use to ensure their correct application during production.
CR3.1 Polymer glues, adhesives and granars are selected taking into account the final quality of the product by applying the criteria of the company's manual of procedure and the indications of the work order.
CR3.2 Polymeric tails, adhesives and granars are prepared in the amount and at the appropriate temperature according to the environmental working conditions and the type of material, applying the criteria described in the technical specifications.
CR3.3 The physico-chemical properties of the glues and adhesives are modified by adding additives or with other operations until their optimal machine operation is achieved, according to application instructions.
CR3.4 The varnishes, paraffins and polymeric granars are conditioned according to the technical characteristics of the product to be transformed.
CR3.5 The necessary auxiliary products and intermediate materials: stamping films, window materials, bag handles, wires or staples and others are organized in the machine environment guaranteeing quantity and quality according to production order and production continuity.
CR3.6 The printing forms are reviewed by checking the surface finish and the absence of defects such as ink debris, dust, strokes, scratches, or others.
CR3.7 The inks or other display elements are suitable for the type of printing, type of support, required finish or other changes of viscosity, temperature and other characteristics according to the quality specifications and productivity requirements.
CR3.8 The waste generated in the preparation of auxiliary products and intermediate materials is treated according to the guidelines of the plan of prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
CR3.9 All operations for the preparation of auxiliary products and intermediate materials are carried out in accordance with the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
Professional context:
Production media:
Queue preparation equipment, adhesives, granars and additives. Measuring elements and instruments: scale, meter, flexometer, hygrometer, micrometer, viscosimeter and others. Supports in sheets or coils: papers, cartons, plastics and others. Glues, adhesives, granars and their additives. Auxiliary products and intermediate materials: wire, wire, PVC, tails, linings, inks, printing films, staples, bag handles, window materials and others. Auxiliary equipment for the preparation of materials and products for processing. Personal protective equipment.
Products and results:
Queues, adhesives, and granars prepared for the transformation process. Supports prepared for the processing process: paper supports, plastic supports and others. Auxiliary products and intermediate materials prepared for processing: wire, wire, PVC, tails, linings, inks, printing films, staples, bag handles, window materials and others.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Models, samples and tests. Characteristics and technical specifications of the papers, cartons and other materials to be processed. The company's manual of procedure. Record sheets. Technical documentation of equipment. Quality standards and standards. Incident log documents. Plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
COMPETITION UNIT 2: OPERATING IN AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES IN THE PROCESSING OF CORRUGATED CARDBOARD
Level: 2
Code: UC1336_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Perform the operations of commissioning of the boilers to achieve their correct operation during the processing of corrugated cardboard according to the Regulations of Apparatus to Pressure.
CR1.1 The commissioning operations of the boiler are performed according to the sequence set out in the commissioning instructions.
CR1.2 The burner is checked for cleaning.
CR1.3 Fuel and water circuits are verified by checking that they respond to the needs of the boiler.
CR1.4 Home blowing is done by checking that there are no gas condensations in the boot.
CR1.5 The water level is checked by purging and verifying the level indicator.
CR1.6 The auxiliary units of the boiler are adjusted according to the technical commissioning instructions.
CR1.7 The fuel level in the tanks is checked and recharged, if necessary, achieving the total autonomy of the boiler.
CR1.8 The lighting of the boilers is performed according to the established procedure.
CR1.9 The commissioning operations of the boilers are carried out by applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
RP2: Perform the conduction of the boilers to generate the necessary steam in the processing of corrugated cardboard according to the Regulations of Apparatus to Pressure.
CR2.1 The quality of the flame is checked by visual observation of the color and form, cleaning the locks if necessary.
CR2.2 The temperature and pressure indicators are maintained in the required values according to technical instructions for the operation of the boiler informing the responsible in case of incidents.
CR2.3 Sludge and foams containing the boiler are removed by performing surface and bottom purges.
CR2.4 Power water consumption is maintained within the operating parameters informing the controller in case of incidents.
CR2.5 The boiler stop operations are performed by following the sequence set in the procedure manual.
CR2.6 The main maneuvers and incidents are recorded in the existing Register Books for this purpose.
CR2.7 The boiler conduction operations are performed by applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
RP3: Perform the basic maintenance of boilers and auxiliary facilities for their perfect operation during their productive life, according to the Regulations of Apparatus to Pressure.
CR3.1 The burner is cleaned according to established procedures and with the periodicity established in the company's maintenance plan.
CR3.2 Wearable items are reviewed by checking their status, replacing them if needed.
CR3.3 The measurement devices of levels, safety valves and gauges are checked to ensure their correct operation and remain operational according to maintenance requirements.
CR3.4 The boiler safety measures are checked with the periodicity set out in the procedure manual, verifying that the operating parameters are maintained in the established values.
CR3.5 Possible water, steam and fuel leaks are communicated to the maintenance service or other responsible for taking corrective action.
CR3.6 Fuel filters are cleaned or replaced according to the indications in the maintenance plan and are checked for operation during the process.
CR3.7 Isolations are reviewed by checking their status and repairing them if they are defective, informing the person responsible if necessary.
CR3.8 The pressure equipment regulation and the boiler technical inspection manual are maintained in an accessible place for consultation.
CR3.9 The boiler maintenance operations are performed by applying the safety standards specified in the occupational risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
RP4: Operate in the pressure equipment by supplying compressed air or other fluids for the processing of corrugated cardboard, following established working protocols.
CR4.1 Cooling systems-generators, tubes, interchangers and others-hydraulic and air compressor equipment are set in motion following the sequence of operations set out in the commissioning manual and synchronised with the rest of the work area equipment.
CR4.2 Cooling circuits, hydraulic equipment and air compressors are kept in operation throughout production, setting parameters and adjusting them by means of automatic control and control.
CR4.3 Cooling systems-generators, tubes, exchangers and others-hydraulic and air compressor equipment are stopped following the sequence of established operations, in a coordinated manner with other work area equipment.
CR4.4 The operating parameters of the entire process are always kept under control by acting manually or through the control computer systems.
CR4.5 Unanticipated situations during the process are communicated to take corrective action based on the instructions of the hierarchical superior.
CR4.6 The operations in the pressure equipment are carried out by applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
RP5: Perform basic maintenance operations for power cogeneration equipment and water treatment equipment to maintain stable system performance values according to work instructions.
CR5.1 The values of the water treatment equipment reagents are maintained at the indicated margin according to work instructions.
CR5.2 The collection of the waste generated by the queues, adhesives and others is performed according to established procedures.
CR5.3 The gas and energy consumption values produced are maintained at the indicated margin according to established procedures.
CR5.4 The cleaning of the filters is done periodically, according to the specific instructions for maintenance and following the established procedures, avoiding incidents in the production.
CR5.5 Equipment lubrication is performed periodically by introducing the appropriate fluid into the grease points.
CR5.6 Maintenance operations in cogeneration and water treatment equipment are carried out in accordance with the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
RP6: Operate on the compaction and packaging machine of paper and cardboard cutouts for collection and recycling.
CR6.1 The handling of the compaction and packaging press is performed according to the guidelines set out in the technical manual of operations.
CR6.2 The packaging that is made with deficiencies is solved by cutting the wire and threading again.
CR6.3 Cuts are pushed manually when jams occur.
CR6.4 Bullets are checked by verifying that the bound has been performed correctly.
CR6.5 The packaging system is handled and checked according to the specifications set.
CR6.6 Operations on the clipping compaction and packaging machine are performed by applying the safety standards specified in the occupational risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
Professional context:
Production media:
Pressure equipment. Compaction and packaging machines. Cooling systems. Hydraulic equipment. Automatic control systems and regulators. Cogeneration equipment. Water purification equipment. Personal protective equipment. Boilers. Measurement and control devices. Waste containers.
Products and results:
Water vapor. Compaction and packaging of cuts. Recovered water. Energy produced by cogeneration equipment in corrugated cardboard manufacturing companies. Water scrubbed by water purification equipment in corrugated cardboard processing companies. Start-up operations. Driving boilers. Maintenance of boilers. Stop operations.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Technical specifications. The company's working protocol. Technical manual of operations. Instructions for setting up boilers. Regulation of pressure equipment. Manual of technical inspection of boilers. Plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection. Incidents reported in the Book Register.
COMPETITION UNIT 3: PERFORM CORRUGATED CARDBOARD PROCESSING OPERATIONS
Level: 2
Code: UC1337_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Operate in the feeder and splicing units to achieve continuity in the feeding of the paper using established means and tools.
CR1.1 The elements and mechanisms of the feeding units: portabobins, tension bodies, transport elements and others are verified and adapted to the physical characteristics and the needs of the papers forming the corrugated cardboard.
CR1.2 The coils entering the production phase are monitored and adjusted as to parallelism with the rest of the coils already loaded to avoid production deficiencies.
CR1.3 Testers, flaxes, mandrel, and paper overlays of the coils are removed using the specific tools in each case and depositing them in the waste container.
CR1.4 The coil is placed in the splicing head, using the appropriate controls, checking that its visible face is the correct one and enabling its entry into the machine under conditions of continuity.
CR1.5 Unconsumed coil remains on each order are removed and identified according to established work procedures.
CR1.6 The splicing unit is prepared to automatically splice the coil when it is next to be consumed or when it corresponds to the order change, depending on the job schedule.
CR1.7 The operations on the different devices are performed by applying the safety standards specified in the occupational risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
RP2: Prepare the corrugated and glued bodies to ensure the wave and the correct sizing of the different faces of the cardboard under conditions of quality, safety and productivity predetermined.
CR2.1 The indicators for steam, cooling water, compressed air and hydraulic are checked to ensure that they are in a position to start the work.
CR2.2 Heaters and wetters are in accordance with the established production values for the materials to enter into the double filling in optimum conditions for the production.
CR2.3 The pressures of the press rolling rollers and the brake of the carrier are checked and adjusted according to instructions.
CR2.4 The limiters of the strainer rollers are positioned according to widths and grammages of the material.
CR2.5 The temperature and position of the preheaters and the drying table are checked visually or by means of indicators, keeping them in the appropriate values to work.
CR2.6 The press roll is placed by mechanical systems at the appropriate height according to the wave to be manufactured by avoiding crushing or air bags.
CR2.7 The components of the tails: starch, soda, fungicides and others, are verified according to the instructions, adding in their preparation special resins when the cartons must resist moisture.
CR2.8 The devices for adjusting the thickness of the tail film to be applied are regulated according to the instructions of the work order and the characteristics of the materials to achieve the connection between the different faces by means of the correct sizing of the crest of the channels.
CR2.9 The parameters of the entire set are checked and adjusted, either manually or by electronic control systems, depending on the production speeds and the material's grammages.
CR2.10 Preparation operations are performed by applying the security rules specified in the occupational risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
RP3: Adjust the slitter or dry part of the machine to obtain the corrugated cardboard plates taking into account the technical data of the order.
CR3.1 The drying tables are controlled by checking that the temperature and humidity parameters are in the determined values avoiding malformations of the product.
CR3.2 The cut and cleft blades are placed and adjusted according to the order instructions and the work order specifications respecting the correct distance and height from the blade.
CR3.3 The cross cutting blades are regulated by adjusting the position, angle and profile of the cutting, according to the instructions of the work order and the characteristics of the material, guaranteeing the established quality.
CR3.4 The stacking devices of the formatted corrugated cardboard plates are adjusted according to the size and the indications defined in the work order.
CR3.5 Adjustment operations are performed by applying the security rules specified in the occupational risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
RP4: Get the corrugated cardboard according to the established quality parameters, and the technical production instructions, achieving the optimum performance of the wavy train.
CR4.1 The speed of the wavy train is set according to the needs of the production and following the directions of the work order.
CR4.2 The portabobins are controlled by ensuring continuous feeding and checking the constant and necessary tension of the paper coils.
CR4.3 The waver and the gluing of the faces in the different bodies of the wavy train is performed by checking that the technical indications of production are met.
CR4.4 The transverse cut in the slitter is performed by checking that a symmetrical cut is produced without incorrect or defective cuts, guaranteeing the established quality.
CR4.5 The formateed corrugated cardboard plates are regrouped by means of the conveyor belt, a system for collecting plates, forming the hair of the machine.
CR4.6 Production parts are completed by recording the anomalies observed during the run, facilitating the valuation and control of production.
CR4.7 The paper meters used together with the leftovers are recorded enabling the automatic calculation of the corresponding weights
CR4.8 The incidences produced during the corrugated cardboard manufacturing process are resolved and communicated to the driver of the machine.
CR4.9 Machine handling is performed by applying the safety standards specified in the occupational risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
RP5: Perform first-level maintenance of equipment and facilities for proper operation in accordance with established standards on safety and environmental protection.
CR5.1 The assigned equipment and elements are retained in the established operating conditions by means of performances in accordance with the first-level maintenance plan, such as:
Changes of items that suffer wear and tear
Simple tasks of calibrating or maintaining the instruments or equipment that you use in the simple tests you perform.
Cleanup of items of equipment that you can perform by your own media.
CR5.2 The grease and other first-level maintenance operations of the equipment and facilities are performed according to the manufacturer's instructions and the established maintenance plan.
CR5.3 Security devices are checked and maintained according to the current risk prevention plan.
CR5.4 Fixed and interchangeable elements, blades and counter-sheets are cleaned, reviewed and sharpened by keeping in the operational levels set out in the company's maintenance plan and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
CR5.5 The area of your responsibility is kept clean of residual materials produced by the works that are developed in it according to the defined procedures.
CR5.6 The actions set forth in the first-level maintenance plan are performed according to the defined periodicity and recording the required data in the enabled documents.
CR5.7 Maintenance operations are performed by applying the security rules specified in the occupational risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
Professional context:
Production media:
Wave train: splicing unit, undulating unit, drying tables. Electronic control systems. System for collecting plates. Measuring instruments. Pressure regulators. Temperature and humidity markers. Waste containers. Personal protective equipment.
Products and results:
Preparation and control of the coils. Preparation and adjustment of the splicing unit. Preparation and adjustment of the undulating unit. Preparation of the double strainer. Preparation and adjustment of the slitter or dry part of the machine. Gluing up the different papers. Roll-on paper in coil. Corrugated cardboard in coil. Corrugated cardboard plates. First-level cleaning and maintenance of equipment and facilities.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Quality standards. Production parameters. Parts of production. Parts of incidents. Technical documentation of the elements of the machine. The company's manual of procedure. Maintenance log sheets. Maintenance plan. Plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
COMPETITION UNIT 4: ELECTRONICALLY CONTROL CORRUGATED CARDBOARD
Level: 2
Code: UC1338_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Coordinate the operations of the start-up of the wavy train and the production process to achieve the established quality and productivity, according to the defined working protocols.
CR1.1 The technical specifications of the product that appear in the work order: quantity to produce, type of paper, adhesives, wave height, quality control parameters and others are checked for consistency with the production to be performed.
CR1.2 The work schedule of the different parts of the process is determined by taking into account the order pool data that appears in the schedule in order to reduce the waste in the format changes.
CR1.3 The incidents and the data about the order change are communicated in real time to the rest of the team ensuring the continuity of the process.
CR1.4 The electronic control systems of the processing process of corrugated cardboard are connected and their parameters are placed in the initial position.
CR1.5 The steam and queue indicators are checked by ensuring that they are in the correct initial production values.
CR1.6 The production parameters are introduced into the corresponding control desks, allowing the desired quality and productivity to be achieved.
CR1.7 The coordination between the operators of the different units of the wavy train is carried out by applying the established communication techniques, synchronizing their functions so that the different production cycles coincide in time.
RP2: Control the processing of the corrugated cardboard plates, through the information received in the control panels, following the instructions of the work order, modifying the necessary parameters or giving instructions to the rest of the team to execute them.
CR2.1 The operation of the wavy train is controlled by visualizing the graphics and at all times controlling the parameters of the process from the cabin: variables of temperature, pressures, humidity and other factors, avoiding any modifications in the final product.
CR2.2 The speed of the wavy train is controlled by maintaining production within the established levels, informing the person responsible for any incidents or deviations that arise.
CR2.3 The different units of the wavy train are displayed and controlled together, checking that all the parameters are within the allowed ranges, optimizing the control of the energy and the management of raw materials and consumables: papers, tails and adhesives.
CR2.4 The incidents or deviations that arise during the process are corrected by adjusting the possible parameters by the cockpit control panels or by giving the necessary technical instructions to the rest of the team for resolution.
CR2.5 The wave formation is checked by identifying possible defects and giving instructions to the rest of the team for modification.
CR2.6 The amount of queues in the reservoir is controlled by remaining in the required and marked values in the system, ensuring the constant supply to the waver during production.
CR2.7 The position of the cutting side blades and the cardboard cleft mechanisms during production is verified with the frequency set in the quality plan or the work order.
CR2.8 The cut-off collection system is checked at each order change by verifying that the side cuts are correctly entered into the sinks or vacuum cleaners, according to environmental protection criteria.
CR2.9 The stacking, palletizing and strapping of the cardboard plates is controlled by verifying that it is performed correctly and according to the specifications of the work order, appropriately identifying.
RP3: Check the quality of corrugated cardboard by making appropriate corrective measures to ensure compliance with the quality of the work order.
CR3.1 Product control is carried out on a routine machine-foot basis, observing the development of production in the different units of the wavy train and applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
CR3.2 The product quality control and sampling operations are performed quickly and effectively using the tools and tools established by the company.
CR3.3 The finished product is controlled by doing the appropriate tests, checking the alabate, gluing, ribbed and other defects by performing the precise correction actions or informing the person responsible.
CR3.4 The sampling and control of the product is carried out according to the frequency established by the technical office or the indications of the work order guaranteeing the uniformity and quality throughout the production.
CR3.5 Checking the size, format, thickness and consistency of corrugated cardboard is done methodically, using the most appropriate instruments for each measurement.
CR3.6 The color and consistency of the cardboard and paper defects such as stains, mots, dents, buttonking, and others is checked by visual and fingerprint observation of the plate or coil.
CR3.7 The defects that are detected during production: sizing, wave formation, planing of the cardboard plate or others are corrected by modifying the necessary parameters from the control desks: pressure of the glue group, viscosity and temperature of the tails, temperature of drying of the cardboard, steam input in the wave or other, and informing the responsible if necessary.
CR3.8 Data regarding quality controls, performed during production, are recorded in the company-enabled document.
CR3.9 The representative samples of the manufactured product are collected, labelled and moved according to the indications of the company's quality plan for the subsequent quality analysis.
Professional context:
Production media:
Wave train: splicing unit, undulating unit, drying tables. Electronic control systems. Quality control tools and tools. Personal protective equipment. Waste containers.
Products and results:
Coordination of operations on the wavy train. Process control using electronic systems. Optimization of production. Control of the production variables of the different units of the wavy train during the process. Control of wave formation. Control of the tails and the sizing of the different faces. Control of the cut and the sides of corrugated cardboard. Correction of detected defects. Control of the collection and recycling of waste. Control of the stack, palletized and flapping of the product. Quality control of corrugated cardboard. Preparation of samples for analysis and quality control.
Information used or generated:
Work Orders. Order planning. Programming of the work. Working protocols. The company's quality plan. Technical specifications of the product. Record of the quality data. Graphs of the process parameters. Technical manual of the wavy train and electronic control systems. Plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
TRAINING MODULE 1: RAW MATERIALS AND ANCILLARY PRODUCTS IN PAPER, PAPERBOARD AND OTHER MATERIALS PROCESSING PROCESSES
Level: 2
Code: MF1335_2
Associate with UC: Preparing raw materials and auxiliary products for paper, cardboard, and other materials transformation
Duration: 120 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Interpret different work orders by discriminating against the components, instructions and specifications of models and models related to the preparation of raw materials, auxiliary products and intermediate materials used in the processing of paper, cardboard and other materials.
CE1.1 Identify the elements that make up a production order of a product to transform and describe the instructions related to the preparation of raw materials, auxiliary products and intermediate materials for the transformation of paper, cardboard and other materials that appear in it.
CE1.2 Identify different product models for the transformation that are typically attached to production orders and recognize the instructions that are noted.
CE1.3 Starting from the model, test or any other product that serves as a model, to locate and identify the raw materials and auxiliary products according to the indications of a proposed work order as an example.
CE1.4 In a practical exercise and from different processed products, identify the information regarding the supports, union or soldier systems, conversion parameters, inks and others, verifying that they meet the standards or standards of quality.
CE1.5 In a practical case, identify the technical and production information for the preparation of the raw materials to be used: papers, cartons, plastics, glues, adhesives, ink, photopolymers, stitching wires and others.
CE1.6 In a practical scenario for a simulated process of transforming paper, cardboard, and other materials, from a given production order:
Check that the production order consists of the elements required for the entire transformation process.
Verify that all the necessary data is collected for the correct preparation of the raw materials, auxiliary products and intermediate materials involved in the process: papers, cartons, plastics, glues, adhesives, ink, photopolymers, stitching wires and others.
Perform a sequencing of the processing of paper, cardboard, and other materials by interpreting the given work order.
C2: To value the behavior of the auxiliary products and intermediate materials used in the processes of transformation of paper, cardboard and other materials, relating them to their application.
CE2.1 Differential and describe the properties of materials and products used in paper, cardboard, and other materials processing processes
CE2.2 Using practical examples, identifying different printer forms and their application in paper, cardboard and other materials processing processes.
CE2.3 From a given work order, perform an assumption in which the appropriate queues and adhesives are chosen for the product to be transformed.
CE2.4 In a properly characterized case, measure the environmental conditions of a workshop and correctly interpret the technical specifications by adjusting the parameters of utilization, temperature and quantity to the type of materials that will be transformed.
CE2.5 Determine the factors that make raw materials compatible with each job to be performed.
CE2.6 In a practical case, check that given raw materials are consistent and compatible with the graphical product to be converted.
CE2.7 Relate physico-chemical properties of the raw materials as glues and adhesives with the various applicable additives to modify said properties.
CE2.8 In a properly characterized scenario:
Estimate the amount of queues required for the deposits to be held in the required values that will allow the constant supply to the system.
Adjust the physical-chemical properties of glues and adhesives, adding additives to achieve optimal operating values on machines, according to application instructions.
CE2.9 In a scenario, where work orders are used in which different print systems need to be used:
Identify the printing forms, and their characteristics of quality and good use, identifying defects such as: hits, scratches, traces of ink, dust and others, both in the image areas and in the non-image.
Prepare the ink so that the viscosity, temperature, and other properties conform to the intended parameters of use according to the process where it is to be used: type of print, type of support, required finish, or others.
CE2.10 In a practical scenario in which traceability registration forms are handled for the materials used during the processing process: queues, wire, inks and others, making the records provided for in the procedures of an alleged company.
CE2.11 Identify the safety standards specified in the plan of prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection of a real company in a way that in a practical case, the waste generated in the preparation of the raw materials is treated according to the guidelines of the plan of prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
C3: Valoring the characteristics of the paper and plastic supports in relation to the transformation process, by means of physical-chemical tests.
CE3.1 Describe the characteristics and properties of the different media to transform and relate to the transformation processes, valuing the compatibility between them.
CE3.2 In the laboratory of raw materials and materials, carry out tests for the correct use of the measuring devices of the properties of the supports.
CE3.3 Measure the temperature, relative humidity, and other characteristics of the paper and paper media: paper and cardboard checking that their values are within the established tolerance margins.
CE3.4 Measure thickness, static electricity, stiffness, flexibility, and other characteristics of plastic and other media, as well as surface treatments, checking that their values are within established tolerance margins
C4: Prepare the different raw materials used in the main processing processes of paper, cardboard, plastics or others, applying the quality and safety standards of the process.
CE4.1 Describe the quality and safety standards applicable to raw materials and materials used in processing systems for graphic products.
CE4.2 From given materials, check that the dimensions, quantity and quality of the support to be transformed correspond to the specifications of the work order.
CE4.3 In a practical exercise and from a given work order, aerate and match the formatted support by breaking the adherence of the sheets and stacking it by following the indications received or established in the work order.
CE4.4 Identify possible defects that can occur in the printing of intermediate, die-cut, and other materials, as well as their possible causes and consequences.
CE4.5 From intermediate, pre-printed or die-cut materials:
Review and check the absence of defects in the printing phase, the correction of the die-cut, the position and quality of the injured and others.
Register data about a report to take appropriate corrective action.
CE4.6 Describe and relate possible media defects to the difficulties they may cause in production according to the subsequent processing processes indicated.
CE4.7 Taking real examples, identifying in the supports to be converted, possible defects such as: hits, cuts, curvature or other defects that hinder production.
CE4.8 Identify and interpret the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection for the operations of preparation and control of the supports to be transformed.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C2 with respect to CE2.5, CE2.9 and CE2.11; C4 with respect to CE4.3 and CE4.5.
Other capabilities:
Habit to the business rhythm of the company.
Respect the company's internal rules and procedures.
Take responsibility for the work you develop.
Recognize the organization's productive process.
Adapt to the organization by integrating into the system of technical-professional relations.
Interpret and execute work instructions.
Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.
Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.
Transfer information clearly, in an orderly, structured, clear and precise manner.
Contents:
1. Preparation of raw materials in processing processes of paper, cardboard and other materials
Production order, models, plans and models. Instructions.
Process Sequencer. Traceability of products and materials. Forms
Identification of the materials used.
Standard measures of folds, boxes, bags, envelopes and others.
Media information to convert: join or soldier systems, conversion parameters, inks, and others.
Technical characteristics of the media: papers, cartons, plastics and other materials.
Parameters to be controlled in the preparation: quality, quantity and dimensions.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards applicable to the raw material preparation process.
2. Quality control and environmental protection of raw materials and ancillary products in paper, cardboard and other materials processing processes
Quality standards. Laboratory tests.
Testing laboratory equipment and equipment: meter, thermometer, viscosimeter, micrometer and others.
Job settings. Margins of tolerance.
Physical-chemical properties of paper media: gramage, thickness, porosity, lisura and others.
Characteristics of plastic media: thickness, static electricity, rigidity, flexibility.
Characteristics and properties of the inks: Viscosity, temperature, drying time and others.
Resistance to the rub and scratches of inks, varnishes, glues and adhesives.
Visual checks: correct die-chelation, position, quality of the hones.
Adjustment of the physico-chemical characteristics of the glues and adhesives. Additives. Modification of properties.
Job settings. Margins of tolerance.
Environmental protection rules in preparation processes.
3. Behaviour of materials in relation to processing processes of paper, cardboard and other materials
Properties of materials and products.
Compatibility of materials with transformation processes: factors to consider.
Possible defects in media that make production difficult.
Print systems built into the transformation process.
Environmental working conditions. Temperature and humidity.
Application of the products.
Printer shapes and their application.
Selection of adhesives. Use manuals.
4. Preparation of auxiliary products for processing processes of paper, cardboard and other materials under safety conditions
Auxiliary products: queues, adhesives, inks, printer shapes, wires.
Observing defects in printer shapes: hits, scratches, and others.
Product characteristics: Environmental working conditions.
Usage, temperature, and quality parameters.
Estimating the amount of queues and adhesives.
Safety and health rules applicable to the processing of auxiliary products.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
60 m trial lab2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation of raw materials and ancillary products for the processing of paper, cardboard and other materials, which shall be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Technical Engineer, Diplomacy, Technical Architect or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 2: AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES IN THE MANUFACTURE OF CORRUGATED CARDBOARD
Level: 2
Code: MF1336_2
Associate to UC: Operate on auxiliary equipment and facilities in the processing of corrugated cardboard
Duration: 90 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Interpret the Apparatus Regulation to Pressure and complementary technical instructions, identifying the rules of action on boilers.
CE1.1 Explain the terminology, definitions and classification of the rules included in the regulations of pressure equipment.
CE1.2 Identify the operating and commissioning standards for boilers that appear in the regulation of pressure equipment.
CE1.3 Describe the technical characteristics of the boilers that are commonly used in the processing of corrugated cardboard.
CE1.4 From a given technical instruction and taking into account the Appliances to Pressure Regulation:
Interpret the drawings, drawings and illustrative sheets necessary for the compression of the text.
Relate the operating rules to the characteristics of the boiler.
C2: Carry out operation and conduction of boilers used in the manufacture of corrugated cardboard, by means of simulators or with real equipment, collecting the data and incidents in a book.
CE2.1 Identify the parameters to regulate and control in the operations of commissioning and conduction of boilers according to the manual of technical instructions.
CE2.2 Identify the regulations on risk prevention linked to the operations of commissioning and driving of boilers.
CE2.3 Recognize the auxiliary elements of the facilities in corrugated cardboard processing.
CE2.4 Explain the initial commissioning system of a boiler.
CE2.5 Describe the most common maneuvers in the conduction of the boilers used in the processing of corrugated cardboard.
CE2.6 In a practical case of operation of commissioning and driving of boilers by means of simulators or with real equipment, duly characterised:
Interpret the commissioning instructions for the boiler.
Describe the most important elements to control while driving the boiler.
Make a sequencing of the operations to be performed by following the phases set out in the commissioning and driving instructions.
Activate the power-on systems and other auxiliary elements and check the quality of the flame.
Perform water and fuel consumption checks.
Register all maneuvers performed in a record book.
CE2.7 In a practical case, properly characterized by the operation of boilers and by means of the use of a simulator, adjust the pressure and the temperature, by means of manual or automatic controls, so that the necessary conditions are maintained to carry out the processing of corrugated cardboard with safety and efficiency.
CE2.8 Perform boiler-stop operations, using simulators or with real equipment, following instructions given.
C3: Perform basic boiler maintenance operations, collecting the incidents in a log book.
CE3.1 Describe the elements of the boilers usually used in processes of the manufacture of corrugated cardboard susceptible of wear.
CE3.2 Identify the basic maintenance operations that appear in the instruction books of the elements that make up the boiler installation.
CE3.3 In a practical case of boiler maintenance, properly characterized:
Identify, unmount, and clean all items that are susceptible to such maintenance.
Check the performance of measurement devices for levels, safety valves and gauges.
Perform all operations by applying risk prevention regulations linked to maintenance operations.
CE3.4 In a series of scenarios, where incidents are simulated, detected and recorded in the log book.
C4: Operate in cogeneration and water treatment groups, using simulators or real equipment, applying the current safety and environmental protection measures.
CE4.1 Recognize the control parameters of a cogeneration system.
CE4.2 Identify the elements of the cogeneration and sewage treatment groups that can be maintained.
CE4.3 In a practical case of operations in cogeneration and water treatment groups, characterized by a given technical instruction:
Check that power consumption readings are maintained at the default values.
Perform the cleaning of the necessary items with the periodicity that mark the given instructions.
CE4.4 Identify the values to be controlled in a water treatment team.
CE4.5 In a practical case of operations in water treatment equipment and given the following technical instructions:
Maintain the values of the reagents in the values indicated in the instructions
Control with the logistics department the supply of all items
Perform all operations by applying risk prevention regulations linked to operations with water treatment equipment.
C5: Operate in pressure equipment that supply compressed air or other pressure fluids, by means of simulators or real equipment, for a processing of corrugated cardboard.
CE5.1 Relate cooling systems-generators, tubes, exchangers and others-hydraulic and air compressor equipment with the sequences to be followed in the operations set out in the commissioning manual.
CE5.2 Identify regulators, automatic control means, refrigeration circuits, hydraulic equipment and compressors of a pressure equipment installation.
CE5.3 In a practical case of operations with pressure equipment and given proper technical instructions:
Operate manually on regulators and automatic means of control.
Maintain cooling circuits, hydraulic equipment and air compressors during operation under the conditions required by the specifications indicated.
Stop cooling systems-generators, tubes, exchangers, and other-hydraulic equipment and air compressors following the sequence of established operations.
Perform all operations by applying risk prevention regulations linked to operations with pressure equipment.
CE5.4 In a series of scenarios, where incidents are simulated, detected and collected in a facilitated document.
CE5.5 In a practical case properly characterized and from a given pressure equipment, perform basic maintenance of the system following a given technical instructions.
C6: Apply the work guidelines set out in the technical manuals for the compaction and packaging operations of paper, cardboard and other complex cuts.
CE6.1 Identify the work guidelines for the process of compacting the cuts, established in the technical operations manuals.
CE6.2 Identify the safety, health and environmental protection measures to be taken in the compaction and packaging of cuts in a plan for the prevention of work risks for corrugated cardboard companies.
CE6.3 In a practical case, properly characterized from compaction and packaging of paper, cardboard and other complex cuts:
Perform the tying or flapping of the bullets.
Verify the quality of the tethered.
Cut and thread, if any, redoing the process.
Apply the safety and environmental protection rules in the process.
Perform operations by following the guidelines set out in a technical operations manual.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C2 with respect to CE2.6 and CE2.7; C3 with respect to CE3.3 and CE3.4; C4 with respect to CE4.3 and CE4.5; C5 with respect to CE5.3, CE5.4 and CE5.5; C6 with respect to CE6.3.
Other capabilities:
Respect internal company procedures and rules
Interpreting and running work instructions
Adapting to the organization by integrating into the system of technical-professional relations
Contents
1. Control of equipment and auxiliary systems for the manufacture of corrugated cardboard
Operations in cogeneration groups. Operating settings
Operations in water treatment groups. Operating values.
Control parameters
Pressure equipment operations. Regulators and automatic control means
Incidents during the control process
Compact and cutout operations. Work patterns. Technical manuals for operations.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to control of auxiliary systems.
2. Commissioning and driving of boilers
Technical characteristics of boilers.
Start-up operations. Regulation of Apparatus to Pressure
Incidents in the process. Book record.
Regulatory parameters.
Fuel and water circuits.
Transmission of heat in boilers.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the conduction of boilers.
3. Basic maintenance of boilers and auxiliary installations
Maintenance rules contained in the Regulations to Pressure.
Level Measurement Devices. Safety valves. Manometers.
Burner cleaning procedures, filters, and others.
Maintenance of gaskets. Greases.
Checking the security systems.
4. Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to auxiliary operations in the manufacture of corrugated cardboard
Prevention of occupational risks.
Regulations linked to the treatment of waste.
Regulations related to the driving and maintenance of boilers.
Regulations related to the maintenance and control of auxiliary facilities.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
Transformed 150 m2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to operations in equipment and ancillary facilities in the processing of corrugated cardboard, which shall be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Superior Technician or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 3: CORRUGATED CARDBOARD PROCESSING OPERATIONS
Level: 2
Code: MF1337_2
Associated with UC: Perform Onduside Carton Processing Operations
Duration: 120 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Determine the implications of the processing of corrugated cardboard as well as the operation, characteristics, operations and constructive elements of the equipment involved.
CE1.1 Identify the main constructive elements of the different types of wavers.
CE1.2 Explain the function of the basic systems and elements of the corrugated cardboard.
CE1.3 Justify the need for the use of thermal energy and humidity to soften the paper and mechanical energy to achieve regular and stable undulations in the same.
CE1.4 Relating corrugated cardboard structure: simple face, double face, triple wavy with manufacturing technology.
CE1.5 Determine the parameters that characterize the waves of the corrugated cardboard such as distance between the vertex and the base, distance between two consecutive vertices, number of waves per meter and others.
CE1.6 Justify the disposition of the slits with the final format of the corrugated cardboard plates.
CE1.7 Relate the layout and speed of the blades with the final dimensions of the corrugated cardboard plates.
CE1.8 From a graphical, corrugated cardboard manufacturing scheme:
Identify the bodies that make up the production line: feeding group, corrugated hot tables, and cutters, as well as the functions of each of them in the general process.
Define the variables and parameters to be controlled in the process and the graphical control systems for each body.
C2: Use splicing units using specific techniques and operations, making necessary adjustments and preparing the coil changes, using simulators or real equipment, according to different job schedules.
CE2.1 Relating the adjustment elements of the splicing unit to the function they perform in the placement of coils.
CE2.2 Determine the position of the faces of the coil so that the paper enters the machine with the right view, as well as the consequences of a defective entry.
CE2.3 In a practical case of placement of coils, by means of simulators or real equipment, duly characterized by the following technical instructions:
Place the coil by the appropriate controls in the correct position to make the splicing, checking that the input view of the coil is correct.
Position the splicing head in position to make the change and prepare it for the splicing to be performed automatically when the meters for the splice are zero.
Hold the paper by the suction mechanism of the splicing head and place the two-sided adhesive tapes at the tip of the paper according to the established work instructions.
CE2.4 In a practical case of preparation of the cardboard production in which different coils are placed:
Monitor the coils that enter the production phase and adjust them in parallel with the rest of the coils already loaded, avoiding deficiencies in the production.
Control the portabobins by checking that they feed the corrugated paper and cardboard faces, developing the sheets continuously and under constant pressure.
C3: Apply technical adjustment procedures in wave units, using simulators or real equipment, to achieve the cardboard wave with the quality indicated in different work orders.
CE3.1 Identify the steam, cooling water, compressed air, and hydraulic markers and their corresponding units of measurement.
CE3.2 Starting from a rolling pattern of the wave, locate the heaters and wetters of the unit.
CE3.3 In several practical cases of preparing wave units using simulators or real equipment, and according to different work orders:
Interpret the given work orders.
Review the markers for steam, cooling water, compressed air, and hydraulics by checking the correct values, which indicates the work order, on the monitors.
Check the correct thread thread for the wave and the outside.
Adjust the pressures of the rolling rollers and brake the press holder according to technical instructions and the instructions on the work order.
Perform all maneuvers according to the instructions in the Manual of Technical Instructions, applying the safety, health and environmental protection regulations.
CE3.4 From practical assumptions where different incidents are simulated in the adjustment of the wavy unit, make proposals with corrective actions.
C4: Apply technical adjustment procedures in matching units, using simulators or real equipment, to achieve the correct sizing of the different faces of corrugated cardboard, according to different qualities to be defined in specific technical instructions.
CE4.1 Relate the qualities of the product to be obtained with the variation of the control parameters.
CE4.2 From queue formulation sheets, value the elements of different preparations in relation to their mass, volume and components.
CE4.3 Analyze the sequence of operations and the order of adding the components of the queue mixture in a given job cycle.
CE4.4 From a double-strainer operating scheme, locate the mechanical elements of the performance.
CE4.5 In a number of practical cases properly characterised by operations in the double-strainer, by means of simulators or real equipment, from different work orders:
Control the steam inlet, temperature and position of the preheaters at the drying table.
Check the queue level of the tray and the temperature and adjust the thickness of the film to be applied
Positioning the limiters of the strainer rollers according to widths and grammages and position the press roll in the appropriate position.
Perform all operations according to the instructions in the Manual of Technical Instructions, applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the adjustment of the double-fitting.
CE4.6 Based on practical assumptions where different incidents are simulated in the adjustment of the double strainer, make proposals with corrective actions.
C5: Apply technical adjustment procedures in the dry part of the wavy train or by means of simulators, based on the technical data of different cardboard orders.
CE5.1 Recognize the parameters to be adjusted in each of the components of the dry part of a wavy train such as drying tables, cutting blades and others.
CE5.2 Relate the types of cut and cleft blades with the different materials and types of cardboard.
CE5.3 Identify the technical data related to the adjustment of production parameters of the dry parts of the wavy train, in a given order of cardboard.
CE5.4 In a practical case of adjustments of the dry part of the wavy train or by means of simulators for the manufacture of single-sided, double-sided or triple-sided, single-sided cardboard, duly characterised by a work order:
Interpret the technical data in the work order to identify the product to be obtained.
Control the drying tables and check that the temperature and humidity parameters are in the determined values avoiding malformations of the product.
Position the longitudinal, transverse, and cleft cutting blades in the correct position, within the assembly, respecting the distance and height with respect to the blade, making a cut and a precise cleft.
Adjust the rotating rotary cutter and the cardboard displacement, achieving a precise and regular cut.
Verify, with the frequency set in the control guidelines, the cuts made to the cutting units.
Perform all operations according to the instructions in the Technical Instructions, applying the safety, health and environmental protection rules.
Records the failures observed during the adjustment and the corresponding assessment.
C6: Operate in corrugated cardboard production processes, under different conditions of quality and productivity established, by means of simulators or real equipment.
CE6.1 Relate the production processes according to the type of wave and the layers of the product to be produced with the equipment and the production parameters used: stresses, humidity, application temperature of the tails and speed of the run.
CE6.2 In a practical case of single-sided, double-sided, triple-sided, single-sided cardboard manufacturing, duly characterized:
Interpret the given work order to check the availability of the materials to be processed.
Check the constant tension of the coils in the portabobins.
Check the queue level in the tray and its temperature to proceed to the sizing of the different papers with the quality levels set
Control the speed of the machine while maintaining production within the established levels.
Perform the run, maintaining the production parameters set on the work order and resolving the contingencies according to received indications.
Perform the appropriate checks to check that the formation of the wave and the glue are produced in an appropriate manner according to technical indications of production and quality.
Perform all operations of the corrugated cardboard process according to the instructions in the Manual of Technical Instructions, applying the safety, health and environmental protection standards.
Fill in the production parts, recording the anomalies observed during the run and the corresponding valuation.
CE6.3 In a practical case, properly characterized by the sketch and the technical characteristics of the product to be obtained:
Point out the cut and cut zones.
Relate the thickness of the cardboard and the characteristics of the materials that make it up to the appropriate cutting angle of the blade and the pressure of the cleft.
C7: Apply first-level cleaning and maintenance techniques, checking the safety systems of corrugated trains according to specific technical procedures.
CE7.1 Identify in the technical documentation, company instructions, safety standards, and expected preventive maintenance items and plans.
CE7.2 Recognize the oiling points of a wavy train and the periodicity with which it should be performed.
CE7.3 Identify parts or parts of wavy trains that require regular cleaning or require maintenance operations as well as the periodicity to be performed.
CE7.4 In a practical case of cleaning and maintenance of a wavy train and from manual instruction manuals and maintenance plans given:
Verify optimum pressure and temperature levels for proper operation of the wavy train.
Identify failures that affect the operation of the machine and must be recorded for evaluation.
Identify and check the machine security systems.
Make the grease and clean the wavy train and all the elements used in the process according to the technical instructions of the machine and standards received to ensure its perfect operation.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C2 with respect to CE2.3 and CE2.4; C3 with respect to CE3.3 and CE3.4; C4 with respect to CE4.5 and CE4.6; C5 with respect to CE5.4; C6 for CE6.2; C7 for CE7.4.
Other capabilities
Respect the company's internal rules and procedures.
Interpret and execute work instructions.
Take responsibility for the work you develop.
Finish the job within the set deadlines.
Contents:
1. Fundamentals of the processing process for corrugated cardboard
General processing of corrugated cardboard. Technological principles.
Identification and operation of equipment.
Fundamentals of the operations that make it up.
Preparing, driving and maintaining equipment.
Variables and parameters to be controlled in the process.
2. Preparation of the wavy group
Elements of the wavy group. Technical instructions and operating scheme.
Preparing the power and splicing units. Adjustment elements. Programming of the units.
Mechanical elements of the wavy group.
Preparation of the undulating unit: regulation of heaters and wetters, adjustment of pressure of the rolling rollers.
Adjustment markers: types and uses.
3. Preparation of the sizing groups
The operation scheme of the sizing group.
Mechanical elements of the sizing group.
Preparation of the sizing units. Sizing film settings.
Adjustment of the drying table.
4. Processing of corrugated cardboard: wet part
Operations in single-sided, double-sided, triple-sided units.
Production parameters: stresses, humidity, temperatures, and speed.
Queue application control.
Bookmark control.
Machine and manual control systems for the machine.
Checkchecks in the elaboration.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the processing process in the wet part of the machine.
5. Processing of corrugated cardboard: dry part
Technical adjustment procedures. Control parameters.
Longitudinal, transverse and cleft cutting blades.
Rotating string. Transverse and displacement adjustments.
Sampling frequencies. Control guidelines.
6. First level maintenance on corrugated cardboard processing trains
Technical instructions for maintenance.
Cleaning the machine. Grease elements. Periodicity.
Security systems of the different machine bodies.
7. Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to corrugated cardboard processing operations
Prevention of occupational risks.
Regulations linked to the process of preparation of the wavy group.
Regulations linked to the process of preparation of the gluing groups.
Regulations linked to the processing process in the dry part of the machine.
Regulations linked to maintenance operations.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
Transformed 150 m2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the conduct of corrugated cardboard processing operations, which shall be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Superior Technician or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
FORMATIVE MODULE 4: CONTROL OF CORRUGATED CARDBOARD PROCESSING
Level: 2
Code: MF1338_2
Associated with UC: Electronic panels control corrugated cardboard processing
Duration: 90 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Operate on wavy trains by coordinating start-up and production operations from specific instructions and work schedules.
CE1.1 Recognize the technical specifications of the product that can appear in a work order: type of paper, adhesives, wave height, quality control parameters and others.
CE1.2 Identify the boot elements used in the wavy trains.
CE1.3 Describe the processes involved in the scheduling of corrugated cardboard orders.
CE1.4 From a daily work schedule and a properly characterized work order:
Relate materials and their characteristics to be used in production.
Verify the mapping of the production parameters to the product specifications.
Distribute the jobs according to the machines involved and the set times.
CE1.5 Rate different proposals on order grouping that appear in a daily schedule taking into account the characteristics of the order, the teams involved and the available personnel.
CE1.6 Describe the techniques to achieve active and effective communication with the rest of the partners to solve the situations of communicative difficulty that may arise.
CE1.7 In several practical scenarios of properly characterized corrugated cardboard processing:
Determine the work equipment that should be involved in each of the parts of the process.
Set the operations to be performed by each of the components of the work team.
Explain the communication techniques between the work team during the process.
Coordinate with the team the operations to be performed during the commissioning of the wavy train.
Communicate the incidents and data about the order change to the rest of the team, free of errors.
C2: Apply technical control procedures for the processing of corrugated cardboard using electronic control systems, displaying the graphs and identifying the elements to be monitored.
CE2.1 Identify different typologies of electronic control systems in the wavy trains relating to the introduction of data.
CE2.2 Identify the parameters to be controlled during the corrugated cardboard processing process.
CE2.3 Relate the elements involved in the wet part of the wavy train with the operations to be controlled while driving.
CE2.4 Relate the elements involved in the dry part of the wavy train with the operations to control while driving.
CE2.5 Identify the safety, health and environmental protection procedures applicable to the processing of corrugated cardboard and their involvement in the control of the process.
CE2.6 In a number of practical scenarios for starting and driving a properly characterised wavy train:
Connect the computer systems in the correct order and place the processing parameters in the initial position.
Introduce production parameters into the electronic control system from the technical data of a given work order, with quality, safety and environmental protection criteria
Control the evolution charts of all parameters during a simulated production.
From the information in the charts or the controls of the cardboard in process, readjust the parameters needed to correct the incidents that occur.
Control the product after adjustments by verifying the results obtained.
C3: Identify the different components of corrugated cardboard, relating the characteristics of the cardboard to the applications in the final product.
CE3.1 Different parts of corrugated cardboard-external face, internal face and guts-and the types of paper used in the manufacture of corrugated cardboard.
CE3.2 Relate corrugated cardboard components with end product properties and applications.
CE3.3 Relate the characteristics of the corrugated cardboard end product with the particularities in the manufacturing conditions.
CE3.4 From some samples of different types of corrugated cardboard products:
Identify the elements that make up the corrugated cardboard article.
Describe the characteristics of the different types of paper used.
Value the mechanical strength of the product and the quality of the cardboard plate.
Relate the characteristics of the materials used in the manufacture of the cardboard plate with the requirements of the final product obtained.
C4: Apply quality control and sample assessment criteria in different phases of a corrugated cardboard manufacturing process, to control the quality and assess the necessary adjustments in the manufacturing process.
CE4.1 Identify the characteristics, functions and procedures of use of the measuring tools used in the corrugated cardboard control.
CE4.2 Interpret the quality standards to be taken into account in the processing of corrugated cardboard.
CE4.3 Identify the key points in which to carry out quality and sampling controls in the corrugated cardboard processing process and describe the parameters to be controlled in each of them.
CE4.4 Relating the reference values of the controls to be performed with the most common units of measurement.
CE4.5 In a practical scenario of quality control properly characterized and from different samples of corrugated cardboard plates finished and some reference tables:
Perform the different control tests of the defined parameters using the most appropriate instruments, recording the results.
Assess the results obtained by contrasting them with given reference tables and determine accepted and rejected samples.
CE4.6 From different samples of corrugated cardboard with different defects such as alabed, defective, fake fluted and others:
Detect possible causes that cause defects in their manufacturing.
Describe the adjustments to be made in the process to achieve the required quality.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.4, CE1.5 and CE1.7; C2 with respect to CE2.6; C4 with respect to CE4.5 and CE4.6.
Other capabilities:
Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.
Learn new concepts or procedures and effectively leverage training using acquired knowledge.
Sharing information with the work team.
Comply with the correct production rules.
Demonstrate autonomy in the resolution of contingencies related to its activity.
Finish the job within the set deadlines.
Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.
Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.
Take Responsibility for the work that you develop and the fulfillment of the objectives.
Transfer information clearly, in an orderly, structured and accurate manner to the right people at every moment.
Contents:
1. Programming of production on wavy trains
Programming set. Matching of production parameters.
Order Pool. Parameters involved.
Sequentiality in the process. Boot elements.
Production parameters. Working conditions.
2. Coordination of the processing of corrugated cardboard:
Booting the machines. Coordination with the work team.
Synchronization of different parts of the machine.
Work teams. Coordination of functions.
Verification of the elements involved in the process.
Active and effective communication techniques.
Resolution of communicative incidents with the work team.
3. Control of the processing of corrugated cardboard through consoles
Electronic control systems. Types.
Control of the auxiliary elements.
Parameters to be controlled during processing.
Control of the evolution charts.
Verification and control of the processing process.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the process of monitoring the processing of corrugated cardboard.
4. Quality control of corrugated cardboard
Control points and tests to be performed. Reference values.
Tools and control tools. Measurement techniques.
Quality standards in corrugated cardboard processing
Defects in the manufacture of corrugated cardboard.
Laboratory tests. Quality control of corrugated cardboard.
5. Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the control of corrugated cardboard processing
Identification of risks in your scope of work. Factors involved
Prevention of occupational risks.
Rules applicable to process control.
Rules applicable to product control.
Coordination of the process by applying safe working procedures.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
60 m trial lab2.
Transformed 150 m2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the control by electronic panels of the processing of corrugated cardboard, which shall be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Technical Engineer or others of higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
ANNEX CDXVI
PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: MANUFACTURE OF COMPLEXES, PACKAGING, PACKAGING AND OTHER ARTICLES OF PAPER AND PAPERBOARD
Professional Family: Graphic Arts
Level: 2
Code: ARG416_2
General competition:
Elaborate complex materials, packaging, packaging, stationery and other articles for domestic and hygienic use and superficially treat papers, cartons and other materials operating in equipment and lines of transformation, preparing and controlling all production parameters and the necessary raw materials, and intervening in the graphical process according to the productivity and quality established and applying the plan of prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
Competition Units:
UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity conditions.
UC1335_2: Prepare raw materials and auxiliary products for paper processing, cardboard, and other materials.
UC1339_2: Prepare packaging lines, packaging, and stationery.
UC1340_2: Develop packaging, packaging, and stationery.
UC1341_2: Manufacture paper and cardboard items for domestic and hygienic use.
UC1342_2: Manufacture of paper, cardboard and other materials.
UC1343_2: Perform surface treatments on papers, cartons, and other materials.
Professional environment:
Professional scope:
Develops its professional activity in the graphic industry and paper industry. In post-pressure, conversion or transformation departments. In the manufacture of paper and cardboard articles, packaging and packaging processing companies, finished, converted and manipulated companies. In small, medium or large enterprises with different organizational and technological levels and in both public and private companies. She integrates into a work team where she develops individual and group tasks. In general it will depend organically on an intermediate command. The job is usually done for an employed person.
Productive Sectors:
Sector of graphic arts. Paper sector. They are in the own sub-sector of conversion or transformation or are part of companies in which different processes are carried out, being one of them. In any other sector in which the processes of transformation or conversion of paper, cardboard and other materials into complexes, packaging, packaging, stationery and articles for domestic and hygienic use are developed.
Relevant Occupations and Jobs:
Folding machine driver.
Machine driver for making bags.
A machine driver for making envelopes and over-bag with or without printing.
Slotter machine with or without printing.
Printer-slotter driver, with folding and packet trainer.
Case-maker driver.
Cosedoer machine.
Stup machine driver.
Striker, lift, driller, bending machine, notebook and notebook cutter
A driver of household and hygienic goods machines.
Notebook machine driver, libretts, and blocks with or without printing.
Tube machine driver and paper bag bottoms.
Mandrel machine driver.
Cardboard machine operator.
A universal machine operator for complex confection.
Operator of extruder machines, laminators, sulphurizers.
paraffin operator, engomadora, barnizer, glasofonator, plasticizers.
Associated training: (600 hours)
Training Modules
MF0200_2: Processes in graphic arts. (120 hours)
MF1335_2: Raw materials and auxiliary products in paper processing paper and other materials. (120 hours)
MF1339_ 2: Preparing packaging lines, packaging, and stationery. (90 hours)
MF1340_2: Packaging, packaging, and stationery. (90 hours)
MF1341_2: Manufacture of paper and cardboard items for domestic and hygienic use. (60 hours)
MF1342_2: Manufacture of paper, cardboard and other materials. (60 hours)
MF1343_2: Realization of surface treatments in papers, cartons, and other materials. (60 hours)
COMPETITION UNIT 1: OPERATING IN THE GRAPHICAL PROCESS UNDER SECURITY, QUALITY, AND PRODUCTIVITY
Level: 2
Code: UC0200_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Check and follow the graphical process as a whole through workflows and in its different phases: preprint, print and post-pressure, through standardization and communication, to achieve quality and productivity, in accordance with established specifications.
CR1.1 Graphic process tracking is done through workflows to facilitate planning, automation, procedures, and other factors that affect the production environment.
CR1.2 By standardizing and communicating the work phases, a final result of the most effective process is achieved.
CR1.3 The different phases of the graphical process are analyzed with specification of their elements, applying the employment and sequentiality of each of them.
CR1.4 The parameters and preprint elements chosen are checked, according to technical specifications.
CR1.5 The printing system is in accordance with the support used and the product to be obtained.
CR1.6 The finish is applied according to the support used, process followed and usage needs, according to the technical specifications.
CR1.7 The observed anomalies are collected to take the necessary preventive and corrective measures.
CR1.8 The graphical process, in all its phases, is performed taking into account and applying safety, hygiene and environmental regulations.
RP2: Apply quality control methods in the graphic arts process to achieve the specified product, following existing standards and standards.
CR2.1 The graphical product is realized taking into account the fundamental concepts of quality in the different phases of its manufacture.
CR2.2 The most significant quality features in each of the phases of the process are identified by variables and attributes.
CR2.3 Quality control is done methodically, using the appropriate control elements for each feature.
CR2.4 Quality criteria are applied based on established quality and tolerance levels.
CR2.5 Control frequencies are applied according to the type of characteristics to be controlled and the number of product units to be obtained.
CR2.6 Quality control results and incidences are collected in the corresponding control sheets.
CR2.7 The desired colors and tones are obtained according to the parameters and color measurements.
CR2.8 The measuring devices are used according to the specific needs of the required values.
CR2.9 The image transfer is analyzed according to the point variation and the contrast.
RP3: Determine the characteristics of the graphical products to establish the appropriate manufacturing process, taking into account the available elements and applicable regulations.
CR3.1 Graphic products are identified according to their functional and communicative characteristics.
CR3.2 The functional and technological relationships of graphic products are set according to their component elements.
CR3.3 Graphic products are defined according to originals, sketches, and models.
CR3.4 Graphic products respond to established technical specifications.
CR3.5 Graphic products enable you to maintain competitive conditions for your business.
CR3.6 The physico-chemical characteristics of the graphic products take into account environmental and safety and hygiene regulations in the workplace.
Professional context:
Production media:
Computer equipment. Laser printer. Standards of communication. Workflows. Normalized light pupitre. Measurement and control tools and tools: densitometer, tipometer, odometer, colorimeter, spectrometer
Products and results:
Incidents of quality control. Control sheets. Identification of defects or defects in processes.
Information used or generated:
Production order. Technical documentation of preprint, printing and post-pressure equipment and machines. Safety, hygiene and environmental regulations. Quality standards and standards. Samples authorised. Technical sheets. Maintenance manuals. Control plans.
COMPETITION UNIT 2: PREPARE RAW MATERIALS AND AUXILIARY PRODUCTS FOR THE PROCESSING OF PAPER, CARDBOARD AND OTHER MATERIALS
Level: 2
Code: UC1335_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Interpret work orders, checking that they contain the precise instructions for preparing the raw materials and auxiliary products needed for the transformation of paper, cardboard and other materials into graphic products with quality and productivity criteria.
CR1.1 The work order is verified by checking that it contains all the necessary technical information regarding quality and productivity.
CR1.2 The technical and production information shown in the work order is interpreted according to the instructions regarding raw materials, auxiliary products and intermediate materials: papers, plastics, glues, adhesives, inks, polymer granars, paraffins and others.
CR1.3 The model, test or any other product that serves as a model is contrasted by checking the consistency with the raw materials, auxiliary products and intermediate materials and other indications of the work order.
CR1.4 The characteristics and specifications of the raw materials and the auxiliary products to be transformed: information of the supports, systems of attachment of the materials, types of grits, types of tails and adhesives, finishes and others are contrasted verifying that they meet the standards or standards of quality.
RP2: Prepare the paper supports, plastics and other complexes for processing in graphic products, according to the technical specifications of the work order, in order to guarantee correct food and the continuity of production.
CR2.1 The supply of the media to be transformed is coordinated with the warehouse ensuring continuity in production.
CR2.2 The media to be transformed is handled and manipulated according to established work procedures and is deposited on a machine foot to facilitate power during production.
CR2.3 The dimensions, quantity, and quality of the media to be transformed are checked by ensuring their correspondence with the work order specifications.
CR2.4 The intermediate to transform supports are reviewed by checking the absence of defects in previous phases, recording the incidents or informing the person responsible for taking corrective action.
CR2.5 The media to be transformed is checked by ensuring the absence of hits, cuts, curvature or other defects that hinder production.
CR2.6 The temperature, relative humidity, and other characteristics of the paper and paperboard media are measured by checking that their values are within the tolerance margins established in the work order.
CR2.7 Thickness, static electricity, stiffness, flexibility and other characteristics of non-paper supports and others as well as previous surface treatments are measured by checking that their values are within the tolerance margins established in the work order.
CR2.8 All operations for the preparation and control of the media to be transformed are carried out in accordance with the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
RP3: Prepare the auxiliary products and intermediate materials involved in the processing of paper, cardboard and other materials in graphic products, taking into account their technical specifications and conditions of use to ensure their correct application during production.
CR3.1 Polymer glues, adhesives and granars are selected taking into account the final quality of the product by applying the criteria of the company's manual of procedure and the indications of the work order.
CR3.2 Polymeric tails, adhesives and granars are prepared in the amount and at the appropriate temperature according to the environmental working conditions and the type of material, applying the criteria described in the technical specifications.
CR3.3 The physico-chemical properties of the glues and adhesives are modified by adding additives or with other operations until their optimal machine operation is achieved, according to application instructions.
CR3.4 The varnishes, paraffins and polymeric granars are conditioned according to the technical characteristics of the product to be transformed.
CR3.5 The necessary auxiliary products and intermediate materials: stamping films, window materials, bag handles, wires or staples and others are organized in the machine environment guaranteeing quantity and quality according to production order and production continuity.
CR3.6 The printing forms are reviewed by checking the surface finish and the absence of defects such as ink debris, dust, strokes, scratches, or others.
CR3.7 The inks or other display elements are suitable for the type of printing, type of support, required finish or other changes of viscosity, temperature and other characteristics according to the quality specifications and productivity requirements.
CR3.8 The waste generated in the preparation of auxiliary products and intermediate materials is treated according to the guidelines of the plan of prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
CR3.9 All operations for the preparation of auxiliary products and intermediate materials are carried out in accordance with the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
Professional context:
Production media:
Queue preparation equipment, adhesives, granars and additives. Measuring elements and instruments: scale, meter, flexometer, hygrometer, micrometer, viscosimeter and others. Supports in sheets or coils: papers, cartons, plastics and others. Glues, adhesives, granars and their additives. Auxiliary products and intermediate materials: wire, wire, PVC, tails, linings, inks, printing films, staples, bag handles, window materials and others. Auxiliary equipment for the preparation of materials and products for processing. Personal protective equipment.
Products and results:
Queues, adhesives, and granars prepared for the transformation process. Supports prepared for the processing process: paper supports, plastic supports and others. Auxiliary products and intermediate materials prepared for processing: wire, wire, PVC, tails, linings, inks, printing films, staples, bag handles, window materials and others.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Models, samples and tests. Characteristics and technical specifications of the papers, cartons and other materials to be processed. The company's manual of procedure. Record sheets. Technical documentation of equipment. Quality standards and standards. Incident log documents. Plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
COMPETITION UNIT 3: PREPARE PACKAGING LINES, PACKAGING AND STATIONERY
Level: 2
Code: UC1339_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Assemble the useful and interchangeable elements necessary to adapt the lines of packaging, packaging and stationery, to the needs of the graphic product to be converted, following the instructions of the work order.
CR1.1 The machine adaptation for a given product design is valued together with the production manager, considering the restructuring possibilities offered by the elements that configure it.
CR1.2 The useful and other interchangeable elements in the lines of packaging, packaging and stationery: straps, pulleys, blades, swords, rollers, injectors, staplers, photocells and other interchangeable elements are placed or conditioned in the line according to the structural characteristics of the product to be carried out and the instructions of the work order guaranteeing its functionality in the machine.
CR1.3 The use of the interchangeable elements is recorded in the documents enabled for this purpose to determine their useful life.
CR1.4 The interchangeable elements are properly manipulated and protected by avoiding damage and deterioration of the elements and storing them according to the established rules.
CR1.5 All operations for the preparation and adjustment of the interchangeable elements of packaging, packaging and stationery are carried out in accordance with the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
RP2: Set up electronic control systems for packaging lines, packaging and stationery to adjust the process to product characteristics by following the instructions in the work order.
CR2.1 The technical instructions related to the product that appear on the work order: support, format, lines of cleft, cut lines and others are validated, verifying that they are executable and are contrasted with the materials supplied.
CR2.2 The planes bounded with the widths and depths of the heaps and reliefs, positioning of the staples, places of application of queues, position of the sealing and others are recognized for the correct preparation of the different units of the conversion lines.
CR2.3 The product data is introduced into the electronic system for the control of packaging lines, packaging and stationery: folding-engine, printer-slotter, case-maker, envelope machines, bag machines, notebook machines and others, checking the integrity of the same and following the order established for their introduction.
CR2.4 Machine tuning parameters are introduced into the electronic control system following the instructions of the work order and the specific parameters of the materials to be converted.
RP3: Prepare the power supply and feed mechanisms of packaging lines, packaging and stationery to achieve continuity during the run, adjusting them to the needs of the support.
CR3.1 The correct operation of all the devices in the feed and feeding mechanisms is checked by reviewing its elements and starting up, correcting the possible anomalies.
CR3.2 The elements and mechanisms of the prefeeding and feeding systems: pneumatic group, power head, transport elements or others are verified and adapted to the needs of the support and other materials: type of support, physical characteristics and others, so that the process takes place with the productivity and quality established.
CR3.3 The continuity in the feeding of the different materials is checked by preparing and adjusting the material input devices, guaranteeing the established productivity.
CR3.4 All feeding mechanism preparation operations are performed by following the instructions in the procedure manual and applying the safety standards specified in the occupational risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
RP4: Prepare the printing, stamping, marking and/or die-cutting mechanisms of packaging, packaging, and stationery for the purpose of starting up, in accordance with the technical characteristics of the work.
CR4.1 The printer forms are positioned allowing for correct subsequent registration with respect to the test, model or model supplied, according to the specifications set out in the work order, checking their correspondence and verifying the quality and content of the same.
CR4.2 The pressure mechanisms are adjusted taking into account the material to be printed and the final product.
CR4.3 The inking mechanisms are adjusted according to the characteristics of the ink, the printing material and the printing area.
CR4.4 The placement and advancement of the stamping film are performed according to the location and surface of the stamping, allowing the best use of the film to be achieved.
CR4.5 The temperature and pressure of the plate are adjusted taking into account the technical specifications of the stamping film, the surface and the material to be stamped.
CR4.6 The die-cutting mechanisms are adjusted taking into account the material to be printed and the final product.
CR4.7 The die-cut elements are positioned according to the instructions of the model or model supplied and the specifications set out in the work order, checking their correspondence and verifying the quality of the die-cut.
CR4.8 All printing, stamping, or marking preparation operations are performed in accordance with the instructions set out in the procedure manual and applying the safety standards specified in the occupational risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
RP5: Prepare the folding unit of the packaging lines, packaging and stationery by adjusting the necessary mechanisms to facilitate the subsequent processes, avoiding the deterioration of the product and unnecessary stoppages.
CR5.1 The input and passage guides of the product by the bending units are reviewed and positioned so as to allow the product to enter without incident or anomaly.
CR5.2 The transport devices are adjusted by taking into account the thicknesses and other characteristics of the materials to be converted to facilitate the passage thereof by the bending unit.
CR5.3 The elements of the bending units in the production lines: folding-engine, printer-slotter, case-maker, envelope machines, bag machines and others are adjusted by allowing the folding to occur over the cleft marks or in the areas established in the support.
CR5.4 All the preparation operations of the bending elements are performed according to the instructions in the procedure manual and applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
RP6: Prepare the mechanisms for joining the materials in the lines of packaging, packaging and stationery: matching units, heat-sealing units, stapling units or other units, adjusting the different elements and devices to meet the needs of the product to be obtained.
CR6.1 The deposit of glues and adhesives is verified by allowing the filling levels, temperature and other parameters to be maintained.
CR6.2 The application systems for glues and adhesives: platters, injectors or others are positioned and adjusted according to the areas and the application widths, the characteristics of the material and the indications of the work order.
CR6.3 The heat-sealing systems are verified by controlling the temperature, size, application pressure and other parameters that ensure the strength of the bonding.
CR6.4 The heat-sealing systems are positioned and adjusted according to the zones and application widths, the characteristics of the material and the indications of the work order.
CR6.5 The stapling heads are adjusted by controlling the length, the spacing between staples, the quality of the staple and the suitability of the characteristics of the materials to be stapled, guaranteeing the strength of the bond.
CR6.6 The stapling heads are positioned and adjusted according to the areas to be stapled, the characteristics of the material and the indications of the work order.
CR6.7 The timing of the materials ' attachment mechanisms is checked by verifying that they meet the established speed, production, and quality requirements.
CR6.8 All the preparation operations of the material binding units are performed according to the instructions in the procedure manual and the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
RP7: Prepare the different elements and devices of the output of the finished product to properly accumulate the production and avoid interruptions as well as the deterioration of the products during the same.
CR7.1 The output mechanisms of the packaging, packaging, and paper stationery, cardboard, and other materials are regulated by allowing the process to be performed with the established productivity and quality, avoiding traffic jams and production stops.
CR7.2 The regulation of defective product detection and evacuation systems is performed according to quality specifications and work order indications.
CR7.3 The finished product counters are adjusted according to product characteristics, ensuring proper operation.
CR7.4 The systems for forming finished product packages, atadoras, retraction or others are configured according to the characteristics of the system, the product and following the instructions of the work order.
CR7.5 The stacked, palletized, or other devices of the output are adjusted according to the characteristics of the device, the size, the type of finished product, and following the directions of the work order.
Professional context:
Production media:
Useful and interchangeable elements for packaging lines, packaging and stationery. Folding machine. Sewing machine. Case machines. Machine for making envelopes. Automatic machines for making bags. A slotter machine with one or more printing units. Printer-slotter machine with folding and packet-forming machine. Case-maker machine. Machine for tubes, mandrels and bags for sacks. Machine for notebooks, books and blocks with or without printing. Electronic control systems. Feeding and feeding mechanisms. Printing, stamping, marking and die-cutting mechanisms. Folding units. Union mechanisms: sizing units, heat-sealing units, stapling units. Output devices: systems for detecting and evacuating defective products, metering devices, packet formation systems, atators, retraction devices. Stacked and palletized devices. Labeling. Meter systems. Control elements and instruments: meter, flexometer, hygrometers, thermometer, magnifying glass, micrometer, viscosimeter, adhesive tapes of different formats and others. Dispensers and mixers. Personal protective equipment.
Products and results:
Review and conditioning of interchangeable elements in packaging lines, packaging and stationery. Configuration of electronic control systems. Preparation of the feeding and feeding mechanisms of materials. Preparation of printing, stamping, marking and stamping mechanisms online. Preparation of the bending unit. Preparation of the coupling mechanisms: sizing units, heat-sealing units, stapling units. Preparation of the different output elements and devices.
Information used or generated:
Work Orders. Production orders. Printing sheet and flat-rolled flat sheets. Tests, samples, models, models. Technical manuals for equipment and installations. Procedure manuals. Quality manuals. Production recording and control documents. Manual for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
COMPETITION UNIT 4: MAKE PACKAGING, PACKAGING AND STATIONERY
Level: 2
Code: UC1340_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Get the first units of packaging, packaging and stationery, performing the operations of commissioning of the production lines to check the quality of the same and take the corrective measures.
CR1.1 The supply and supply of raw materials, auxiliary products and intermediate materials in packaging, packaging and stationery, is done in such a way as to avoid unnecessary stops.
CR1.2 The production speed in the production lines: folding-engine, printer-slotter, case-maker, envelope machines, bag machines, notebook machines and others is set according to the instructions of the work order, the type of packaging, packaging or stationery to be obtained and the characteristics of the support to be transformed: paper, cardboard, plastic, complex material or others.
CR1.3 The commissioning of packaging lines, packaging and stationery is done by adjusting the speed to the characteristics of the product in process, verifying the correct operation and synchronisation of the different units, following the instructions of the work order.
CR1.4 The first packages, packaging or stationery made are inspected in the minimum quantity sufficient, checking the format or size, the recording and the quality of the printing, the cuts, the cut and die, the correct binding of the materials as well as the absence of other defects.
CR1.5 The necessary corrections and adjustments are made by operating on the elements and mechanisms of the different units of the production lines: material supply, printing, stamping or marking, die-cutting, bending, material bonding and output of the finished product.
CR1.6 The corrections made are finally confronted with the sampling elements: drawings, sketches, authorized samples and technical specifications of the work order given the quality of the final product.
RP2: Carry out the production lines of packaging, packaging and stationery, monitoring the process by controlling all the parameters to achieve established quality and productivity.
CR2.1 The useful and interchangeable elements coupled or adapted to the packaging line, packaging and stationery are monitored by ensuring that they comply with the expected functionality.
CR2.2 The information displayed in the electronic control systems is monitored during the spin by checking that it corresponds to the initial programming, making the necessary adjustments allowing for a production control and control.
CR2.3 The power of the media to be transformed: paper, flat cardboard, corrugated cardboard, plastics, complexes and other auxiliary materials, is monitored by checking the correct passage of all of them by the line of packaging, packaging and stationery.
CR2.4 The printing, stamping, marking and/or die-cutting units are monitored by checking the correct fixing of the printing forms and transferring the ink or other display elements to the support under the conditions set out in the work order, verifying the continuous input during the run.
CR2.5 The folding units of the packaging lines, packaging and stationery, are monitored by checking that the materials pass without incident or anomalies and that the bending takes place in the correct areas.
CR2.6 The sizing units are monitored by controlling that the glues and adhesives are applied to the product in the appropriate zones and in the amount required, verifying the continuous input during the run.
CR2.7 The heat-sealing units and the stapling units are monitored by verifying that they perform the binding of the materials in the established zones without incident or anomalies.
CR2.8 The optimum speed of the production lines is maintained throughout the run, adapting to the characteristics of the material in process, remaining within the established production criteria and according to the instructions of the work order.
CR2.9 Production data such as: quantity of processed copies, production times, stops, incidents and others are recorded in the document enabled by the company in order to contribute to the control of production plans and cost control.
CR2.10 All supports, auxiliary products and intermediate materials used during the process of packaging, packaging and stationery: papers, plastics, glues, grasses, inks, handles, stamping films and others are properly recorded in the documents enabled to obtain the traceability of the same.
RP3: Check the product on the output of the packaging lines, packaging and stationery to detect the possible defects, sampling according to the technical specifications of quality and the indications of the work order.
CR3.1 The accumulation, arrangement, palletizing and identification of the packaging, packaging and stationery produced is monitored at the output of the lines, verifying that it complies with the instructions of the work order, avoiding stops during the run and allowing the control of the production.
CR3.2 The quality control of the products in the output of the lines is carried out with the frequency established by the company and according to the instructions of the work order, guaranteeing the uniformity of the results throughout the run.
CR3.3 The appropriate tools and measurement tools: flexometer, densitometer, colorimeter or others are used to control sample samples quickly and effectively.
CR3.4 Packaging, packaging or stationery are monitored, verifying the absence of stains, scratches, tail debris, and other defects and checking for folds, attachment points, printing, stamping or marking and others, making appropriate corrective actions if necessary.
CR3.5 Data regarding the quality of the product during production such as: frequency of sampling, values of quality controls, quantity of controlled copies, incidents and others are recorded in the document enabled by the company in order to avoid returns due to defective products.
CR3.6 The defects that occur during the run are corrected quickly, without stopping production as long as possible, identifying the defective copies according to the quality tolerances set for the order.
RP4: Perform the first level maintenance of packaging lines, packaging and stationery as well as auxiliary equipment for proper operation, in accordance with established safety and environmental protection standards.
CR4.1 The grease and other first-level maintenance operations of the packaging and packaging lines: folding-engine, printer-slotter, case-maker, envelope machines, bag machines, notebook machines and others is performed according to the manufacturer's instructions and the established maintenance plan.
CR4.2 The operation of air circuits and filters is verified according to established maintenance standards.
CR4.3 Equipment safety devices are checked and maintained according to the current risk prevention plan.
CR4.4 Packaging and packaging lines: folding-engine, printer-slotter, case-maker, envelope machines, bag machines, notebook machines and others are maintained at the cleaning levels set out in the company's maintenance plan and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
CR4.5 The auxiliary dust aspiration and cutout elements are adjusted to prevent environmental contamination.
CR4.6 The actions set forth in the first-level maintenance plan are performed according to the defined periodicity and recording the required data in the enabled documents.
CR4.7 All maintenance operations are performed by following the instructions in the procedure manual and applying the safety standards specified in the occupational risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
Professional context:
Production media:
Packaging lines, packaging and stationery. Folding machine. Sewing machine. Case machines. Machine for making envelopes. Automatic machines for making bags. A slotter machine with one or more printing units. Printer-slotter machine with folding and packet-forming machine. Case-maker machine. Machine for tubes, mandrels and bags for sacks. Machine for notebooks, books and blocks with or without printing. Electronic control systems. Feeding and feeding mechanisms. Printing, stamping, marking and die-cutting mechanisms. Folding units. Union mechanisms: sizing units, heat-sealing units, stapling units. Output devices: systems for detecting and evacuating defective products, metering devices, packet formation systems, atators, retraction devices. Stacked and palletized devices. Labeling. Meter systems. Control elements and instruments: meter, flexometer, hygrometers, thermometer, magnifying glass, micrometer, viscosimeter, adhesive tapes of different formats and others. Dispensers and mixers. Personal protective equipment.
Products and results:
Packaging and packaging of paper, cardboard, plastic and other materials. Cardboard boxes in all their models and formats, with or without printing. Packs. Cases. Displays. Envelopes and envelopes bag with or without printing. All types of bags with or without printing: paper bags, flat bags with or without bellows, cross-bottom cylindrical bags, plastic bags, complexes and any heat-sealable material. Paper sacks with or without printing. Librettas and blocks with or without printing. Folders. Archives. Paper and paperboard tubes and mandrels. Maintenance and maintenance of packaging and packaging lines and stationery: folding-engine, printer-slotter, case-maker, envelope machines, bag machines and others.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Production orders. Printing sheet and flat-rolled flat sheets. Tests, samples, models, models. Production recording and control documents. Quality control and registration documents. Technical manuals for equipment and installations. Procedure manuals. Quality standards and standards. Quality manuals. Maintenance plans. Plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
COMPETITION UNIT 5: MANUFACTURE PAPER AND CARDBOARD ITEMS FOR HOUSEHOLD AND TOILET USE
Level: 2
Code: UC1341_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Prepare the power, step and output mechanisms of materials in the manufacturing lines for household and hygienic items to achieve continuity during the run, adjusting them to the product needs.
CR1.1 The power devices and mechanisms of the transformation lines are checked by checking that they are in a proper working state, correcting the possible failures.
CR1.2 The elements and mechanisms of the feeding systems: dewinders, splicing devices, voltage regulators, pneumatic group units, power head or others are adapted to the material needs: typology, nature, physical characteristics and others.
CR1.3 The material transport elements by the transformation line: shooting mechanisms, transfer cylinders, roller pins, conveyor belts and others are checked and cleaned with the most suitable products, ensuring their correct operation and avoiding damage to the material.
CR1.4 The material transport elements by the transformation line: shooting mechanisms, transfer cylinders, roller tweezers, conveyor belts and others are adapted and regulated according to the physical characteristics of the materials.
CR1.5 The elements and mechanisms of the output system: squalls, blades, endless wheel, accumulators and others are prepared according to the nature of the article and the specific finishing of the material: coils, sheets, pleadings, sausages or others.
CR1.6 All the preparation operations of the power, step and outlet mechanisms are performed by following the instructions in the procedure manual and applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
RP2: Adjust the manufacturing lines of items for domestic and hygienic use, using electronic systems or through mechanical adjustments, following the instructions of the work order to adapt the equipment to the needs of the material and final product.
CR2.1 The technical instructions regarding the product that appear on the work order: support, format, type of finish, cut lines, folding and others are validated by verifying that they are executable and are contrasted with the materials supplied.
CR2.2 The configuration of the electronic control systems is performed by introducing the production parameters indicated in the work order and the specific parameters of the materials to be transformed relative to the nature of the material, size, speed, finishing configurations, stacked, palletized and others.
CR2.3 The interchangeable elements: cutting, climbing, and other discs are mounted and adjusted according to the typological needs of the product and its specific finish: coils, sheets, pleated, sausages or others.
CR2.4 The printing, embossing, dyeing, aromatised and other elements are adjusted according to the typological needs of the finishing and the indications of the work order, checking the correspondence of the forms printers, cylinders engraved, colors, aromas and others.
CR2.5 All adjustment operations of the manufacturing lines items for domestic and hygienic use are performed according to the instructions in the procedure manual and the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection are applied.
RP3: Get the transformed items by performing the start up operations of the lines and maintaining all the constant production parameters to ensure product adequacy to the technical specifications.
CR3.1 Start-up operations are performed by adjusting the material feeding bodies, production units and output elements according to production instructions and standard working procedures.
CR3.2 The supply and supply of raw materials, intermediate materials and auxiliary products is carried out in such a way that unnecessary stops are avoided by applying the established protocols for both coils and sheets.
CR3.3 The production speed is set according to the instructions of the work order, the product typology and the characteristics of the materials, remaining during the spin within the established production criteria.
CR3.4 The printing, embossing, taining, aromatised, cutting, folding and other units are adjusted as a whole, verifying the correct operation and the timing of the same according to the technical characteristics of the equipment and the needs of the product.
CR3.5 The process of transforming articles for domestic and hygienic use is monitored, verifying that all parameters are maintained in the optimal quality and productivity values for the type of work in progress, according to the production instructions.
CR3.6 The optimal speed of the transformation lines is maintained throughout the run, adapting to the characteristics of the material in process, remaining within the established production criteria and according to the directions of the work order.
CR3.7 Production data such as: number of copies, production times, stops, incidents, corrective measures and others are recorded in the company-enabled document in order to contribute to the control of production and cost control plans.
RP4: Monitor the transformed articles, performing the tests marked in the working protocols to control that they meet the established quality.
CR4.1 The quality control of the items in the output of the lines is performed with the frequency set by the company and following the instructions on the work order.
CR4.2 The first processed articles are inspected in the minimum quantity sufficient, visually or by means of simple tests with dropper and flexometer and with the required precision in each case.
CR4.3 The format, print quality, waffling quality, folding, winding, or other are controlled in relation to the samples or instructions given, verifying that their values are within the tolerance margins established in the quality standards.
CR4.4 The results of quality controls and tests are recorded in the documents enabled for this purpose, according to the procedures established in the company's quality plan.
CR4.5 The accumulation, arrangement, palletizing and identification of the household and hygienic items at the output of the lines is monitored by verifying that it complies with the instructions of the work order, avoiding stops during the run and allowing control of the production.
RP5: Perform the first level maintenance of the manufacturing lines for household and hygienic items, following the established safety and environmental protection standards, to ensure their proper functioning.
CR5.1 The first-level grease and maintenance operations of the household and hygienic items manufacturing lines are performed according to the manufacturer's instructions and the established maintenance plan.
CR5.2 The operation of air circuits and filters is verified according to established maintenance standards.
CR5.3 The security devices for the transformation lines are checked and maintained according to the current risk prevention plan.
CR5.4 The elements of the transformation lines are maintained at the cleaning levels set in the company's maintenance plan and according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
CR5.5 The auxiliary dust aspiration and trim elements are adjusted to prevent environmental contamination.
CR5.6 The actions set forth in the first-level maintenance plan are performed according to the defined periodicity and recording the required data in the enabled documents.
CR5.7 All maintenance operations are performed by following the instructions in the procedure manual and applying the safety standards specified in the occupational risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
Professional context:
Production media:
Lines for making household and sanitary items: tissues, tissues, toilet rolls, glasses, and others. Machine for napkins, tablecloths and toallets. Machine for making compresses and diapers. Plates and trays machines. Blondon machines. Electronic systems and mechanical line control systems. Feeding and feeding mechanisms. Printing, embossing, tinting, aromatised, cutting, bending and other online units. Output devices, meter devices, packet formation systems, atators, retraction devices. Stacked and palletized devices. Labeling. Meter systems. Control elements and instruments: meter, flexometer, hygrometers, thermometer, magnifying glass, viscosimeter. Personal protective equipment.
Products and results:
Preparation of the feeding and feeding mechanisms in the manufacturing lines for household and hygienic items. Preparation of the printing, embossing, tinting, aromatised, cutting, bending and other elements. Preparation of the different output units and devices. Control of finished articles in coils or in specifications. First level maintenance of equipment. Articles of paper and cardboard for domestic and hygienic use with or without printing, embossed, flavoured, with colour baths and others. Napkins. Tablecloths. Headscarves. Rolls of toilet paper. Compresses. Diapers. Tissues. Blondas. Plates, trays and other paper and complex items.
Information used or generated:
Work Orders. Production orders. Parameters relating to the product. Types of finishing, stacked, palletized and others. Tests, samples, models. Technical manuals for equipment and installations. Procedure manuals. Quality manuals. Production recording and control documents. Manual for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
COMPETITION UNIT 6: MANUFACTURE PAPER, CARDBOARD AND OTHER MATERIALS
Level: 2
Code: UC1342_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Interpret work orders, checking that they contain all the precise instructions for preparing complex processing lines.
CR1.1 Technical and production information is interpreted in the light of the instructions relating to the implementation, the characteristics of the materials, the needs of the production, the methods of union and others that affect the preparation of the complex development lines.
CR1.2 The model, test, or any other product that serves as a model is contrasted by checking consistency with the order of work's indications.
CR1.3 The characteristics and specifications of the complex to be elaborated: information of the papers, plastics, systems of bonding of the materials and others are interpreted taking into account the aspects that influence the preparation of the lines of elaboration of complexes.
RP2: Prepare the mechanisms for feeding, passing and leaving the complex processing machines, by means of mechanical or electronic operations, to allow the correct transport of the papers, plastics or others by the production lines.
CR2.1 The supplied media such as papers, cartons, plastics and others are reviewed by ensuring their correspondence with the work order indications.
CR2.2 The elements and mechanisms of the feeding system of the papers, cartons, plastics and others, such as pneumatic group, feeding head, carrier, tension bodies and others, are mechanically adjusted and/or through the electronic control systems according to the physical needs and characteristics of the materials forming the complex.
CR2.3 The elements and mechanisms of transport of papers, cartons, plastics and others, such as conveyor rollers, load cells, anti-glue tapes and others, are mechanically regulated and/or through electronic control systems according to the characteristics of the complex to be made.
CR2.4 The elements and mechanisms of the output system, such as rewinders, counter devices, cutting blades and others, are mechanically prepared and/or through the electrical control systems according to the complex to be elaborated and the format determined in the technical specifications.
CR2.5 The preparation operations of the power, step, and output mechanisms of the line are performed by applying the safety standards specified in the occupational risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
RP3: Adjust the extrusion and/or laminate group by means of mechanical or electronic operations and follow the directions of the work order to ensure, during production, the quality and uniformity of the union of the different layers that form the complex.
CR3.1 The systems of entry, dosing and application of glues, adhesives, grits and others are regulated according to their technical characteristics, the indications of the work order and the thickness of the sheet that is needed to be synchronized with the main process.
CR3.2 The opening, temperature and pressure of the extruder lip is regulated according to the technical specifications of the product to be obtained and of the polymer granars to be used.
CR3.3 Extrusion width limiters are positioned according to the density of the polymer to be used and following the indications of the production order.
CR3.4 The distance between the output of the extruder lip and the attachment point of the materials is adjusted according to the technical characteristics of the material to be used and the technical specifications of production.
CR3.5 The laminate group is regulated by adjusting the pressure of the rolling rollers according to the characteristics of the materials to be used.
CR3.6 The temperature of the cooling and rolling calender is adjusted according to the technical characteristics of the granars and the product to be obtained.
CR3.7 The temperature of the drying tunnel in the laminate process is regulated according to the requirements of the materials in process, according to the technical information thereof.
CR3.8 The adjustment operations of the extrusion and/or laminate group are performed according to the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
RP4: Elaborate the complexes by controlling the process and performing the appropriate corrective measures to ensure the productivity and quality established in the work order.
CR4.1 The speed of the complex processing machine is controlled by maintaining production within the levels set in the work instructions.
CR4.2 The laminate group is controlled by visualizing the electronic control systems and verifying the variables of temperature, pressures, humidity, and other factors by preventing it from causing modifications to the final product, according to the instructions set out in the work order.
CR4.3 The elements and mechanisms of the feeding system of the papers, plastics and others: pneumatic group, feeding head, carrier, tension bodies and others are controlled by checking that all parameters are maintained within the permitted ranges, according to the instructions set out in the work order.
CR4.4 The extruded group is controlled by visualizing the electronic control systems, verifying the calibers and thicknesses by radioactive sources, the optical density variables, elongation of the material, surface slippage, thicknesses and other factors by checking the quality of the materials and the homogeneity of the product during the run.
CR4.5 The pasting defects in laminated complexes are corrected by modifying the pressure of the rolling rollers, the viscosity of the tail and the temperature.
CR4.6 The gluing defects in extruded complexes are corrected by modifying the aperture, temperature and/or pressure of the extruder lip as well as the distance between the extruder lip and the attachment point controlling the ambient humidity and temperature.
CR4.7 The refit collection system or cuts is checked in order changes by verifying that the side cutouts have been properly embedded in the sinks or vacuum cleaners.
CR4.8 All process parameters are controlled from the control systems by displaying the charts and adjusting the detected deviations.
CR4.9 All supports, auxiliary products and intermediate materials used during the process of processing of complexes: papers, plastics, queues, grits, inks and others are recorded according to instructions set out in the documents enabled to obtain the traceability of the same.
RP5: Check the quality of the elaborate complexes, applying sampling techniques with the frequency indicated in the quality technical specifications to detect the possible defects and modify the required parameters.
CR5.1 The frequency of sampling is set according to the accepted quality and tolerance levels and taking into account the technical specifications of the work order.
CR5.2 The measurement tools and tools are prepared by performing the sampling tests quickly and effectively, complying with safety, health and environmental protection regulations.
CR5.3 The verification of the size, format, thickness and consistency of the materials is done in a methodical way, using the instruments established for each measurement.
CR5.4 The disamination force of the produced laminate complexes is checked using the appropriate test and control apparatus, verifying that it is within the tolerances defined in the technical specifications of the work.
CR5.5 Defects that are detected during production: size, thickness, delamination force, and others are corrected by adjusting the electronic control systems to the default values and informing the person responsible if necessary.
CR5.6 The end product is controlled during rewind through control cameras or other control systems.
RP6: Perform the first level maintenance of the complex processing machines for optimal operation by following the technical instructions of the manufacturers and the established working protocols.
CR6.1 The cleaning or purge operations of the cooling, heating, hydraulic and pneumatic equipment are performed according to the instructions of the manufacturers and according to the working procedures established by the company.
CR6.2 The periodic greasing of the points arranged in the lines and auxiliary equipment for the elaboration of complexes is carried out according to the instructions of the manufacturer and with the periodicity marked by the company.
CR6.3 The operation of the circuits and filters of the hydraulic and pneumatic systems is verified according to the established maintenance standards and deadlines.
CR6.4 The components of the auxiliary lines and equipment for the processing of complexes as well as the interchangeable elements used in the process are cleaned and reviewed according to the procedures laid down in the maintenance plan.
CR6.5 The safety devices of lines and auxiliary equipment for the processing of complexes are checked and maintained in accordance with the current occupational risk prevention plan.
CR6.6 Operation and security failures in complex processing auxiliary lines and equipment are recorded in the enabled documents by deriving the information from the controller.
CR6.7 All first-level maintenance operations as well as the treatment of the generated waste are carried out in accordance with the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
Professional context:
Production media:
Machines for making complex laminated and extruded. Metallizers. Electronic complex line control systems. Systems for the control of calibers and thicknesses by radioactive sources. Quality control tools and tools. Personal protective equipment. Waste containers.
Products and results:
Complexes made from different paper holders and plastic supports and other materials. Control of equipment. Control of the quality of the processes. Quality control of the products. First level maintenance of complex processing machines and equipment.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Standards of quality and productivity. Plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection. Production parameters. Quality standards. Production control sheets. Record document of materials used. Technical documentation of the equipment. The company's manual of procedure. Maintenance log sheets. Maintenance plan. Information of the papers, plastics, systems of bonding of the materials.
COMPETITION UNIT 7: PERFORM SURFACE TREATMENTS ON PAPERS, CARTONS, AND OTHER MATERIALS
Level: 2
Code: UC1343_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Interpret work orders, checking that they contain all the precise instructions for preparing the surface treatment teams of papers, cartons, and other media.
CR1.1 Technical and production information is interpreted in the light of the instructions regarding the implementation, the characteristics of the materials, the needs of the production, the finishes and others that affect the preparation of the surface treatment equipment.
CR1.2 The model, test, or any other product that serves as a model is contrasted by checking consistency with the order of work's indications.
CR1.3 The characteristics and specifications of the treatments to be applied: information of the papers, plastics, finishes, types of treatment and others are interpreted taking into account the aspects that influence the preparation of the surface treatment equipment.
RP2: Prepare the mechanisms for feeding, passing and leaving the surface treatment equipment, by means of mechanical or electronic operations, to allow the correct transport of the papers, cartons, plastics or others by the production lines.
CR2.1 The supplied media such as papers, cartons, plastics and others are reviewed by ensuring their correspondence with the work order indications.
CR2.2 The elements and mechanisms of the feeding system of the papers, cartons, plastics and others such as pneumatic group, feeding head, carrier, tension bodies and others, are mechanically adjusted and/or through the electronic control systems according to the physical needs and characteristics of the materials to be treated.
CR2.3 The elements and mechanisms of transport of papers, cartons, plastics and others, such as conveyor rollers, load cells, anti-glue tapes and others, are mechanically regulated and/or through electronic control systems according to the characteristics of the material to be treated.
CR2.4 The elements and mechanisms of the output system, such as rewinders, counter devices, cutting blades and others, are mechanically prepared and/or through the control electrical systems according to the support to be treated and the format determined in the technical specifications.
CR2.5 The preparation operations of the power, step, and output mechanisms of the line are performed by applying the safety standards specified in the occupational risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
RP3: Perform surface treatments such as corona treatment, heat treatment, varnish, paraffin, metallized and others, using the equipment according to the instructions of the work order to condition the materials to the subsequent processes.
CR3.1 The corona treatment equipment, heat treatment, barnizers, paraffinators, metalizers and others are selected and arranged according to the treatment to be applied to the material and according to the instructions of the work order.
CR3.2 The coating devices for varnishes, paraffins and other surface conditioning materials are adjusted according to the particularities of the system and the product to be obtained.
CR3.3 The synchronization and levelling of the application equipment is performed according to the support, the treatment to be applied and the result to be obtained according to the instructions of the work order and the samples provided.
CR3.4 The devices for the removal of electrostatic charges are adjusted by applying the instructions of the work order and the directions of the operating manual.
CR3.5 The corona treatment, heat treatment and other equipment are adjusted according to the characteristics of the materials and following the work instructions.
CR3.6 The speed of the treatments is controlled by keeping the production within the levels set in the work instructions.
CR3.7 All devices and parameters of the process are controlled visually and from the control systems, adjusting the detected deviations.
CR3.8 The application operations of surface treatments are performed in compliance with the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
RP4: Check the quality of the treatments applied superficially, applying sampling techniques with the frequency indicated in the technical specifications of quality to detect the possible defects and modify the necessary parameters.
CR4.1 The frequency of sampling is set according to the accepted quality and tolerance levels and taking into account the technical specifications of the work order.
CR4.2 The measurement tools and tools are prepared by performing the sampling tests quickly and effectively, complying with safety, health and environmental protection regulations.
CR4.3 The monitoring of the surface treatments of the support is performed with the tools and tools established for its control, verifying that it complies with the specifications indicated in the work order.
CR4.4 The verification of the size, format, thickness and consistency of the materials is done in a methodical way, using the instruments established for each measurement.
CR4.5 Defects that are detected during production: deficiencies in surface treatments, size, thickness, and others are corrected by adjusting the electronic control systems to the predetermined values and informing the responsible if necessary.
CR4.6 The end product is controlled during output through control cameras or other control systems.
RP5: Perform the first level maintenance of the surface treatment equipment of papers, cartons, plastics and others for optimal operation according to the technical instructions of the manufacturers and established working protocols.
CR5.1 The cleaning or purge operations of the cooling, heating, hydraulic and pneumatic equipment are performed according to the instructions of the manufacturers and according to the working procedures established by the company.
CR5.2 The periodic oiling of the points arranged in the surface treatment equipment is performed according to the manufacturer's instructions and with the periodicity marked by the company.
CR5.3 The operation of the circuits and filters of the hydraulic and pneumatic systems is verified according to the established maintenance standards and deadlines.
CR5.4 The surface treatment equipment components as well as the interchangeable elements used in the process are cleaned and reviewed according to the procedures laid down in the maintenance plan.
CR5.5 The safety devices of surface treatment equipment are checked and maintained in accordance with the current occupational risk prevention plan.
CR5.6 The performance and safety anomalies in surface treatment equipment are recorded in the enabled documents by deriving the information from the responsible.
CR5.7 All first-level maintenance operations as well as the treatment of the generated waste are carried out in accordance with the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
Professional context:
Production media:
Surface treatment application equipment: corona treatments, thermal treatments and others. Varnishes. Paraffinators. Electronic systems for the control of surface treatment equipment. Systems for the control of calibers and thicknesses by radioactive sources. Quality control tools and tools. Personal protective equipment. Waste containers.
Products and results:
Paper supports, plastics and other complex surface treated: corona treatment, heat treatment, varnish, paraffin, sulphurized and others. Control of equipment. Control of the quality of the processes. Quality control of the products. First level maintenance of machines and surface treatment equipment.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Standards of quality and productivity. Plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection. Production parameters. Quality standards. Production control sheets. Document for the registration of materials. Technical documentation of the equipment. The company's manual of procedure. Maintenance log sheets. Maintenance plan.
FORMATIVE MODULE 1: PROCESSES IN GRAPHIC ARTS
Level: 2
Code: MF0200_2
Associated with UC: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity
Duration: 120 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Analyze the entire graphical process and its different phases: preprint, print and post-pressure, considering the communication between them using standardization models.
CE1.1 Explain the characteristics and configuration of companies according to the production phase.
CE1.2 From a graphical product, describe through workflows the sequence of tasks or operations in a supposed production environment.
CE1.3 Analyze, from the design point of view, the characteristics of a given process:
Formats and measures.
Typology.
Colors.
Media.
Encuadernacion and Finishing.
CE1.4 From a given product, relate and sequence the different preprint phases that have been involved in its elaboration:
Text: body, family, style, paragraph, interline.
Frames: linearature, point shape, and angulation.
Separation of colors.
Plot and layout systems used.
CE1.5 From a given product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:
Type of media used.
Inks: classes and layers.
Tramado.
The character profile.
Footprint or relief on support.
Defects in printing.
Number of passes on machines.
CE1.6 Analyze the different preprint, printing and post-pressure systems, describing and relating their main phases to machines, equipment, raw materials and products.
CE1.7 Describe the most significant electronic printing systems.
C2: Classify graphic products according to their composition and functional characteristics: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.
CE2.1 Explain the characteristics of the different graphic products.
CE2.2 Analyze the structural characteristics of the different graphic products.
CE2.3 From graphic product samples:
Assess the communicative and functional capacity of different graphic products.
Analyze your physicochemical composition and identify your functional capacity.
C3: Recognize and analyze the parameters and measures of color used in graphic arts.
CE3.1 Describe the chromatic spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab.
CE3.2 Describe the measuring devices used in the colour: colorimeter, glinometer, spectrophotometer.
CE3.3 Describe the various lighting sources, color temperature, and observation conditions.
CE3.4 From color samples:
Identify color parameters: brightness, saturation, tone, and metamery index.
Represent colorimetric values in chromatic spaces.
Evaluate color differences and their ability to play in the graphical system.
CE3.5 Handle the tools and measuring instruments: hygrometer, thermometer, conductmeter, precision scales, densimeter, viscosimeter and microscope, to obtain the values of: humidity, temperature, conductivity, density, dimension variations of supports, materials and raw materials.
CE3.6 Describe the measuring devices used in colour: colorimeter, glinometer and spectrophotometer.
C4: Relating safety, hygiene and environmental standards with operations that are developed in the graphical process, complying with the established regulations.
CE4.1 Describe and relate the rules regarding safety, hygiene and the environment, with the different phases of the process.
CE4.2 Identify the security elements installed in the different places and risk teams.
CE4.3 Using practical examples, identify the security labels that appear on the machines and products used in the graphical process.
CE4.4 Recognize the environmental documents and procedures applied in the graphical process.
C5: Analyze the process of quality control in a "type process" of graphic arts.
CE5.1 Describe the fundamental phases and concepts of quality control in manufacturing.
CE5.2 Describe a receive control process succinct.
CE5.3 Describe the instruments used in quality control: densitometres, colorimeters, control strips and production line control devices.
CE5.4 From a preprint test, and taking into account printing standards:
Perform the densitometric and colorimetric measurements.
Assess that the reproduction of the color range conforms to the set standards.
CE5.5 From a printed product, and taking into account standards:
Select the measuring instrument.
Perform the calibration of the measuring instrument.
Perform densitometric, colorimetric, trapping, sliding, and gray balance measurements.
Chromatic space.
Take action on the control strip.
Check the setting with the set standards.
CE5.6 From a product to be bound and/or manipulate, identify and evaluate defects detected in:
Format and margins.
Cutting marks.
Signals of record.
Signatures.
Fibre Sense.
Repainted.
Troquels.
CE5.7 Describe the most significant quality features of the products:
Framing and manipulated: subjective assessment, cut marks, footprints, signs of registration, gluing.
Resistance to folding.
Resistance to rub.
Printing: density, trapping, stamping gain, color balance, pasting, sliding, recording.
Preprint: tests, standards.
CE5.8 Check the final status of the form and relate it to the specifications of the manipulated.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.1; C5 with respect to CE5.1, CE5.2.
Other capabilities
Take responsibility for the work you develop.
Demonstrate some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.
Respect the company's internal rules and procedures.
Contents
1. Graphical process
Types of graphic products.
Company types: organization and structure.
Standardization and communication models. Workflows.
Preprint systems. Classes of originals. Latent image and revealed processes.
Input peripherals, output peripherals, specific software and hardware, processing and test systems.
Plotting and mounting. Elements of the assembly. Specific software.
Print systems. Equipment, performance, comparison of different systems.
Types of inks and supports for each printing system.
Encuaderation. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.
Paper and paperboard manipulated. Manipulated from other materials.
2. Colour and its measurement
Nature of light.
electromagnetic spectrum.
Philosophy of vision.
Chromatic space.
Factors that affect color perception.
Color Theory. Additive and subtractive synthesis of the color.
Color rendering systems: Munsell, RGB, HSL, HSV, Pantone, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.
Color measurement instruments: densitometres, colorimeters, glinometers, and spectrophotometers. Colour assessment.
3. Safety, hygiene and the environment
Safety plans and regulations.
Rules in force.
Signals and alarms.
Environmental regulations.
4. Quality in processes
More characteristic tests, instruments and measurements.
Preprint quality: point gain, gray balance, and density.
Print variables (print density, contrast, contrast, penetration, fixed, stamping gain, color and gray balance).
Control patches in print. Measurement.
Quality in post-pressure.
Visual control of binding and manipulated.
Checking for bound and manipulated defects.
5. Quality control
Quality in manufacturing.
Quality control. Concepts involved.
Control elements.
Phases of control: receipt of materials, processes and products.
ISO and UNE rules.
Standards and standards published by AENOR committee 54 relating to the graphical process
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of 2 m2/pupil.
60 m trial lab2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to graphic arts processes, which will be accredited by one of the following ways:
Academic training of Licentiated or Engineer or others of equal level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 2: RAW MATERIALS AND ANCILLARY PRODUCTS IN PAPER PROCESSING PAPER AND OTHER MATERIALS
Level: 2
Code: MF1335_2
Associate with UC: Preparing raw materials and auxiliary products for paper, cardboard, and other materials transformation
Duration: 120 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Interpret different work orders by discriminating against the components, instructions and specifications of models and models related to the preparation of raw materials, auxiliary products and intermediate materials used in the processing of paper, cardboard and other materials.
CE1.1 Identify the elements that make up a production order of a product to transform and describe the instructions related to the preparation of raw materials, auxiliary products and intermediate materials for the transformation of paper, cardboard and other materials that appear in it.
CE1.2 Identify different product models for the transformation that are typically attached to production orders and recognize the instructions that are noted.
CE1.3 Starting from the model, test or any other product that serves as a model, to locate and identify the raw materials and auxiliary products according to the indications of a proposed work order as an example.
CE1.4 In a practical exercise and from different processed products, identify the information regarding the supports, union or soldier systems, conversion parameters, inks and others, verifying that they meet the standards or standards of quality.
CE1.5 In a practical case, identify the technical and production information for the preparation of the raw materials to be used: papers, cartons, plastics, glues, adhesives, ink, photopolymers, stitching wires and others.
CE1.6 In a practical scenario for a simulated process of transforming paper, cardboard, and other materials, from a given production order:
Check that the production order consists of the elements required for the entire transformation process.
Verify that all the necessary data is collected for the correct preparation of the raw materials, auxiliary products and intermediate materials involved in the process: papers, cartons, plastics, glues, adhesives, ink, photopolymers, stitching wires and others.
Perform a sequencing of the processing of paper, cardboard, and other materials by interpreting the given work order.
C2: To value the behavior of the auxiliary products and intermediate materials used in the processes of transformation of paper, cardboard and other materials, relating them to their application.
CE2.1 Differential and describe the properties of materials and products used in paper, cardboard, and other materials processing processes
CE2.2 Using practical examples, identifying different printer forms and their application in paper, cardboard and other materials processing processes.
CE2.3 From a given work order, perform an assumption in which the appropriate queues and adhesives are chosen for the product to be transformed.
CE2.4 In a properly characterized case, measure the environmental conditions of a workshop and correctly interpret the technical specifications by adjusting the parameters of utilization, temperature and quantity to the type of materials that will be transformed.
CE2.5 Determine the factors that make raw materials compatible with each job to be performed.
CE2.6 In a practical case, check that given raw materials are consistent and compatible with the graphical product to be converted.
CE2.7 Relate physico-chemical properties of the raw materials as glues and adhesives with the various applicable additives to modify said properties.
CE2.8 In a properly characterized scenario:
Estimate the amount of queues required for the deposits to be held in the required values that will allow the constant supply to the system.
Adjust the physical-chemical properties of glues and adhesives, adding additives to achieve optimal operating values on machines, according to application instructions.
CE2.9 In a scenario, where work orders are used in which different print systems need to be used:
Identify the printing forms, and their characteristics of quality and good use, identifying defects such as: hits, scratches, traces of ink, dust and others, both in the image areas and in the non-image.
Prepare the ink so that the viscosity, temperature, and other properties conform to the intended parameters of use according to the process where it is to be used: type of print, type of support, required finish, or others.
CE2.10 In a practical scenario in which traceability registration forms are handled for the materials used during the processing process: queues, wire, inks and others, making the records provided for in the procedures of an alleged company.
CE2.11 Identify the safety standards specified in the plan of prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection of a real company in a way that in a practical case, the waste generated in the preparation of the raw materials is treated according to the guidelines of the plan of prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
C3: Valoring the characteristics of the paper and plastic supports in relation to the transformation process, by means of physical-chemical tests.
CE3.1 Describe the characteristics and properties of the different media to transform and relate to the transformation processes, valuing the compatibility between them.
CE3.2 In the laboratory of raw materials and materials, carry out tests for the correct use of the measuring devices of the properties of the supports.
CE3.3 Measure the temperature, relative humidity, and other characteristics of the paper and paper media: paper and cardboard checking that their values are within the established tolerance margins.
CE3.4 Measure thickness, static electricity, stiffness, flexibility, and other characteristics of plastic and other media, as well as surface treatments, checking that their values are within established tolerance margins
C4: Prepare the different raw materials used in the main processing processes of paper, cardboard, plastics or others, applying the quality and safety standards of the process.
CE4.1 Describe the quality and safety standards applicable to raw materials and materials used in processing systems for graphic products.
CE4.2 From given materials, check that the dimensions, quantity and quality of the support to be transformed correspond to the specifications of the work order.
CE4.3 In a practical exercise and from a given work order, aerate and match the formatted support by breaking the adherence of the sheets and stacking it by following the indications received or established in the work order.
CE4.4 Identify possible defects that can occur in the printing of intermediate, die-cut, and other materials, as well as their possible causes and consequences.
CE4.5 From intermediate, pre-printed or die-cut materials:
Review and check the absence of defects in the printing phase, the correction of the die-cut, the position and quality of the injured and others.
Register data about a report to take appropriate corrective action.
CE4.6 Describe and relate possible media defects to the difficulties they may cause in production according to the subsequent processing processes indicated.
CE4.7 Taking real examples, identifying in the supports to be converted, possible defects such as: hits, cuts, curvature or other defects that hinder production.
CE4.8 Identify and interpret the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection for the operations of preparation and control of the supports to be transformed.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C2 with respect to CE2.5, CE2.9 and CE2.11; C4 with respect to CE4.3 and CE4.5.
Other capabilities:
Habit to the business rhythm of the company.
Respect the company's internal rules and procedures.
Take responsibility for the work you develop.
Recognize the organization's productive process.
Adapt to the organization by integrating into the system of technical-professional relations.
Interpret and execute work instructions.
Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.
Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.
Transfer information clearly, in an orderly, structured, clear and precise manner.
Contents
1. Preparation of raw materials in processing processes of paper, cardboard and other materials
Production order, models, plans and models. Instructions.
Process Sequencer. Traceability of products and materials. Forms
Identification of the materials used.
Standard measures of folds, boxes, bags, envelopes and others.
Media information to convert: join or soldier systems, conversion parameters, inks, and others.
Technical characteristics of the media: papers, cartons, plastics and other materials.
Parameters to be controlled in the preparation: quality, quantity and dimensions.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards applicable to the raw material preparation process.
2. Quality control and environmental protection of raw materials and ancillary products in paper, cardboard and other materials processing processes
Quality standards. Laboratory tests.
Testing laboratory equipment and equipment: meter, thermometer, viscosimeter, micrometer and others.
Job settings. Margins of tolerance.
Physical-chemical properties of paper media: gramage, thickness, porosity, lisura and others.
Characteristics of plastic media: thickness, static electricity, rigidity, flexibility.
Characteristics and properties of the inks: Viscosity, temperature, drying time and others.
Resistance to the rub and scratches of inks, varnishes, glues and adhesives.
Visual checks: correct die-chelation, position, quality of the hones.
Adjustment of the physico-chemical characteristics of the glues and adhesives. Additives. Modification of properties.
Job settings. Margins of tolerance.
Environmental protection rules in preparation processes.
3. Behaviour of materials in relation to processing processes of paper, cardboard and other materials
Properties of materials and products.
Compatibility of materials with transformation processes: factors to consider.
Possible defects in media that make production difficult.
Print systems built into the transformation process.
Environmental working conditions. Temperature and humidity.
Application of the products.
Printer shapes and their application.
Selection of adhesives. Use manuals.
4. Preparation of auxiliary products for processing processes of paper, cardboard and other materials under safety conditions
Auxiliary products: queues, adhesives, inks, printer shapes, wires.
Observing defects in printer shapes: hits, scratches, and others.
Product characteristics: Environmental working conditions.
Usage, temperature, and quality parameters.
Estimating the amount of queues and adhesives.
Safety and health rules applicable to the processing of auxiliary products.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
60 m trial lab2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation of raw materials and ancillary products for the processing of paper, cardboard and other materials, which shall be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Technical Engineer, Diplomacy, Technical Architect or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 3: PREPARATION OF PACKAGING LINES, PACKAGING AND STATIONERY
Code: MF1339_2
Associate with UC: Preparing packaging lines, packaging and stationery
Duration: 90 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Determine the particularities of the different lines of packaging, packaging and stationery in relation to the characteristics, format and nature of the different supports and according to the different types of units that can be formed.
CE1.1 Identify the different types of machines and production lines that can be used in the processes of packaging, packaging and stationery, differentiating the units that configure them.
CE1.2 Relate the structural characteristics of the possible packaging, packaging and stationery to be elaborated, with the fixed or interchangeable mechanisms and the needs of the process.
CE1.3 Describe the mechanisms and elements of the most common packaging, packaging and stationery items: folding-engine, "printer-slotter", "cassette-maker", envelope machines, bag machines, notebook machines and others that influence the quality of the processes by identifying the functionality of each one.
CE1.4 Recognize the basic configuration that must have different lines of packaging, packaging and more common stationery: folding-engine, "printer-slotter", "cassette-maker", envelope machines, bag machines, notebook machines and others according to the nature and arrangement of the support: paper supports, plastic supports and complex materials in sheets and in coil.
CE1.5 Describe the possibilities of restructuring offered by the elements that make up different lines of packaging, packaging and stationery.
C2: Determine the functionality of different useful and interchangeable elements, from making different couplings in lines of packaging, packaging and stationery.
CE2.1 Identify the instructions that are included in several work orders given related to the selection of useful and interchangeable elements for a supposed production.
CE2.2 Properly interpret the use manuals for the useful and interchangeable elements.
CE2.3 Identify the different useful and interchangeable elements that can be coupled in packaging lines, packaging and stationery.
CE2.4 Relate the useful and interchangeable elements with the functionality and the packaging, packaging and stationery that you want to obtain.
CE2.5 In different practical cases, duly characterized, and taking into account the packaging, packaging or stationery to be elaborated:
Analyze the structural characteristics of the packaging, packaging, or stationery to be developed and determine the need for the use of useful and other interchangeable elements to be coupled to the machine.
Coupling the useful and other interchangeable elements in the line of packaging, packaging and stationery: straps, pulleys, blades, swords, rollers, turtleners, injectors, staplers, photocells and others verifying their functionality.
Manipulate the useful and other interchangeable elements in their placement and in the subsequent stored so as to adequately protect and prevent damage or deterioration, correctly recording their use.
Perform all operations by applying risk prevention regulations linked to the coupling of useful and interchangeable items of packaging, packaging and stationery.
C3: Set up electronic control systems for different packaging lines, packaging and stationery from different directions of work orders.
CE3.1 Describe different systems and control panels used in packaging lines, packaging and stationery.
CE3.2 Identify the elements that are modified in the lines of packaging, packaging and stationery when entering data into the electronic control systems and relating them to the values introduced.
CE3.3 In different practical cases, properly characterized, the configuration of electronic systems for the control of packaging lines, packaging and more common stationery: folding-engine, "printer-slotter", "cassette-maker", envelope machines, bag machines, notebook machines and others:
Verify that the product-related technical instructions that appear in a given work order: support, format, cleft lines, cut lines, and others are executable and match the defined materials.
Enter the data into the electronic control system following the established order, the indications of a given work order, and the specific parameters of the materials to be transformed.
Review that adjustments have been made correctly in the elements of the packaging, packaging and stationery items after the validation of the data entered in the electronic control system.
C4: Interpret strokes, diagrams, schemas and other representations of different packaging, packaging and stationery to transform, identifying each of the lines and the elements that integrate them.
CE4.1 Identify the different ways to represent the cut lines, widths and depths of the cleft, reliefs, folding lines, position of the staples, areas of application of queues, position of the sealing and others in the graphic representation of products: the drawings, diagrams, diagrams and other representations.
CE4.2 From different drawings, diagrams, diagrams and other representations of different packaging, packaging and stationery, to relate the indications that appear with the useful ones to be used and the processes of elaboration by which it must pass.
CE4.3 In a practical case properly characterized and based on given instructions and a given product:
Graphically represent the product's cutting and cleft lines indicating the exact measurements of each one of them, using conventional marking lines.
Indicate the application zones for queues, staples, and the position of the product seal.
C5: Operate in different prefeeding and feeding mechanisms of packaging materials, packaging and stationery, adapting them to a support and different transformation needs.
CE5.1 Identify the different systems of prefeeding and feeding of materials that are used in lines of packaging, packaging and stationery and relating them with the characteristics, format and nature of the supports of a given product.
CE5.2 Relate the characteristics of the media with the adjustments of the elements of the power and supply systems: pneumatic group, power head, transport elements, or other.
CE5.3 Identify the most common defects derived from incorrect preparation of the feeding mechanisms indicating the possible solutions.
CE5.4 In different practical cases, properly characterized, in preparation of the feeding mechanisms of lines of manufacture of packaging, packaging and stationery from supports in sheets and coils:
Check and review the correct operation of all devices in the power and power mechanisms, correcting the failures that you encounter.
Adjust the elements of the prefeeding and feeding systems: pneumatic group, power head, transport elements or other according to the characteristics of the given material: type of support, gramage, format, layout and others.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the preparation of the feeding mechanisms on packaging lines, packaging and stationery.
C6: Regular printing, stamping, marking and/or die-cutting units on different packaging lines, packaging and stationery by means of mechanical or electronic operations, ensuring the correct printing or die-cutting in different situations.
CE6.1 Describe the different systems used for printing and stamping on packaging lines, packaging and stationery as well as their features and functionality.
CE6.2 Define the different printing, stamping, marking and die-cutting systems that can be included in packaging lines, packaging and stationery and relating them to the requirements of the supports of a given product.
CE6.3 Detailed the procedures to be followed for the preparation and commissioning of printing, stamping and die-cutting systems used in the processes of packaging, packaging and stationery.
CE6.4 In different practical cases of preparation of the printing, stamping and die-cutting mechanisms of packaging, packaging and stationery, duly characterised:
Place the printer shapes and die-cut elements in the appropriate order, according to the specifications set out in the given indications.
In the case of hot prints, perform the placement and advance of the stamping film based on the location and surface of the stamping, achieving the best use of the film.
Regular the temperature and pressure of the stamping plate according to the technical specifications of the stamping film, the surface and the material to be stamped.
Adjust the pressure mechanisms according to the technical requirements of the material to be printed and the final product.
Adjust the inking mechanisms as required by the characteristics of the ink, the material to be printed, and the printing area.
Perform all operations by applying risk prevention regulations linked to the preparation of printing and die-cutting units in packaging, packaging and stationery.
C7: Regular pre-folding and folding units in different lines of packaging, packaging and stationery adapting to the needs of different supports and depending on the different products to be converted.
CE7.1 Describe the operation of the folding units in packaging lines, packaging and stationery.
CE7.2 Describe the possible defects that occur in the bending systems, relating them to the mechanical adjustments thereof.
CE7.3 In a practical case of preparation of the pre-folding and folding units of packaging lines, packaging and stationery, duly characterized:
Position the product input and step guides, which facilitate bending, by checking that the product input is made without incident or failure.
Adjust the transport devices by measuring the thicknesses and other characteristics of the materials to be converted so that they pass correctly by the bending unit.
Adjust the elements of the bending unit so that the bending occurs over the cleft marks set on the support.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the preparation of the pre-folded and folded units in packaging lines, packaging and stationery.
C8: Regular the different units of material attachment: strainer, heat-sealing, stapler or other, depending on the characteristics of the support and the needs of certain packages, packaging and stationery.
CE8.1 To differentiate the systems of attachment of materials used in packaging lines, packaging and stationery: units, heat-sealing units, stapling units or other units assessing their suitability according to the characteristics of the support and the needs of certain products.
CE8.2 Identify and describe the operation of the different mechanisms and devices for the application of each of the binding systems used in packaging, packaging and stationery.
CE8.3 Explain the different possibilities of joining the different paper holders and non-paper media.
CE8.4 Identify the parameters that determine the binding needs of the different materials for their transformation into packaging, packaging and stationery.
CE8.5 Relate the possible defects in the union of the materials of different packaging, packaging and stationery with the possible causes and solutions of the same.
CE8.6 Relate production speeds with the limitations of the join devices.
CE8.7 In different practical cases, properly characterized, for the preparation of different units of material binding in lines of manufacture of packaging, packaging and stationery:
Verify the fill levels, temperature, and other parameters of the queue and adhesive repository.
Verify heat-sealing systems, controlling temperature, size, application pressure, and other parameters.
Verify the stapling systems by checking the consistency with the material to be stapled, the quality and placement of the wire or the staple, its correct provisioning, and other parameters.
Position and adjust the tail application devices, the heat-sealing devices, the stapling devices and/or the other according to the zones, the application, the characteristics of the material and according to the instructions given.
Check the synchronization of the union units of the materials to be transformed to meet the speed and quality requirements.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the preparation of the material-binding units on packaging lines, packaging and stationery.
C9: Regular output units in packaging lines, packaging and stationery, adapting them to the type of product and the material to be used.
CE9.1 Relate the different units of output of containers, packaging and stationery that are used in the different lines of transformation relating to the different supports and the needs of some products.
CE9.2 Describe the operation of the various output elements and devices in packaging, packaging, and stationery.
CE9.3 List possible defects that occur in the join systems, relating them to the corresponding unit settings.
CE9.4 In different case studies of preparation of output units in lines manufacturing of packaging, packaging and stationery, duly characterized:
Adjust and regulate the output mechanisms for different packaging, packaging and stationery, with the indications given in relation to productivity and quality.
Regulate defective product detection and evacuation systems by following the quality guidelines and specifications set out in a given work order.
Adjust the finished product counter devices, checking their correct operation.
Configure the systems for forming finished product packages, atadoras, retraction or other according to the characteristics of the system used, the product and following the indications of a given work order.
Adjust stacking, palletized, or other devices in the output, depending on the size and type of finished product, following the directions of a given work order.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the preparation of the output units of the materials in packaging, packaging and stationery.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C2 with respect to CE2.1, CE2.3, CE2.4 and CE2.5; C3 with respect to CE3.3; C5 for CE5.4; C6 for CE6.4; C7 for CE7.3; C8 for CE8.6 and CE8.7; C9 for CE9.4.
Other capabilities:
Habit to the business rhythm of the company.
Finish the job within the set deadlines.
Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.
Demonstrate a degree of autonomy in the resolution of contingencies related to its activity.
Use time and effort to extend knowledge and supplemental information for use in your work.
Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.
Adapt to the organization by integrating into the system of technical-professional relations.
Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.
Respect the company's internal rules and procedures.
Contents
1. Configurations and adaptations of packaging lines, packaging and stationery according to supports and products
Types of packaging lines, packaging and stationery: sheets and coils.
Modules or units of packaging lines, packaging and stationery according to the needs of the graphic product. Auxiliary elements.
Printing, stamping, marking or stamping systems of packaging, packaging and stationery.
Material attachment systems: paper, cardboard, complexes, and others in packaging, packaging, and stationery processes.
Adaptation and regulation of useful and interchangeable elements in packaging lines, packaging and stationery.
Functionality of the useful and interchangeable elements.
Manipulation and stored of useful and interchangeable elements.
Safety and occupational health standards linked to the configuration and adaptation of packaging lines, packaging and stationery.
2. Interpretation of drawings, schemes and models of different types of packaging, packaging and stationery to be processed
Structural characteristics of packaging, packaging and stationery.
Using lines and other elements for graphical representation of strokes, schemas, and models.
Diagrams of packaging, packaging, and stationery.
3. Regulation of power units in packaging, packaging and stationery processing lines
Types of feeders for coil media.
Types of feeders for media in sheets.
Regulation of the devices in the power units.
Power units security items.
Safety and health standards linked to the preparation of the food units of packaging lines, packaging and stationery.
4. Preparation of packaging lines, packaging and stationery
Interpretation of production orders.
Setting and configuring electronic control systems.
Regulation and adjustment of printing, stamping, marking or die-cutting units. Inking systems and stamping mechanisms.
Regulation of the material and bending units.
Regulation of output units.
Regulation of auxiliary items.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the preparation of packaging lines, packaging and stationery.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
Transformed 150 m2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Mastery of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation of packaging lines, packaging and stationery, which will be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Superior Technician or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 4: PACKAGING, PACKAGING AND STATIONERY
Level: 2
Code: MF1340_2
Associate to UC: Elaborate packaging, packaging, and stationery
Duration: 90 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Perform start-up operations of different packaging lines, packaging and stationery to obtain the first units of processed products, valuing quality and proposing precise adjustments.
CE1.1 Describe the operation of different packaging lines, packaging and stationery: folding-engine, "printer-slotter", "case-maker", envelope machines, bag machines, notebook machines and others, and the precautions to be taken into account in the process.
CE1.2 Explain the parameters that should be controlled during the implementation of the lines of packaging, packaging and stationery: speed, synchronization of elements, supply of products and materials, operation of the units and others.
CE1.3 From different samples of packaging, packaging and stationery, identifying defects such as: lack of registration, defects in printing, lack of parallelism in cuts and wounds, defects in unions and others.
CE1.4 Relate the most common defects that occur in obtaining the first tests with the necessary adjustments to be made.
CE1.5 From different assumptions, duly characterized, to determine the optimum production speed in packaging lines, packaging and stationery, according to the characteristics of the support, the product and the instructions of a given work order.
CE1.6 In different practical cases, duly characterized, for obtaining the first units of packaging, packaging and stationery with different raw materials, auxiliary products and intermediate materials:
Supplying and feeding packaging lines, packaging and stationery according to the instructions of the work order given, avoiding unnecessary stops.
Perform the start of the lines by adjusting the speed to the characteristics of the packaging, packaging or stationery, and controlling the correct operation and synchronisation of the different units according to the instructions of the work order given.
Inspect the first packaging, packaging, and stationery made in the minimum quantity required by checking the format or size of the product, the recording and the quality of the printing, the cuts, cuts and die-offs, the correct attachment of the materials and the absence of other defects.
Make the necessary corrections and adjustments on the different machine elements and mechanisms: power units, printing units, folding units, union units and output units of the finished product, so that the packaging, packaging or stationery complies with the expected quality requirements.
Confront the product finally with the sampling elements: drawings, sketches, authorized samples and technical specifications of a given work order verifying the quality of the final product.
Perform all operations by applying risk prevention regulations linked to the implementation of packaging lines, packaging and stationery.
C2: Develop packaging, packaging, and stationery according to the instructions in a given work order, monitoring process parameters.
CE2.1 Relate the different processes of packaging, packaging and stationery that must suffer the different products that can be obtained.
CE2.2 Relating production speeds with the limitations of the different units and devices of the lines: printing, stamping or die-cutting units, joining units or other.
CE2.3 Interpret the necessary data that appear in different work orders for packaging, packaging, and stationery.
CE2.4 From different assumptions properly characterized, identify the causes that may affect established productivity indications.
CE2.5 Value the ideal conditions of package formation, stacking, palletizing and identification of different packaging, packaging and stationery at the end of the transformation process.
CE2.6 In different practical cases of packaging, packaging and stationery in lines, duly characterised:
Control the machine foot process by observing the development of production in the various units of the packaging line, packaging and stationery.
Maintain the line speed within the levels set in the given work order.
Control and monitor the production parameters of the process, checking that it is maintained within the set margin.
Register the data relating to the process: quantity of processed copies, time spent, incidents and others in the document given for further analysis.
Dispose and accumulate products in the outputs of the packaging lines, packaging and stationery, stacking them, palletizing them and identifying them according to the indications of the work order given.
Perform all operations by applying the rules on risk prevention linked to the production of packaging, packaging and stationery.
CE2.7 In several practical scenarios, form working groups and analyze production sheets with respect to the incidents, proposing actions for improvement and solution to the technical problems that have been recorded.
C3: Apply quality control techniques for packaging, packaging and stationery made from different lines, using the appropriate instruments, detecting and correcting any defects.
CE3.1 Identify the tools and measuring instruments used to control the quality of the products and describe the operating characteristics: flexometer, densitometer, colorimeter or others.
CE3.2 Relate the quality controls to be carried out on packaging, packaging and stationery with the use of the tools or control instruments to be used.
CE3.3 Describe the most common defects that can occur during the process of packaging, packaging, and stationery relating to the causes that originate them.
CE3.4 Determine the quality parameters to be met by different packaging, packaging and stationery depending on the intended use.
CE3.5 Identify the indications related to the method and frequency of sampling established in a work order and in a given quality manual.
CE3.6 In different practical cases, duly characterized, of quality control of packaging, packaging and stationery in the output of different transformation lines: folding-engine, "printer-slotter", "cassette-maker", envelope machines, bag machines, notebook machines and others:
Perform quality controls with the frequency set in a quality manual and according to the instructions of a given work order, using the tools and measurement tools with speed and effectiveness.
Review products in line output by verifying the absence of stains, scratches, tail debris, and other defects and checking size, folds, attachment points, printing, stamping, marking, die-cutting, and others.
Perform the appropriate corrective actions in each case, without stopping the print run as long as possible, until you achieve the quality standards.
Register the product quality control data in the document-enabled documents.
C4: Apply the first level maintenance protocols described in the manuals of different packaging lines, packaging and stationery, ensuring the correct operation of the same.
CE4.1 correctly interpret the technical documentation, line maintenance manuals, company procedure manuals, and safety standards for preventive maintenance.
CE4.2 Identify and manage the tools and materials of grease, maintenance and cleaning used in packaging lines, packaging and stationery.
CE4.3 Identify and recognize all points of grease by its shape, indicative color and location, as well as other precise first-level maintenance operations on the lines as well as in the auxiliary elements.
CE4.4 Relating all the grease points of the different packaging lines, packaging and stationery: folding-engine, "printer-slotter", "case-maker", envelope machines, bag machines, notebook machines and others with the type of lubricant and the periodicity of the same.
CE4.5 Determine the type of maintenance and periodicity of the same, of all the auxiliary mechanisms of the lines: tires, hydraulic and others.
CE4.6 Relate the necessary periodic cleaning operations, with the products to be used and with the elements on which to act.
CE4.7 Identify the security elements of the equipment and describe its function and the part of the line on which it acts: emergency stop buttons, security grids, housings and others.
CE4.8 Explain the protocols of action in relation to the treatment of the waste produced during the first level maintenance.
CE4.9 In different practical cases of maintenance on packaging lines, packaging and stationery, duly characterized:
Plan the first-level maintenance operations of the lines, defining the lubricating products to be used, the type of maintenance, and the proposed frequency.
Verifying the operation of air circuits and filters is based on established maintenance standards.
Perform the first level maintenance of the different items according to the indications of a given maintenance plan.
Act on security elements by checking their proper operation and verifying that expected responses occur: emergency stop, line immobilization, or others.
Treat waste generated during maintenance operations by following the directions of a given procedure manual and applicable regulations.
Record the required maintenance data in the document-enabled documents.
Maintain all items of packaging lines, packaging, and stationery within the cleaning levels set out in a given maintenance plan.
Perform all operations by applying risk prevention regulations linked to first-level maintenance.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.6; C2 with respect to CE2.2, CE2.5 and CE2.6; C3 with respect to CE 3.6; C4 with respect to CE4.3, CE4.8 and CE4.9.
Other capabilities:
Habit to the business rhythm of the company.
Finish the job within the set deadlines.
Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.
Demonstrate a degree of autonomy in the resolution of contingencies related to its activity.
Use time and effort to extend knowledge and supplemental information for use in your work.
Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.
Adapt to the organization by integrating into the system of technical-professional relations.
Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.
Respect the company's internal rules and procedures.
Contents:
1. Operations for the operation of lines for the manufacture of packaging, packaging and stationery
Adjusting, regulating and commissioning handlers of packaging lines, packaging and stationery.
Parameters to be controlled during startup: unit synchronization, product and material sourcing, and others.
Checking the product with tests, plans, schemas, models, or others.
Corrections and adjustments during startup.
The speed of the machine. Relationship between raw materials and speed.
2. The production process in packaging, packaging and stationery processing lines
Interpretation of the work order data related to the production process.
Product Review.
Manual, electronic or computer readjustment of product parameters.
Defects in the manufacture of packaging, packaging and stationery. Cause/correction.
Monitoring the formation of packages, stacking, palletizing and identification of the products to the output of the packaging lines, packaging and stationery.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the process of packaging, packaging and stationery.
3. Quality control during the processing of packaging, packaging and stationery
Quality standards in packaging, packaging and stationery.
Useful and equipment for the quality control of packaging, packaging and stationery.
Elements for product quality control.
Product quality control procedures in the process of packaging, packaging and stationery.
Control of containers, packaging and finished stationery: Ink behavior on the support. The behaviour of the systems of bonding of the materials.
Guidelines for product inspection. Sampling. Reliability. Measurement.
4. First-level maintenance on packaging lines, packaging and stationery
Technical instructions for maintenance.
Cleaning of packaging lines, packaging and stationery.
Security elements of the different units of the process.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to maintenance operations of packaging lines, packaging and stationery.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
Transformed 150 m2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the manufacture of packaging, packaging and stationery, which will be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Superior Technician or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 5: MANUFACTURE OF PAPER AND CARDBOARD ARTICLES FOR DOMESTIC AND HYGIENIC USE
Level: 2
Code: MF1341_2
Associate to UC: Manufacture paper and cardboard items for household and hygienic use
Duration: 60 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Analyze the characteristics and properties of the different articles of paper and cardboard for domestic and hygienic use in relation to their preparation and the necessary equipment for the process.
CE1.1 Identify the different types of items for domestic and hygienic use: napkins, tablecloths, handkerchiefs, sanitary rolls, plates, glasses, blondes, trays, compresses, diapers and others, and describe their morphological characteristics in relation to their functionality.
CE1.2 Identify the sanitary and environmental requirements that must be met by the materials and processes used in the manufacture of the different articles of paper and cardboard, for domestic and hygienic use.
CE1.3 Identify the different types of items for domestic and hygienic use describing their physical characteristics as well as their own manufacturing materials.
CE1.4 From different samples of items for domestic and hygienic use:
Specify the materials that have been used for processing.
Describe the production process by specifying the lines used for manufacturing.
Explain the printing, embossing, tinting, bending, and other operations, which have been subjected to each of the samples, each characterizing the processes.
Perform an instruction sheet by relating the products to the materials, operations, units, and lines necessary for their manufacture.
C2: Apply technical adjustment procedures in the food, step and outlet mechanisms of articles for domestic and hygienic use, according to the needs of different products.
CE2.1 Identify the different feeding mechanisms of the articles for domestic and hygienic use of the machines for both the materials in the product and the coil: unwinders, spliced devices, voltage regulators, pneumatic group units and explain the possibilities of each one of them.
CE2.2 Describe the mechanical and/or electronic adjustments to be made in the feeding, passing, and output mechanisms from items for domestic and hygienic use given
CE2.3 Identify the elements and mechanisms of the output system such as rewind, squadron, counter devices, cutting blades, endless wheel, accumulators and others, explaining and indicating the versatility in the mechanical adaptation to different products.
CE2.4 In several practical scenarios for preparing the food, step and outlet mechanisms in the manufacture of articles for domestic and hygienic use, for given products:
Adjust the elements and mechanisms of the feeding system such as deborers, spliced devices, voltage regulators, pneumatic, mechanically and/or through the electronic control systems according to the type of product to be manufactured.
Prepare all the transport mechanisms of the supports: shooting mechanisms, transfer cylinders, roller pins, conveyor belts according to product characteristics to be obtained.
Prepare and adjust the elements and mechanisms of the output system such as rewind, counter devices, cutting blades, and others, according to the instructions given on the product finish.
Perform all operations by applying the regulations on risk prevention and environmental protection related to operations in feeding, passing and leaving mechanisms in the manufacture of articles for domestic and hygienic use.
C3: Apply technical adjustment procedures in the preparation of manufacturing lines for household and hygienic items, adapting them to the material needs and the type of products indicated in different work orders.
CE3.1 Identify the procedures to be followed to adjust different manufacturing lines from technical and production manuals.
CE3.2 Distinguished the versatility of the production lines according to the possibilities of adaptation of the interchangeable elements in each unit: cut, climbing, cleft and other, identifying the functions of each one of them.
CE3.3 Relate the adjustment values introduced in manufacturing lines of different items for domestic and hygienic use with the elements that are modified, determining the introduction of said data using mechanical or electronic systems.
CE3.4 In several practical scenarios for adjusting to given products, different manufacturing lines for household and hygienic items:
Identify the manufacturing possibilities in the different lines of a given product taking into account the characteristics of: support, format, type of finish, cut lines and defined folding.
Introduce the production parameters of materials into electronic systems, according to a given production order.
Perform all operations by applying the regulations on risk prevention and environmental protection related to the adjustments of the manufacturing lines of articles for domestic and hygienic use.
C4: Operate in articles for household and hygienic use, controlling the process according to technical instructions defined from different work orders.
CE4.1 Identify the parameters to be controlled during the manufacturing process of different items for domestic and hygienic use.
CE4.2 Describe the different units that make up the lines: printing, embossing, taining, aromatised, cutting and folding, depending on their characteristics and function in the process
CE4.3 In a practical case of manufacture of products given in articles of manufacture of articles for domestic and hygienic use, duly characterized:
Identify the units to be launched based on the characteristics of the given product.
Perform the adjustment and synchronization of the different units that make up the production line according to the requirements of the sample.
Maintain the speed during the run, of the units in the optimal production values, for the type of product and the material used.
Collect the manufacturing data: quantity of copies, production times, incidents produced and possible corrective measures in a type document.
Perform all operations by applying the regulations on risk prevention and environmental protection related to production operations in the manufacture of articles for domestic and hygienic use.
C5: Apply quality control techniques in the manufacturing process for household and hygienic items, using the appropriate instruments for each product, according to specific protocols.
CE5.1 Identify the indications related to the method and frequency of sampling established in a work order and in a given quality manual.
CE5.2 Identify the tools and measuring instruments used to control the quality of the products by describing the operating characteristics: flexometer, densitometer, or others.
CE5.3 Relate the most common defects that can be observed in products for domestic and hygienic use and relate them to the causes that originate them.
CE5.4 In a practical case of quality control over different products for domestic and hygienic use:
Perform quality controls with the frequency set in a quality manual and according to the instructions of a given work order, using the tools and measurement tools with speed and effectiveness.
Review the products in the output of the lines, checking the size, the folds, the quality of the print, waffling, tinting, and others.
Perform appropriate corrective actions in each case, until quality standards are met.
Check that the accumulated and palletized process is performed correctly by ensuring that the items are perfectly identified.
Register the product quality control data in the document-enabled documents.
C6: Apply first-level maintenance techniques to items manufacturing lines for domestic and hygienic use ensuring proper operation of the same.
CE6.1 correctly interpret the technical documentation, the line maintenance manuals, different company procedure manuals, and the security rules regarding preventive maintenance.
CE6.2 Determine the type of maintenance and periodicity of the same, of all the auxiliary mechanisms of the lines: tires, hydraulic and others.
CE6.3 Relate the necessary periodic cleaning operations, with the products to be used and with the elements on which to act.
CE6.4 Explain the protocols of action, according to the current regulations, regarding the treatment of the waste produced during the maintenance of the first level: aspiration of dust, cuts of paper, leftover of inks and others.
CE6.5 In different practical scenarios for maintenance of manufacturing lines for products for domestic and hygienic use properly characterized and from different technical manuals:
Identify the tools and materials to be used in the grease, maintenance and manufacturing lines, explained their functionality.
Identify all points of grease by their shape, indicative color and location, in each of the manufacturing lines.
Value the manufacturer's indications regarding work protocols in the first-level maintenance tasks, components useful life, interchangeable parts, periodicity, and others
Identify the security elements of each line as well as the recommended actions for proper use.
Perform first-level maintenance on the manufacture of items for domestic and hygienic use using the necessary tools and materials for the necessary grease, maintenance and cleaning.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C2 with respect to CE2.4; C3 with respect to CE3.4; C4 with respect to CE4.3; C5 for CE5.4; C6 for CE6.5.
Other capabilities:
Habit to the business rhythm of the company.
Finish the job within the set deadlines.
Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.
Demonstrate a degree of autonomy in the resolution of contingencies related to its activity.
Use time and effort to extend knowledge and supplemental information for use in your work.
Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.
Adapt to the organization by integrating into the system of technical-professional relations.
Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.
Respect the company's internal rules and procedures.
Contents
1. Operations for the operation of manufacturing lines for household and hygienic goods
Technical adjustment procedures in the power, step, and coil output mechanisms. Mechanical and electronic handlers
Mechanical elements of production lines. Versatility and mechanical adaptation to different materials and product typology.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the operation of the manufacturing lines of articles for domestic and hygienic use.
2. Process for the manufacture of articles for domestic and hygienic use
Interpretation of data related to the production process on different work orders.
Analysis of products for domestic and hygienic use.
Technical characteristics of the manufacturing lines. Functionality, speed and others.
Units of manufacturing lines: printing, embossing, folding, tinting and other.
Relationship between raw materials, product typology and speed of manufacturing process.
Supply of products and materials during the process.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the manufacturing process for household and hygienic items.
3. Quality control in the process of items for domestic and hygienic use
Quality control process protocols. Method and frequency for sampling. Reliability.
Useful and quality control measuring instruments. Features. Functionality.
Machine foot checks. Procedures for the quality control of the product in the process.
Defects most common in manufacturing. Corrective actions.
Quality in printing, embossing, bending, tinted and other processes.
Monitoring of package formation, stacking, palletizing and identification of products at the output of manufacturing lines.
4. First-level maintenance on items manufacturing lines for household and hygienic use
Maintenance procedure and techniques.
Cleaning the manufacturing lines of items for household and hygienic use
Security elements of the different units of the process.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the maintenance operations of the manufacturing lines for household and hygienic items
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
Transformed 150 m2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the manufacture of paper and cardboard articles for domestic and hygienic use, which shall be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Superior Technician or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 6: MANUFACTURE OF PAPER, CARDBOARD AND OTHER MATERIALS
Level: 2
Code: MF1342_2
Associated with UC: Fabricating paper, cardboard, and other materials
Duration: 60 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Analyze the characteristics and properties of the different types of complexes that exist in relation to their elaboration, their components and their particularities.
CE1.1 Identify media types and other materials that may be part of a complex.
CE1.2 Describe the main uses to which different complex materials of paper, cardboard and other materials can go.
CE1.3 To differentiate the different types of complexes, classifying them according to their characteristics, their structure and their elaboration.
CE1.4 Explain the different properties that paper, cardboard and other materials can provide and relate to the types of products they can go to.
CE1.5 Perform control tests on the characteristics of different complex products such as light resistance, freezing, oxidation, rubbing and other, analyzing the results obtained.
CE1.6 From a given sample of different types of paper, cardboard and other materials:
Specify the materials that have been used for processing.
Describe the production process by specifying what type of machines or equipment would be needed for processing.
Determine which properties can provide the complexes to the product they are intended for.
CE1.7 In a number of well-characterized practical assumptions, in which the need for a complex for different product types and for different uses is proposed:
Determine the characteristics that the complex should have for each specific case.
Specify existing environmental regulations that might affect each product type.
Value the printing processes and transformed by which the complex must pass.
Propose the most appropriate type of complex that ensures the preservation of the product in compliance with the existing environmental regulations.
C2: Set up electronic control systems for complex processing machines according to the instructions set out in a work order for simulated productions.
CE2.1 Describe different systems and control panels used in complex processing machines.
CE2.2 Identify the elements that are modified in the complex processing machines by entering data into the electronic control systems and relating them to the values introduced.
CE2.3 In different case studies properly characterized in the configuration of electronic systems for control of complex processing machines:
Verify that the product-related technical instructions that appear on a given work order, such as support, formatting, cut lines, and others, are executable and match the defined materials.
Enter the data into the electronic control system following the established order, the indications of a given work order, and the specific parameters of the materials to be converted.
Check that the adjustments to the complex processing machines have been performed correctly after the validation of the data entered in the electronic control system.
C3: Apply technical adjustment procedures to the power, step and output mechanisms of the complex processing machines based on work instructions and given materials.
CE3.1 Identify the different feeding mechanisms of paper, cardboard and other materials for materials in both paper and coil.
CE3.2 Relate the different feeding mechanisms of the various machines for the manufacture of paper, cardboard and other materials with the products obtained.
CE3.3 Identify the parts of the machine involved in the feeding of materials: pneumatic group, feeding head, carrier, tension bodies as well as the mechanical and/or electronic adjustments to be established.
CE3.4 Identify the parts and elements of the machines involved in the transport of papers, plastics and others: conveyor rollers, load cells, anti-glue tapes as well as the mechanical and/or electronic regulation to be established.
CE3.5 Identify the elements and mechanisms of the output system such as rewind, counter devices, cutting blades and others, as well as the mechanical and/or electronic regulation to be performed.
CE3.6 In several practical scenarios for the preparation of the mechanisms for feeding, passing and leaving the complex processing machines with different materials:
Review that the supplied materials are in accordance with the instructions given.
Adjust the elements and mechanisms of the feeding system such as pneumatic group, feeding head, carrier, tension bodies and others, mechanically and/or through the electronic control systems according to the physical needs and characteristics of the complex to be made of the case.
Prepare all the transport mechanisms of the papers, plastics and others: conveyor rollers, load cells, anti-stick tapes, which are involved in the process.
Prepare and adjust the elements and mechanisms of the output system such as rewind, counter devices, cutting blades and others, in accordance with the instructions given and the technical specifications of the complex to be developed.
Set up the machine and check the correct feeding, passing and exit of the materials, making the necessary adjustments.
Perform all operations by applying the regulations on risk prevention and environmental protection linked to operations in feeding, passing and exit mechanisms on the machines.
C4: Apply technical adjustment procedures in extrusion and laminate groups according to the technical specifications of the materials used and different work orders.
CE4.1 Identify in complex machines the essential parts of the extrusion and laminate group: extruder lip, extrusion limiter systems, polymer grander dosing systems, laminate group, cooling calender, drying tunnel and others.
CE4.2 Relate the regulations of the groups with the application conditions based on the work to be performed.
CE4.3 In several practical scenarios for the elaboration of complexes by extrusion, based on samples, requirements and a given work order:
Regulate the dosing and mixing systems of polymer granars, tails, adhesives or others according to the technical needs of the product to be obtained, its conditions of application and the indications of the work order given.
Adjust the power, step, and output mechanisms of the different materials by the machine.
Regular the opening, temperature and pressure of the extruder lip according to the technical specifications of the product to be obtained and of the polymer granars to be used.
Adjust and position the width limiters of the extrusion depending on the density of the polymer being used.
Adjust the distance between the output of the extruder lip and the point of attachment of the materials according to the technical characteristics of the material proposed in the case.
Perform all operations by applying the regulations on risk prevention and environmental protection related to the adjustments of the extrusion groups.
CE4.4 In several practical scenarios for the elaboration of complex by laminate, based on samples, requirements and a given work order:
Regulate the dosing and mixing systems of polymer granars, tails, adhesives or others according to the technical needs of the product to be obtained, its conditions of application and the indications of the work order given.
Adjust the power, step, and output mechanisms of the different materials by the machine.
Adjust the pressure of the rolling rollers according to the characteristics of the materials proposed in the case.
Adjust the temperature of the cooling and rolling calender according to the technical needs of the product.
Adjust the temperature of the drying tunnel according to the requirements of the materials in process according to the technical information of the same.
Perform all operations by applying the regulations on risk prevention and environmental protection related to the adjustments of the laminated groups.
C5: Apply the technical process of complex processing by controlling the process and the product according to technical instructions defined from different work orders.
CE5.1 Identify and relate production variables: speed, temperature, pressures, humidity, optical density, and others with the required quality of the complex.
CE5.2 Describe the most common defects that can occur in the elaboration of complexes relating to the causes that originate them.
CE5.3 Identify the tools and tools of quality control in the elaboration of complexes, relating them to the controls that are carried out.
CE5.4 In a case of complex elaboration of a properly characterized, describe the frequency of sampling and the control measures necessary to ensure adequate quality control.
CE5.5 From a sample of complex laminated and extruded with and without defects:
Check and measure size, format, thickness, consistency, delamination force, and other parameters using the most appropriate instruments for each measurement.
Identify defects that are detected and explain possible causes.
Propose the corrective measures that solve the detected defects.
CE5.6 In a number of practical cases of making complex by extruding and rolling, starting from different work orders duly documented:
Maintain the speed of the complex machine within the set levels.
Control the laminate group, visualizing the electronic control systems and verifying the variables of temperature, pressures, humidity, and other factors preventing it from causing modifications to the final product.
Check that all the parameters of the elements and mechanisms of the power system: pneumatic group, power head, portabobins, tension bodies, and others, are kept within the correct ranges.
Verify the extrudate group, visualizing the electronic control systems and verifying the variables of optical density, elongation of the material, surface slippage, thicknesses and other factors, checking the quality of the materials and the homogeneity of the product during the spin.
Check and measure size, format, thickness, consistency, delamination force, and other parameters using the most appropriate instruments for each measurement.
Correcting the defects of observed in laminated complexes, modifying the pressure of the rolling rollers, the viscosity of the tail or other adjustments.
Correct defects observed in extruded complexes by modifying the opening, temperature, pressure of the extruder lip, distance between the extruder lip and the junction point or other adjustments.
Verify that the refit collection system or cuts the side cuts have been properly embedded in the sinks or vacuum cleaners.
Inspect and check the quality of the final product during rewind through control cameras or other control systems.
C6: Apply first-level maintenance techniques to paper, cardboard and other materials processing machines, ensuring the correct operation of the same.
CE6.1 Identify and know the maintenance instructions established for paper, cardboard and other materials processing machines.
CE6.2 Identify and manage the tools and materials of grease, maintenance and cleaning used in the machines for the manufacture of paper, cardboard and other materials.
CE6.3 Identify the most common actions established in a first-level maintenance plan of the complex processing machines.
CE6.4 In a practical case of maintenance of machine-type machines for the manufacture of paper, cardboard and other materials:
Verify and execute the maintenance of the security systems of the complex processing machines in the established security conditions, guaranteeing the stopping of the machines in case of opening of any of its elements.
Perform the periodic grease of the complex processing machines according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Check the operation and maintenance of the circuit and air filters of the complex processing machines according to the established maintenance standards.
Perform the cleaning of the components of the complex processing machines according to the levels set in the maintenance plan.
Record the required maintenance data in the document-enabled documents.
Perform all operations by applying risk prevention regulations linked to the maintenance of paper, cardboard and other materials processing machines.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C2 with respect to CE2.3; C3 for CE3.6; C4 for CE4.4; C5 for CE5.6; C6 for CE6.4.
Other capabilities:
Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.
Learn new concepts or procedures and effectively leverage training using acquired knowledge.
Adopt preventive behaviors in security matters.
Learn new concepts or procedures and effectively leverage training using acquired knowledge.
Sharing information with the work team.
Comply with the correct production rules.
Demonstrate autonomy in the resolution of contingencies related to its activity.
Finish the job within the set deadlines.
Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.
Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.
Take Responsibility for the work that you develop and the fulfillment of the objectives.
Transfer information clearly, in an orderly, structured and accurate manner to the right people at every moment.
Contents:
1. Preparation of extrusion and rolling groups in complex manufacturing machines
The operation scheme of the extrusion and laminate groups. Types.
Mechanical elements of the extrusion and laminate groups.
Preparation and adjustments of the devices of the extruder group: entrance and dosage of large queues and other materials, extruder lip and others.
Preparing and adjusting the devices of the laminator group: rollers, calandra and others.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the preparation of extrusion and laminate groups.
2. Process for making paper, cardboard and other materials complex
General complex processing process. Technological principles.
Identification and operation of equipment. Elements of the devices. Technical instructions and operating scheme.
Production parameters: stresses, humidity, temperatures, speed, and others.
Control of the process. Electronic control systems. Variables and parameters.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the process of complex development.
3. Analysis and control of paper, cardboard and other materials
Classification of the complexes by their characteristics, structure and elaboration.
Analysis of the properties of the complexes.
Reference parameters. Control tests.
Quality control of the complexes.
Tools and control techniques. Quality standards.
4. First level maintenance of paper, cardboard and other materials complex machines
Technical instructions for maintenance.
Cleaning of machines and equipment.
Security systems for the different devices of machines and equipment.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the maintenance of complex machines.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
60 m trial lab2.
Transformed 150 m2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the manufacture of paper, cardboard and other materials, which shall be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Superior Technician or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 7: PERFORMING SURFACE TREATMENTS ON PAPER, CARDBOARD AND OTHER MATERIALS
Level: 2
Code: MF1343_2
Associate with UC: Perform surface treatments on papers, cartons, and other materials
Duration: 60 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Determine the surface treatments that can be applied on papers, cartons and other supports according to the technical needs of subsequent processes.
CE1.1 Describe the surface treatments that can be applied to the different materials and the characteristics they give them.
CE1.2 Relate surface treatments with the materials on which they are applied and with the benefits on the surface of the material to be treated.
CE1.3 From simple tests on different materials using inks, tails, adhesives, paraffins, or other materials involved in subsequent processes:
To assess the compatibility between support and material in terms of drying, anchoring, tonal stability, mechanical strength, chemical resistance and other characteristics according to standard parameters given.
Identify the treatments that each material needs based on the results obtained.
CE1.4 Perform control tests of different materials, treated superficially and without treating, comparing the results and analyzing the characteristics that have been achieved with the surface treatment.
CE1.5 In several cases properly characterized, from different materials treated superficially:
Analyze and specify the materials and surface treatment that has been used.
Describe the productive process that has to be followed, specifying what type of machines or equipment would be needed for their realization.
Analyze what benefits have been achieved with each type of treatment.
CE1.6 In a number of practical scenarios in which the need for surface treatment of different supports for different processes is proposed:
Value the printing processes and transformed by which support is to be passed according to given criteria.
Propose the most appropriate surface treatment to ensure printing, sealing, bonding, or other subsequent processes in compliance with existing environmental regulations.
C2: Set up electronic systems for the control of surface treatment equipment according to the indications established in a work order for simulated productions.
CE2.1 Describe different systems and control panels used in surface treatment equipment.
CE2.2 Identify elements that are modified in surface treatment equipment by entering data into electronic control systems and relating them to the values introduced.
CE2.3 In different case studies properly characterized in the configuration of electronic systems for the control of surface treatment equipment:
Verify that the product-related technical instructions that appear on a given work order, such as support, formatting, cut lines, and others, are executable and match the defined treatments.
Introduce the data into the electronic control system following the established order, the indications of a given work order and the specific parameters of the treatments to be performed.
To check that the adjustments in the surface treatment equipment have been performed correctly after the validation of the data entered in the electronic control system.
C3: Apply technical adjustment procedures in the mechanisms of feeding, passing and leaving materials in surface treatment equipment based on work instructions and given materials.
CE3.1 Identify the different feeding mechanisms of surface treatment equipment for both product and coil materials.
CE3.2 Relate the different feeding mechanisms of the various surface treatment equipment with the products obtained.
CE3.3 Identify the parts of the machine involved in the feeding of materials: pneumatic group, feeding head, carrier, tension bodies as well as the mechanical and/or electronic adjustments to be established.
CE3.4 Identify the parts and elements of the machines involved in the transport of papers, plastics and others: conveyor rollers, load cells, anti-glue tapes as well as the mechanical and/or electronic regulation to be established.
CE3.5 Identify the elements and mechanisms of the output system such as rewind, counter devices, cutting blades and others, as well as the mechanical and/or electronic regulation to be performed.
CE3.6 In several practical scenarios for the preparation of the mechanisms for feeding, passing and leaving the surface treatment equipment with different materials:
Review that the supplied materials are in accordance with the instructions given.
Adjust the elements and mechanisms of the feeding system such as pneumatic group, power head, carrier, tension bodies, and others, mechanically and/or through the electronic control systems according to the physical needs and characteristics of the materials to be dealt with in the case.
Prepare all the transport mechanisms of the papers, plastics and others: conveyor rollers, load cells, anti-stick tapes, which are involved in the process.
Prepare and adjust the elements and mechanisms of the output system such as rewind, counter devices, cutting blades and others, in accordance with the given instructions and the technical specifications of the product to be treated.
Set up the machine and check the correct feeding, passing and exit of the materials, making the necessary adjustments.
Perform all operations by applying the regulations on risk prevention and environmental protection related to operations in feeding, passing and exit mechanisms in the equipment.
C4: Employ surface treatment techniques on various materials by applying varnished, waxed, metallized, corona treatments and others from different work orders.
CE4.1 Identify the different equipments that exist for the application of corona treatments, thermal treatments, varnished, paraffin, metallized and others.
CE4.2 Relate the adjustments of each of the equipment with the result of the treatment obtained.
CE4.3 Identify the tools and tools of quality control in the application of surface treatments, relating them to the controls performed.
CE4.4 In a case of application of surface treatments properly characterized, describe the frequency of sampling and the control measures necessary to ensure adequate quality control.
CE4.5 In several practical scenarios of surface treatment of materials, based on samples, requirements and a given work order:
Determine the type of treatment to be applied.
Adjust the power, step, and output mechanisms of the material by the machine.
Dispose and adjust the mechanisms and devices of the treatment to be applied.
Apply the treatment by checking the accurate tests that have been applied correctly.
Perform operations by applying the regulations on risk prevention and environmental protection related to the surface treatment of materials.
C5: Apply first-level maintenance techniques in surface treatment equipment ensuring the correct operation of the same.
CE5.1 Identify and know the established maintenance instructions for surface treatment equipment.
CE5.2 Identify and manage the tools and materials of grease, maintenance and cleaning used in surface treatment equipment.
CE5.3 Identify the most common actions established in a first-level maintenance plan for surface treatment equipment.
CE5.4 In some surface treatment type equipment:
Verify and execute the maintenance of the safety systems of the surface treatment equipment under the established security conditions, guaranteeing the stopping of the machines in case of opening of any of its elements.
Perform the periodic grease of the surface treatment equipment, according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Check the operation and maintenance of the air circuits and filters of the surface treatment equipment, according to the established maintenance standards.
Perform the cleaning of the components of the surface treatment equipment, according to the levels established in the maintenance plan.
Record the required maintenance data in the document-enabled documents.
CE5.5 Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the maintenance of surface treatment equipment.
Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real working environment: C3 with respect to CE3.6; C5 with respect to CE5.4.
Other capabilities:
Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.
Learn new concepts or procedures and effectively leverage training using acquired knowledge.
Adopt preventive behaviors in security matters.
Learn new concepts or procedures and effectively leverage training using acquired knowledge.
Sharing information with the work team.
Comply with the correct production rules.
Demonstrate autonomy in the resolution of contingencies related to its activity.
Finish the job within the set deadlines.
Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.
Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.
Take Responsibility for the work that you develop and the fulfillment of the objectives.
Transfer information clearly, in an orderly, structured and accurate manner to the right people at every moment.
Contents:
1. Application of surface treatments in papers, cartons and other materials
General process of application of surface treatments. Technological principles.
Identification and operation of equipment. Elements of the devices. Technical instructions and operating scheme.
Preparation and adjustment of surface treatment devices.
Control of the process. Electronic control systems. Variables and parameters.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the application of surface treatments.
2. Analysis and control of surface treatments in papers, cartons and other materials
Classification of surface treatments: corona treatment, heat treatment, varnish, paraffin, metallized and others.
Analysis of the properties of surface treatments.
Reference parameters. Control tests.
Quality control of surface treatments.
Tools and control techniques. Quality standards.
3. First level maintenance of surface treatment equipment for papers, cartons and other materials
Technical instructions for maintenance.
Cleaning of machines and equipment.
Security systems for the different devices of machines and equipment.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the maintenance of surface treatment equipment.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
60 m trial lab2.
Transformed 150 m2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the performance of surface treatments in papers, cartons and other materials, which will be accredited by one of the following ways:
Academic training of Superior Technician or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
ANNEX CDXVII
PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: FLEXOGRAPHY PRINTING
Professional Family: Graphic Arts
Level: 2
Code: ARG417_2
General competition:
Make the impression by the flexography procedure, making the printer assembly, preparing and adjusting the printing process elements and the necessary raw materials, according to the productivity and quality established and intervening in the graphic process, applying the plan of prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
Competition Units:
UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity conditions.
UC0201_2: Prepare raw materials and intermediate products for printing.
UC1344_2: Perform the cliches mount and adjust the printing process elements in flexography.
UC1345_2: Perform flexography printing.
Professional environment:
Professional scope:
Develops its professional activity in the graphic industry, in the printing area. In small, medium or large enterprises, with very different organizational/technological levels. She integrates into a work team where she develops individual and group tasks on flexography printing. In general it will depend organically on an intermediate command. The work is carried out on behalf of others.
Productive Sectors:
Sector of graphic arts, constituting its own subsector of printing or forming part of other graphic sectors such as publishing and manufacturing of paper, cardboard and other supports, in which different preprint, printing and post-pressure processes are carried out.
Relevant Occupations and Jobs:
Flexographic Plate Monter.
Flexographic machine operator.
Driver of flexographic printing machines.
Associated training: (450 hours)
Training Modules
MF0200_2: Processes in graphic arts. (120 hours)
MF0201_2: Materials and products in print. (120 hours)
MF1344_2: Cliches assembly and print preparation in flexography. (120 hours)
MF1345_2: Printing products in flexography. (90 hours)
COMPETITION UNIT 1: OPERATING IN THE GRAPHICAL PROCESS UNDER SECURITY, QUALITY, AND PRODUCTIVITY
Level: 2
Code: UC0200_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Check and follow the graphical process as a whole through workflows and in its different phases: preprint, print and post-pressure, through standardization and communication, to achieve quality and productivity, in accordance with established specifications.
CR1.1 Graphic process tracking is done through workflows to facilitate planning, automation, procedures, and other factors that affect the production environment.
CR1.2 By standardizing and communicating the work phases, a final result of the most effective process is achieved.
CR1.3 The different phases of the graphical process are analyzed with specification of their elements, applying the employment and sequentiality of each of them.
CR1.4 The parameters and preprint elements chosen are checked, according to technical specifications.
CR1.5 The printing system is in accordance with the support used and the product to be obtained.
CR1.6 The finish is applied according to the support used, process followed and usage needs, according to the technical specifications.
CR1.7 The observed anomalies are collected to take the necessary preventive and corrective measures.
CR1.8 The graphical process, in all its phases, is performed taking into account and applying safety, hygiene and environmental regulations.
RP2: Apply quality control methods in the graphic arts process to achieve the specified product, following existing standards and standards.
CR2.1 The graphical product is realized taking into account the fundamental concepts of quality in the different phases of its manufacture.
CR2.2 The most significant quality features in each of the phases of the process are identified by variables and attributes.
CR2.3 Quality control is done methodically, using the appropriate control elements for each feature.
CR2.4 Quality criteria are applied based on established quality and tolerance levels.
CR2.5 Control frequencies are applied according to the type of characteristics to be controlled and the number of product units to be obtained.
CR2.6 Quality control results and incidences are collected in the corresponding control sheets.
CR2.7 The desired colors and tones are obtained according to the parameters and color measurements.
CR2.8 The measuring devices are used according to the specific needs of the required values.
CR2.9 The image transfer is analyzed according to the point variation and the contrast.
RP3: Determine the characteristics of the graphical products to establish the appropriate manufacturing process, taking into account the available elements and applicable regulations.
CR3.1 Graphic products are identified according to their functional and communicative characteristics.
CR3.2 The functional and technological relationships of graphic products are set according to their component elements.
CR3.3 Graphic products are defined according to originals, sketches, and models.
CR3.4 Graphic products respond to established technical specifications.
CR3.5 Graphic products enable you to maintain competitive conditions for your business.
CR3.6 The physico-chemical characteristics of the graphic products take into account environmental and safety and hygiene regulations in the workplace.
Professional context:
Production media:
Computer equipment. Laser printer. Standards of communication. Workflows. Normalized light pupitre. Measurement and control tools and tools: densitometer, tipometer, odometer, colorimeter, spectrometer
Products and results:
Incidents of quality control. Control sheets. Identification of defects or defects in processes.
Information used or generated:
Production order. Technical documentation of preprint, printing and post-pressure equipment and machines. Safety, hygiene and environmental regulations. Quality standards and standards. Samples authorised. Technical sheets. Maintenance manuals. Control plans.
COMPETITION UNIT 2: PREPARE RAW MATERIALS AND INTERMEDIATE PRODUCTS FOR PRINTING
Level: 2
Code: UC0201_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Interpret production orders for work schedule with quality and productivity criteria.
CR1.1 Production orders are checked to contrast with the necessary technical information regarding quality and productivity.
CR1.2 Production orders are verified to ensure consistency with process elements: machine, materials, and methods.
RP2: Review the printer form to ensure its quality in the transfer.
CR2.1 The printer form is checked to ensure the adequacy of its surface in terms of the specified positioning, tracing, and measurements.
CR2.2 The printer form is inspected to correct any defects that may alter the surface transfer.
RP3: Prepare and control the media to be printed to feed the printing machine in a way that ensures the continuity of the print run.
CR3.1 The quantity and quality of the print media are verified to ensure compliance with the production order.
CR3.2 The print media is transported from the warehouse to the machine in accordance with the established security rules.
CR3.3 The print media is manipulated and treated according to the working methods established to secure your input and pass through the machine.
RP4: Prepare the inks and additives in standard tones and special colors according to the specifications, samples and supports to be printed.
CR4.1 The ink is chosen taking into account the printing process, the machine, the type of support and the finish.
CR4.2 The physico-chemical properties of printing inks: viscosity, draught, rigidity, are adapted to the production needs, by means of the appropriate operations: smoothie, addition of reducers, varnishes or oils.
CR4.3 The appropriate tones are obtained by mixing the inks according to the specifications indicated and carrying out checks with the "pantone" or color tables.
Professional context:
Production media:
Computer equipment. Sheet reader. Normalized light pupitre. Densitometer. Colorimeter, tell them.
Products and results:
Print media, printer shape, and inks.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Technical documentation of printing equipment and machines. Letters of color. Safety, hygiene and environmental regulations. Quality standards.
COMPETITION UNIT 3: PERFORM THE CLICHES MOUNT AND ADJUST THE PRINTING PROCESS ELEMENTS IN FLEXOGRAPHY
Level: 2
Code: UC1344_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Select and prepare the cylinders, adhesives and cliches or shirts recorded to guarantee the quality in the process of mounting the flexographic form, according to the technical specifications of the work order.
CR1.1 Adhesives are selected according to the specifications of the work order, checking the degree of hardness, adhesion and thickness.
CR1.2 The recorded clichés or shirts are identified by their color and correspondence with the model to be printed.
CR1.3 Written cliches or shirts are reviewed by checking the stickiness and surface finish as well as the absence of defects such as strokes, scratches, ink debris, dust and others.
CR1.4 The thickness and relief of the recorded cliches or shirts is measured in various zones with the micrometer checking that it conforms to the marked specifications.
CR1.5 The carrier cylinder is controlled by verifying the cleaning and the absence of surface defects, ensuring the perfect grip of the adhesives and the cylinder's smooth.
CR1.6 The carrier cylinders are selected according to the work order specifications, verifying their diameter and length.
RP2: Perform the assembly of the clichés to get the correct record and positioning, according to specifications set in the work order.
CR2.1 The correct sense or positioning of machine input is marked on the cliché according to the work order specifications.
CR2.2 The carrier cylinder is loaded into the mounting machine, regulating or adapting the fixing mechanisms.
CR2.3 Specific recording control devices, such as cameras, viewers, and others, are regulated by facilitating the adjustment of the clichés and the calibration of the system.
CR2.4 The mounting adhesive sticks on the cylinder surface ensuring correct adherence and absence of bubbles.
CR2.5 The cliché is affixed to the adhesive of the cylinder holder by means of the devices and the specific assembly techniques ensuring the absence of bubbles and allowing the correct positioning or registration of the plates.
CR2.6 The critical edges or zones of the cliché are sealed with sealing adhesive tapes, thermal silicones, or other appropriate products, preventing them from being taken off and deteriorating.
CR2.7 Cylinders with mounted cliches are wrapped with opaque material protecting them from ultraviolet light, preventing their contamination and improving their adhesion to the adhesive backing.
CR2.8 The preparation and adjustment operations in the clichés assembly are performed by applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
RP3: Prepare the input mechanisms, step by machine, output and treatment of the supports, by means of mechanical or electronic operations to condition the surface of the supports for printing and to allow the correct passage of the same by the machine.
CR3.1 The elements and mechanisms of the feeding system such as pneumatic group, feed head, transport elements, carrier, tension bodies and others, are verified and adapted to the needs of the support to be printed and to its physical characteristics.
CR3.2 The voltage applied to the support is regulated according to the printing and recording needs, by means of the tensioning mechanisms intended for this purpose.
CR3.3 The guiding device is adapted to the dimensions of the support by getting the correct alignment in the printing input.
CR3.4 The coil treatment equipment such as corona, flame, static electricity removal or other treatments are adjusted by getting the surface conditioning of the same for printing.
CR3.5 Rollers, conveyor belts and other material passing elements are checked and cleaned to prevent damage to the surface of the support.
CR3.6 The shooting mechanisms, transfer cylinders, tweezers or other transport elements of the supports by the flexography machines are adapted and regulated according to the physical characteristics thereof.
CR3.7 The elements and mechanisms of the output system as well as the finishing system, are prepared according to the nature of the product to be printed and the specific finishing of the work order.
CR3.8 The preparation and adjustment operations in the cliches assembly are performed by applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
RP4: Prepare print groups, to get printing according to the technical specifications set in the work order.
CR4.1 Transmission and inking elements are cleaned or replaced in groups or printing stations by mechanical, electronic or manual means, according to the needs of the work.
CR4.2 The anilox rollers are selected and mounted on a machine based on the criteria of quality, plot line, maximum ink transfer, maximum tonal density value, and work order instructions.
CR4.3 The elements of the inking group: tinteros, anilox rollers, blades or scrapes are mounted, adjusting them to the housing elements of the machine, ensuring the correct operation, taking into account the safety regulations, guaranteeing the good transfer of ink to the roller holder.
CR4.4 The cylinder-holder cylinders, in the coil machines, are placed and secured in their lodgings with the order determined, according to the specifications of the technical and work order, in accordance with safety standards and guaranteeing the absence of blows to the same.
CR4.5 The coating and the state of the pressure cylinders is checked against the technical specifications of the machine and the printing needs.
CR4.6 Print group preparation operations are performed by applying the safety standards specified in the work risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
RP5: Adjust the elements that make up the printing groups, by means of operations, mechanical and computer, to achieve a uniform and constant ink transfer to the support.
CR5.1 The ink pumps, tinteros and ink chambers are regulated by keeping the ink flow controlled by mechanical devices or machine tires.
CR5.2 The angle and pressure of the scratch blade are regulated along its entire surface by securing a uniform inking so that it does not scratch the anilox roller or create bursts in the printing.
CR5.3 The parallelism between the anilox roller, the carrier cylinder and the pressure cylinder is regulated by gages or other useful, achieving a safe and uniform contact.
CR5.4 The rheological properties of the ink are measured with the appropriate measuring devices: Ford cup, viscosimeter, thermometer and others, scoring the measurements in the documents enabled and verifying that the parameters are maintained according to the needs of the work.
CR5.5 The adjustment operations of the item of print groups are performed by applying the security rules specified in the work risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
RP6: Perform first-level maintenance of flexography machines and equipment for proper operation by following the manufacturer's technical instructions and established working protocols.
CR6.1 The periodic greasing of the points arranged in the flexography machines and equipment is performed according to the manufacturer's instructions and within the time limits set by the manufacturer.
CR6.2 The operation of the circuits and filters of the hydraulic and pneumatic systems is verified according to the established maintenance standards and deadlines.
CR6.3 The components of the flexography machines and equipment are cleaned according to the procedures laid down in the maintenance plan.
CR6.4 First-level maintenance is performed by applying the occupational risk prevention and environmental protection plan and recording the required data in the procedures.
CR6.5 The safety devices of the flexography machines are checked and maintained in accordance with the current occupational risk prevention plan.
CR6.6 The deposit of the waste generated in the established zones is carried out in accordance with the plan of prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection established by the company.
Professional context:
Production media:
Printing machines in flexography. Cliché monter. Cylinders and shirt-holders. Anilox cylinders and liners. Mounting adhesives, clichés, ink, supports: paper, films. Control pupitre. Waste containers. Personal protective equipment. Useful for measuring the properties of the inks: viscosity cups, viscosimeter, thermometer.
Products and results:
Mount of clichés. Flexographic printing machine on the point: adjustment of the anilox roll, pre-registration. Preparing and adjusting support for working conditions. First level maintenance of machines and equipment. Control of waste.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Product Summary of Product Characteristics Authorised impressions and samples. Technical documentation of flexographic printing equipment and machines. Plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection. Quality standards and standards. Record of maintenance data. Safety record for handling inks and solvents.
COMPETITION UNIT 4: PERFORM FLEXOGRAPHY PRINTING
Level: 2
Code: UC1345_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Get the first printed samples, performing printing groups and other flexographic machine devices, to check the print quality according to the technical specifications of the work order.
CR1.1 The ink of the anilox is transferred to the cliché with the minimum necessary pressure, by means of the handlers or electronic elements, obtaining a uniform and constant inking of the relief zones.
CR1.2 The ink of the cliché is transferred to the support with the minimum necessary pressure, by means of the handlers or electronic elements, obtaining a uniform and constant impression on the support.
CR1.3 The correct inking is done by adjusting the parallelism between the anilox rollers, the cylinder holder and the pressure cylinder by means of the approach handlers of the axes.
CR1.4 Print recording is obtained by matching the overlapping record crosses by circumferential and/or axial displacement of the portacliches cylinder
CR1.5 The drying of ink between bodies or printing stations is achieved by controlling the mechanical or electronic elements that act on the air temperature and extraction, adapting it to the printing needs of the support.
CR1.6 The first forms are controlled by comparing them with the authorized samples and technical specifications, observing the possible deficiencies to be corrected.
CR1.7 The tonality and color intensity of the first forms is verified with the optical measuring instruments: densitometres, colorimeters, spectrophotometers, guaranteeing validity with respect to the authorized sample and/or the parameters defined in the work order.
CR1.8 The printing parameters such as density, gain and others are measured with the optical measuring instruments: densitometer, colorimeter, spectrophotometer, expressing them in their corresponding units by checking that they respond to the required quality in the work order or the authorized samples.
CR1.9 Machine handling is performed by applying the safety standards specified in the occupational risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
CR1.10 The waste produced in the workplace is treated according to the current environmental protection plan.
RP2: Modify the process variables according to the results of the printed samples, in order to achieve the acceptance of the print run.
CR2.1 The correction and adjustment of the process variables are performed on the elements of the machine, the ink and the supports.
CR2.2 The circumferential recording of the printing is corrected by overtaking or delaying the position of the cylinders, by means of the manual, electronic or computer controls available to the machine.
CR2.3 The transverse recording of the printing is corrected by laterally displacing the roller-carrier rollers or by varying the band's guiding devices, by means of the manual, electronic or computer controls available to the machine.
CR2.4 Printing chromatic values: color, tone, intensity and brightness, are modified by acting on the components of the ink, by adding diluents, varnish or color concentrate.
RP3: Get the printed product, monitor the process during the run and coordinate your activity with the work team, to ensure the productivity and quality established in the work order.
CR3.1 The treatment of the surface of the support is controlled at the machine input and in each splice of the coil if any, with the appropriate reagents guaranteeing the quality of the treatment and the correct fixation of the ink.
CR3.2 Print recording and color variables are controlled and maintained in the parameters set within the tolerance margins.
CR3.3 The ink flow is stable by controlling the power circuit, ensuring the ink demand as per the needs of the printing support.
CR3.4 The anchor of the ink in the support is checked with the appropriate techniques and control elements, taking into account the safety criteria, verifying that it complies with the established parameters.
CR3.5 The color tone and intensity of printing during the spin is controlled by the optical measuring instruments: densitometres, colorimeters, spectrophotometers, maintaining uniformity during the spin.
CR3.6 Quality control is performed according to the frequency established by the company and with the appropriate measurement elements, according to the instructions of the work order, guaranteeing the quality and uniformity of the results throughout the circulation and recording these controls in the documents authorized by the company.
CR3.7 The printed materials are identified by means of carcloths following the directions of the work order, placing them in the established zones, taking into account the safety plan of the company.
CR3.8 Production data such as quantity of printed copies, production times, machine, type of stop, incidents and others are recorded in the document enabled by the company in order to contribute to the control of production plans and cost control.
CR3.9 The handling of the flexography machine is carried out by applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
CR3.10 The waste produced in the workplace during the run is treated according to the current environmental protection plan.
CR3.11 All operations are coordinated with the workgroup that operates on the print machine to ensure process continuity and the results set on the work order.
Professional context:
Production media:
Printing machines in flexography. Cylinders and shirt-holders. Anilox cylinders and liners. Clichés, ink, supports: papers, plastic cartons and others. Useful for measuring ink properties: viscosity cups, viscosimeter, thermometer. Densitometres, spectrophotometers. Samples authorised. Tell them. Micrometers. Normalized light desks. Production inspection viewers. Waste containers.
Products and results:
Products printed on various media: papers, plastics, cartons and others. Process control. Control of waste.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Part of production. Product Summary of Product Characteristics Quality sheet. Authorised impressions and samples. Technical documentation of printing equipment and machines. Plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection. Quality standards and standards. Production data record. Safety record for handling inks and solvents.
FORMATIVE MODULE 1: PROCESSES IN GRAPHIC ARTS
Level: 2
Code: MF0200_2
Associated with UC: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity
Duration: 120 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Analyze the entire graphical process and its different phases: preprint, print and post-pressure, considering the communication between them using standardization models.
CE1.1 Explain the characteristics and configuration of companies according to the production phase.
CE1.2 From a graphical product, describe through workflows the sequence of tasks or operations in a supposed production environment.
CE1.3 Analyze, from the design point of view, the characteristics of a given process:
Formats and measures.
Typology.
Colors.
Media.
Encuadernacion and Finishing.
CE1.4 From a given product, relate and sequence the different preprint phases that have been involved in its elaboration:
Text: body, family, style, paragraph, interline.
Frames: linearature, point shape, and angulation.
Separation of colors.
Plot and layout systems used.
CE1.5 From a given product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:
Type of media used.
Inks: classes and layers.
Tramado.
The character profile.
Footprint or relief on support.
Defects in printing.
Number of passes on machines.
CE1.6 Analyze the different preprint, printing and post-pressure systems, describing and relating their main phases to machines, equipment, raw materials and products.
CE1.7 Describe the most significant electronic printing systems.
C2: Classify graphic products according to their composition and functional characteristics: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.
CE2.1 Explain the characteristics of the different graphic products.
CE2.2 Analyze the structural characteristics of the different graphic products.
CE2.3 From graphic product samples:
Assess the communicative and functional capacity of different graphic products.
Analyze your physicochemical composition and identify your functional capacity.
C3: Recognize and analyze the parameters and measures of color used in graphic arts.
CE3.1 Describe the chromatic spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab.
CE3.2 Describe the measuring devices used in the colour: colorimeter, glinometer, spectrophotometer.
CE3.3 Describe the various lighting sources, color temperature, and observation conditions.
CE3.4 From color samples:
Identify color parameters: brightness, saturation, tone, and metamery index.
Represent colorimetric values in chromatic spaces.
Evaluate color differences and their ability to play in the graphical system.
CE3.5 Handle the tools and measuring instruments: hygrometer, thermometer, conductmeter, precision scales, densimeter, viscosimeter and microscope, to obtain the values of: humidity, temperature, conductivity, density, dimension variations of supports, materials and raw materials.
CE3.6 Describe the measuring devices used in colour: colorimeter, glinometer and spectrophotometer.
C4: Relating safety, hygiene and environmental standards with operations that are developed in the graphical process, complying with the established regulations.
CE4.1 Describe and relate the rules regarding safety, hygiene and the environment, with the different phases of the process.
CE4.2 Identify the security elements installed in the different places and risk teams.
CE4.3 Using practical examples, identify the security labels that appear on the machines and products used in the graphical process.
CE4.4 Recognize the environmental documents and procedures applied in the graphical process.
C5: Analyze the process of quality control in a "type process" of graphic arts.
CE5.1 Describe the fundamental phases and concepts of quality control in manufacturing.
CE5.2 Describe a receive control process succinct.
CE5.3 Describe the instruments used in quality control: densitometres, colorimeters, control strips and production line control devices.
CE5.4 From a preprint test, and taking into account printing standards:
Perform the densitometric and colorimetric measurements.
Assess that the reproduction of the color range conforms to the set standards.
CE5.5 From a printed product, and taking into account standards:
Select the measuring instrument.
Perform the calibration of the measuring instrument.
Perform densitometric, colorimetric, trapping, sliding, and gray balance measurements.
Chromatic space.
Take action on the control strip.
Check the setting with the set standards.
CE5.6 From a product to be bound and/or manipulate, identify and evaluate defects detected in:
Format and margins.
Cutting marks.
Signals of record.
Signatures.
Fibre Sense.
Repainted.
Troquels.
CE5.7 Describe the most significant quality features of the products:
Framing and manipulated: subjective assessment, cut marks, footprints, signs of registration, gluing.
Resistance to folding.
Resistance to rub.
Printing: density, trapping, stamping gain, color balance, pasting, sliding, recording.
Preprint: tests, standards.
CE5.8 Check the final status of the form and relate it to the specifications of the manipulated.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.1; C5 with respect to CE5.1, CE5.2.
Other capabilities:
Take responsibility for the work you develop.
Demonstrate some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.
Respect the company's internal rules and procedures.
Contents:
1. Graphical process
Types of graphic products.
Company types: organization and structure.
Standardization and communication models. Workflows.
Preprint systems. Classes of originals. Latent image and revealed processes.
Input peripherals, output peripherals, specific software and hardware, processing and test systems.
Plotting and mounting. Elements of the assembly. Specific software.
Print systems. Equipment, performance, comparison of different systems.
Types of inks and supports for each printing system.
Encuaderation. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.
Paper and paperboard manipulated. Manipulated from other materials.
2. Colour and its measurement
Nature of light.
electromagnetic spectrum.
Philosophy of vision.
Chromatic space.
Factors that affect color perception.
Color Theory. Additive and subtractive synthesis of the color.
Color rendering systems: Munsell, RGB, HSL, HSV, Pantone, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.
Color measurement instruments: densitometres, colorimeters, glinometers, and spectrophotometers. Colour assessment.
3. Safety, hygiene and the environment
Safety plans and regulations.
Rules in force.
Signals and alarms.
Environmental regulations.
4. Quality in processes
More characteristic tests, instruments and measurements.
Preprint quality: point gain, gray balance, and density.
Print variables (print density, contrast, contrast, penetration, fixed, stamping gain, color and gray balance).
Control patches in print. Measurement.
Quality in post-pressure.
Visual control of binding and manipulated.
Checking for bound and manipulated defects.
5. Quality control
Quality in manufacturing.
Quality control. Concepts involved.
Control elements.
Phases of control: receipt of materials, processes and products.
ISO and UNE rules.
Standards and standards published by AENOR committee 54 relating to the graphical process
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of 2 m2/pupil.
60 m trial lab2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to graphic arts processes, which will be accredited by one of the following ways:
Academic training of Licentiated or Engineer or others of equal level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 2: MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS IN PRINT
Level: 2
Code: MF0201_2
Associated with UC: Preparing raw materials and intermediate products for printing
Duration: 120 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Recognize and analyze the main properties and characteristics of the raw materials used in printing processes.
CE1.1 Recognize and describe the type and structure of papers, cartons, plastics, metals and other media for printing.
CE1.2 Recognize and describe the main characteristics and physical-chemical properties of the supports, expressing them in their corresponding units.
CE1.3 Recognize and describe the main characteristics and physical-chemical properties of inks, pigments, dyes, resins, oils, varnishes and solvents, expressing them in their corresponding units.
CE1.4 Recognize and describe the main physical-chemical characteristics of the printing forms.
CE1.5 Characterize the main defects and alterations of the different media used for printing.
CE1.6 From media samples, inks and printer shapes, identify by your trade name the main materials used for printing.
C2: Analyze the behavior of the main materials (products, inks, varnishes, plates and supports) used in the printing system, binding and manipulated, related to its application.
CE2.1 Describe the main pigments, resins, oils, varnishes and solvents related to the inks.
CE2.2 Describe the main materials and chemical products related to the printer form.
CE2.3 Relate the various materials with the printing, binding or manipulated mode used and the number of copies of the print run.
CE2.4 Relating the properties of materials with the requirements of behavior in printing.
C3: Evaluate the characteristics of the quality variables of the raw materials, using appropriate instruments.
CE3.1 Relate the durability and behavior of the different supports in the printing with the alterations that this suffers because of: humidity and temperature, storage, the direction of the fiber and the composition of the paste.
CE3.2 Relate the durability and behavior of the inks and chemicals used in printing with the alterations that these suffer, due to the temperature, humidity, oxidation, exposure to light and its composition.
CE3.3 To differentiate the characteristics and functioning of the measuring instruments used for the quality control of raw materials.
CE3.4 From a practical case of an essay: Handle the tools and measuring instruments (gyrometer, thermometer, balance of precision, viscosimeter, microscope, IGT), to obtain the values of humidity, pressure, density, variations of dimension of supports, materials and raw materials, expressing correctly the results of the measurements.
CE3.5 From a practical assumption, duly characterized by quality standards, determine the appropriate materials for the production.
C4: Analyze the storage process of materials used in Graphic Arts.
CE4.1 Explain the characteristic storage systems of the Graphic Arts companies.
CE4.2 Explain the characteristics of equipment and means of loading, transport and unloading of materials used, related to their applications.
CE4.3 Relate the materials with the procedures and conditions that your storage requires.
C5: Prepare raw materials, according to technical specifications and in accordance with current safety and hygiene regulations.
CE5.1 Check that the raw materials to be treated match those indicated in the work order specifications.
CE5.2 Describe the components and dilutions to be used in the preparation of chemical products for printing.
CE5.3 Perform the mixtures and conditioning of the raw materials, according to the established parameters, respecting the safety and hygiene standards.
CE5.4 Check that the preparation of the materials is adapted to the expected results.
CE5.5 Relate the materials used in Graphic Arts, with the environmental regulations, considering the substitutes for the products traditionally used.
CE5.6 Identify the risks and level of danger posed by the manipulation of different materials and products used in Graphic Arts.
C6: Analyze and evaluate safety and hygiene plans and the corresponding regulations in place to correctly use media and safety equipment in the transport and handling of raw materials for printing.
CE6.1 Relate and describe the rules on symbology and physical situation of signals and alarms, fire equipment, transport safety and handling of raw materials.
CE6.2 Describe the properties and uses of clothing and personal protective equipment plus employees in the graphic industry for the transport and handling of raw materials.
CE6.3 From a certain number of security and business plans in the printing industry:
Identify and describe the most relevant aspects of each plan, collected in the documentation that contains it.
Identify and describe risk factors and situations for health and safety in the plans.
Relate and describe the appropriate preventive measures and prevention methods established to prevent accidents.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C3 with respect to CE3.5; C6 with respect to CE6.3.
Contents:
1. Print media
Physical-chemical structure of the composition of papers, cartons, cardboard. Vegetable materials, plastics, metals.
Classification, identification and trade names, formats and applications.
More important properties of print media as raw material.
Measurement of grammar, roughness, relative humidity, dimensional stability, hardness and flexibility.
Pasta classes for the stucate of the paper holders: paper, cardboard, cardboard.
Identification of defects in media.
Printability of the different media.
Conditioning.
Preparation and applications.
2. Inks
Physical-chemical composition of the inks.
Types of inks. Properties.
Colorimetric measurement, viscosity, density, rigidity, transparency, tolerance between inks and emulsification capacity with water.
Classification by print mode.
Identification, applications, and trade names.
Mixture of inks (Pantone). Preparation and applications.
Identification of defects. Mechanical resistors and different agents (light, water, fats, acids, alkalis and soaps).
3. Printer form and photographic films
Microscopic structure. Classes of emulsions.
Types of photographic films.
Chemicals.
Classification, identification, applications, formats and trade names.
Processed of sensitive materials.
More important properties of the forms used in printing: resistance to the spin, surface tension.
Different printer shapes according to print mode.
Preparation and mixing of products for processing.
4. Complementary materials
Barnices.
Lacas.
Adhesives.
Plastics.
Printing films.
Conditioning and preparation.
5. Transport, Packaging, Storage
Transport of materials from factory to printer.
Transport and packaging problems for media.
Storage conditions. Temperature, humidity.
Influence of storage in the print run.
6. Quality control of raw materials
Control process: on the materials (supports and inks), viscosity control, drying times, resistance to the rub and scratches of varnishes and lacquers.
Quality regulations. Commercial qualities.
Teams and instruments.
Inspection and reception procedures.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of 2 m2/pupil.
60 m trial lab2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the raw materials used in printing that will be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Technical Engineer and others of higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 3: MOUNTING CLICHÉS AND PREPARING PRINTING ON FLEXOGRAPHY
Level: 2
Code: MF1344_2
Associated with UC: Perform the cliches mount and adjust the printing process elements in flexography
Duration: 120 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Rate the characteristics of the different flexography clichés, carrying out tests on different samples.
CE1.1 Recognize the nature of the most common clichés used in flexography, such as photopolymers, rubbers, etc., for their texture and behavior in contact with the different inks to be used and applications in the printing of different supports.
CE1.2 Preview possible dimensional alterations in the surface structure resulting from an incorrect manipulation of flexographic clichés.
CE1.3 Value the results obtained in different tests on different clichés, in relation to their capacity of inking, ink transmission and resistance to solvents and hardness.
CE1.4 Perform hardness and elongation resistance measurements on the most common cliches used in flexography, with the most appropriate measuring devices, giving the results in the corresponding units of measurement.
C2: Analyse the different cylinders portacliches according to their structure and fixation of the clichés.
CE2.1 Describe the portacliches cylinders according to their nature, structure, and dimensions.
CE2.2 Relate the specific characteristics of the portacliches cylinders with the function they perform.
CE2.3 Identify the longitudinal and transverse guide marks recorded in a portable cylinder, reasoning their need and use.
CE2.4 In a practical case properly characterized and given a series of cylinders portacliches:
Recognize the uniformity on its surface, the absence of any traces of adhesive, notches, rips, or others, considering the appropriate corrective measures.
Recognize the circumferentiality of the cylinders and classify them by their diameter and applications.
CE2.5 Describe the imposition and fixed operations of the clichés according to the type of cylinder and structure of the clichés: individual, films and shirts.
CE2.6 Based on the interpretation of a given work order, identify the type of cylinder (fixed, removable) by associating the assembly of clichés with their characteristics and verifying the diameter that allows the development of preset printing.
CE2.7 Describe the cleaning and degreasing operations of the cylinders, and identify the useful and additive to be employed in the preparation of the adhesion surface and fixed of the cylinder portacliche.
CE2.8 Identify the most common adhesives used in the preparation of the flexographic printer form, by its presentation and structure.
CE2.9 Classify the most common adhesives in relation to their mechanical properties, chemical resistance to solvents and adhesion capacity.
CE2.10 Relate the adhesives with the binding materials of the adherent side of the clichés such as polyester, PVC, metal and others, depending on the ability of adhesion, fixation and mechanical strength thereof.
C3: Perform the assembly of flexographic cliches or engraved shirts, on the cylinder holder, supports adapted to the same or mandrels, according to the layout indicated in a work order.
CE3.1 Describe the job streams that characterize the assembly and pasting operations of the recorded cliches or shirts, relating them to the machines and useful employees.
CE3.2 Identify and describe the different symbols used in the layout and assembly of flexographic clichés: stitches, cutting lines, folding, recording crosses, side witnesses, witness of photoelectric cells and control strips.
CE3.3 Relate the type of layout and assembly with the original class, machine format, development, support size to print, subsequent finishing operations, and type of inks to be used.
CE3.4 In a practical case properly characterized on mounting and sticking tests with different adhesives:
Identify the performance and effectiveness of each of them.
Describe the differences in behavior and effectiveness by determining the most appropriate with respect to the given printing technical characteristics.
CE3.5 In several practical cases of properly characterized cliches assembly:
Perform the cleaning and degreasing of the cylinders.
Ensure the fixing of the cylinder holder in the mounting machine, controlling the rotation of the cylinder in the pasting operations of the clichés.
Identify the correct sense of printing input from the machine, marking it on the cliché according to technical specifications.
Perform maneuvers of use of the recording control elements of the assembly, checking the calibration and good operation of cameras and viewers.
Cover the portacliche cylinder of the chosen adhesive so that it allows the cliches to be fixed with guarantees of glue, surface uniformity and required registration.
Perform the imposition and pasting of the clichés in their corresponding places according to the layout.
Perform the sealing of the songs and critical zones of the clichés, ensuring their tightness to solvent inks and foreign bodies that can alter their characteristics and adherence.
Perform all operations by applying risk prevention regulations linked to the assembly of clichés.
CE3.6 In several practical cases of mounting properly characterized recorded shirts:
Perform the cleaning and degreasing of the cylinders.
Identify the correct sense of printing input from the machine, marking it on the printed shirt according to technical specifications.
Perform the assembly of the shirts recorded on the cylinders, checking their correct placement.
Perform all operations by applying risk prevention regulations linked to the assembly of recorded shirts.
C4: Operate the power, step, output and surface treatment mechanisms in flexographic printing machines, adapting them to a given support and printing needs.
CE4.1 Recognize machine and/or electronic machine handlers that allow for adjustment of power, pass, and transportation systems.
CE4.2 Verify the operation of the elements that make up the feeding body: coils or sheets, transport and output, by means of simple manoeuvres that allow the assessment of their operation in different conditions of use.
CE4.3 Relate the different mechanisms of surface treatments of the supports, by the type of treatment that we can apply and its function: corona treatment, flamed, electrostatic.
CE4.4 Make mechanical and/or electronic adjustments in the surface treatment mechanisms of the supports, ensuring their effectiveness by testing, adapting them to the needs and type of treatment.
CE4.5 In several practical cases properly characterized from performing power, step, and output operations with different media in sheets and coils:
Adjust the different sheet feeding systems: pneumatic or mechanical, by means of mechanical and/or electronic operations ensuring the synchronization of side heels, height and tweezers.
Adjust the different coil feeding systems by means of mechanical and/or electronic operations, adapting the guiding device to the size of the support, the passage through the tensioning rollers and others.
Adjust the different output systems in sheets or coils by means of mechanical and/or electronic operations, maneuvering and synchronizing the elements that ensure a perfect equalization, stacking of the sheets and a correct formation of the coil, which allows its subsequent manipulation.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the preparation of the food, step, outlet and treatment mechanisms of the supports.
C5: Perform the own operations of mounting and disassembling the removable elements of a printing body: tintero, contributor, anilox, blades and cylinders.
CE5.1 Identify all the elements that make up the printing stations or bodies in flexography.
CE5.2 Relate the printing elements such as tintero, carrier roller, anilox roller, cylinder holder, pressure cylinder and others, according to its nature, structure, machine positioning and function that performs: inking, ink transmission, pressure.
CE5.3 Identify the different inking systems: tintero with dador, tintero with submerged anilox and inverted blade and double-blade closed chamber tintero, for its structure and mode of operation, explaining differences between them and advantages of use, in relation to the type of ink and support to be printed.
CE5.4 Relating the common and specific auxiliary elements of the different ink and inking transmission systems: tintero cuvette, contributing roller, anilox, blades, double-blade tintero, ink tank, pump, beater, heaters, additive dispenser, viscosimeter, thermometer and closed circuit.
CE5.5 Relate the different anilox rollers by their nature: metallic, ceramic or other, and the different types of engraving (pyramidal or helical), depth of engraving and degrees of inclination.
CE5.6 In a practical case, perform mechanical and/or electronic maneuvers by checking all the auxiliary elements involved in the inking, placing each one of them in the established place that corresponds to them in relation to the function they perform.
CE5.7 In a properly characterized scenario:
Perform precise mechanical and/or electronic operations of assembly and disassembly of the interchangeable carrier cylinders, preventing them from suffering any deterioration.
Ensure stable fixation on the printer body, making use of the closing mechanisms and handles arranged in the flexography machine.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the assembly and disassembly of the printing body elements.
C6: Make adjustments to the elements of inking and printing, by means of mechanical and/or electronic operations, ensuring the control of ink transmission in different situations and machines.
CE6.1 Relate the different types of roller rollers, diameter, hardness, speed of rotation, with the type of ink and level of filling of the tinteros.
CE6.2 Relating the different anilox rollers, nature and type of engraving with the ink type, blade type, edge, attack angulation, pressure and distance to the ink transmission point.
CE6.3 Relate the different double-blade closed chamber tinteros with the type of ink and pressure needs and angle of attack of the blades to ensure tightness and control over the filling of the alveoli and surface cleaning of the cylinder.
CE6.4 In a practical case properly characterized in adjusting the elements of inking and printing and by means of mechanical and/or electronic operations:
Perform pump tank filling maneuvers, with caution to avoid splashing and creating foam.
Conditioning the ink circuit according to inking needs and ink type.
Place the feeding tube from the pump to the tintero and return from the tintero to the pump reservoir, with as little distance as possible and ensuring the absence of bends that hinder the flow of ink.
Maneuvering with the ink pump, adjusting the flow rate to the needs of inking, controlling the absence of losses in the circuit, assuring the flow control and preventing the decanting of ink pigments.
Perform the inking of different anilox, relating their nature and type of engraving with the ability of inking and ink transmission.
Ensure parallelism between dador, anilox, and cylinder portacliches, making use of each element's own and independent handlers.
Ensure the uniform pressure of the cleaning blades on the entire contact surface, which ensures the cleaning and control of the inking.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the adjustment of the inking elements.
CE6.5 In a practical case properly characterized, measure the rheology and properties of the inks, such as viscosity, color, tonality, intensity and others, using the appropriate measuring instruments: ford cup, viscosimeter, colorimeter, thermometer, densitometer, and note the measurements in their corresponding units.
C7: Perform the first level maintenance described in the manual of a flexography machine, ensuring the correct operation of the flexography machine.
CE7.1 Identify all the points of the machines that due to their influence in the process require cleaning and ordinary grease.
CE7.2 Interpret in the maintenance book of a machine all points of grease by its shape, indicative color and positioning in the machine, relating them to the type of lubricant and periodicity of maintenance.
CE7.3 Recognize in the maintenance book of a flexography machine the method of maintenance and periodicity of all auxiliary mechanisms, such as tires, hydraulic, filters and others.
CE7.4 Relate cleaning additive products with the elements on which they act useful and self-protection materials in their applications.
CE7.5 In a practical case of maintenance of a flexography machine, properly characterized:
Relate the security elements of a flexography machine to its position, function, and part of the operation of the machine on which it acts: emergency stop buttons, security grids, housings.
Act on the security elements by checking their proper operation and verifying that the expected responses occur: emergency stop or immobilization of the machine.
Recognize the protocols of action in relation to the treatment of the waste produced during the first level maintenance.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C3 with respect to CE3.4, CE3.5 and CE3.6; C4 with respect to CE4.4 and CE4.5; C5 with respect to CE5.6 and CE5.7; C6 with respect to CE6.4 and CE6.5; C7 with respect to all of its criteria.
Other capabilities:
Take responsibility for the work you develop.
Finish the job within the set deadlines.
Propose alternatives in order to improve the results.
Demonstrate some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.
Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.
Contents:
1. Mounting flexographic clichés
Characteristics and nature of the clichés: photopolymers, rubber and others.
Manipulation of clichés.
Tests and measurements.
Portacliches Cylinders. Characteristics and types.
Cleaning and degreasing of the cylinder carrier.
Imposition and fixed of the clichés on the cylinder portacliches.
Adhesives used in the cliches assembly.
Mount systems.
Auxiliary elements: cameras and log viewers.
2. Preparation of the feeding, passing and exit bodies in the flexography machines
Handlers. Function and use.
Surface treatment of media.
Power, transport and output: coil and sheet.
Drying equipment.
Machine security features.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the preparation of the feeding, passing and exit bodies of the flexography machine.
3. Preparing the flexography printing body
Features and functions of the printer body.
Stations. Elements that compose it.
Mount and unmount operations of the portacliches cylinders.
Anilox Rollers. Nature and type of engraving.
Inking systems (tintero dador, tintero with anilox, inverted blades, dual-camera camera tintero). Structure and mode of operation.
Auxiliary elements of ink and ink transmission systems.
Regulation of the ink flow.
Adapting inks to printing needs.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the preparation of the printer body.
4. First-level maintenance on flexography printing machines
Technical instructions for maintenance.
Cleaning the machine.
Security elements of the different machine bodies.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to flexographic machine maintenance operations.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
-Multi-purpose Aula of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
-60 m trial lab2.
-150 m print workshop2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the realization of the cliches assembly and adjustment of the elements of the flexography printing process, which will be credited by one of the following ways:
Academic training of Superior Technician or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 4: PRINTING PRODUCTS ON FLEXOGRAPHY
Level: 2
Code: MF1345_2
Associated with UC: Perform flexography printing
Duration: 90 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Perform start-up operations on flexographic printing machines and equipment to obtain the first printed samples.
CE1.1 Describe the start up operations of print groups.
CE1.2 Explain the parameters to be controlled during the commissioning of the machines: machine speed, synchronization of the elements, operation of the closed circuit of ink, temperature of the drying elements and others.
CE1.3 Relate the different dryers depending on their position in the flexographic printing machine (between bodies in line), function mode and type of drying (UV lamps, hot air blowers, infrared lamps.
CE1.4 From a convenient scenario, properly characterized by a work order:
Adjust the pressure between the rollers of the inking group (pressure roller carrier roller, anilox-roller roller carrier roller, anilox roller-bearing roller).
Adjust the pressure and incidence angle of the previously selected blades on the different inking systems.
Determine the ink flow.
Control the speed of the machine in relation to the printing needs or technical characteristics.
Adjust the drying elements according to the needs of the support and the ink to be used.
Get the first printed samples for your assessment of the instructions received or sample and take corrective action that results from this.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the performance of the printing on the etching.
C2: Perform flexography printing by keeping process variables within tolerances established by controlling and adjusting process parameters.
CE2.1 Classify printing values, which have to be kept stable during the run: recording, color, tone, intensity, contrast, printing cleaning, drying and anchoring of the ink due to its importance in the quality result required in the work order, within the margins of tolerance.
CE2.2 Describe the process elements that require coordination by the team operating on flexographic printing machines.
CE2.3 Describe the defects of the flexographic printing system (stamping gain, rebaba in profiles and others) as well as those relating to registration, colour, intonation, drying and anchoring.
CE2.4 In a properly characterized scenario, using samples given with print defects:
Assess the defects of the samples and determine the necessary adjustments.
Make adjustments to the required parameters by driving (manually or using computerized equipment) on the mechanical elements of recording, ink viscosity, drying, pressure between inking rollers, anilox, portacliches, depression and regulations of the feeding, transport and exit system.
Relate the causes that have caused the defects with the adjustments made and with the results obtained.
Relate the order of printing of colors, anilox cylinder diameter, and portacliches, according to printing needs and technical characteristics.
CE2.5 Relate the machines and raw materials with the print speed of the print run, according to the parameters of the printed form: support, viscosity, ink drying, density, print contrast, trapping, diluent, retarder, accelerant.
CE2.6 Relate the characteristic defects in the form, caused by the transport of the support by the machine: repainted, water, resistance to the rub and the scratched.
CE2.7 In different practical cases for obtaining the register properly characterized:
Modify the band voltage or the spin released from the portacliche cylinder to achieve the circumferential record using the most suitable according to the type of machine (planetary or online system).
Axially move the band or each of the carrier cylinders to achieve the axial registration using the most suitable according to the type of machine (planetary or online system).
CE2.8 In different case studies properly characterized by one or more work orders:
Define the necessary coordination in the process.
Perform flexographic printing with different types of anilox cylinder, valuing the differences in inking and chromatic results, determining the optimal relationship between them.
Perform flexographic printing using different types of clichés, different types of inks and different types of media, valuing the resulting print quality, checking the recording, tone cleaning, drying, anchored and others.
Relate the results to the employees and print values (anilox, ink, cliché, support, speed, pressure).
To collect in a document of production control facilitated, the data related to the printing: number of printed copies, times used, incidents during the run, stops and alterations of the variables of the printing and their motives, measures of correction and others analyzing the deviations that have occurred.
C3: Value the quality of printed products in flexography by measuring the printing values and considering previously established standards.
CE3.1 Describe the method and frequency of obtaining printed samples that allow their assessment during a specified print run.
CE3.2 Differentiate and describe the characteristics and operation of measuring instruments used in print quality control.
CE3.3 Relate the measurement of various parameters such as drying, color, tone, density, print contrast, stamping gain, trapping, mechanical resistances, chemical resistance, recording and other, using the appropriate instruments and expressing the results in their corresponding units of measurement.
CE3.4 Describe the influence of the lighting conditions, the colors of the adjacent surfaces, the characteristics of the surface of the support: gloss, matt, porosity and texture, and the penetration and drying that allows the measurement of the color.
CE3.5 From several practical cases to control the quality of the printed product:
Relate the different elements involved in a control strip with the tolerance margins of the required quality parameters.
Identify and describe defects that must be controlled during printing and represent values in a chart.
Relate the resulting graphs of the measurements: viscosity, drying, color intensity, print contrast, trapped, tone error, gray content, recording, physical resistances, chemical, support printability and ink anchor, with the parameters set in the case.
Make the necessary measurements on the control strips by scoring the results and comparing them to the previously established standards.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.4; C2 with respect to CE2.2, CE2.3, CE2.6 and CE2.7; C3 with respect to CE3.5.
Other capabilities:
Take responsibility for the work you develop.
Comply with the correct production rules.
Finish the job within the set deadlines.
Propose alternatives in order to improve the results.
Demonstrate some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.
Recognize the organization's productive process.
Interpret and execute work instructions.
Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.
Respect the company's internal rules and procedures.
Contents
1. Starting operations of flexography machines
Adjustment and throttling handlers.
Printing and color of the print. Print sequence. Colour mixture. Check the printed product with preprint tests.
The speed of the machine. Relationship between raw materials and speed.
Adjustment of the drying elements.
2. The print run on flexography
Manual, electronic or computer readjustment of the dosage elements.
Review of the form. Readjustment of the parameters of the form: inking, transfer of ink and recording of the image on the medium.
Defects in flexography printing. Cause/correction.
Viscosity conditioning and ink drying.
Coordination of equipment in the process.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the flexography printing process.
3. Quality control during flexography printing
Quality standards for flexography printed.
Programs and equipment for the quality control of the flexography form.
Elements for quality control of the form: control strips, side witness, patches.
Quality control procedures of the flexography form.
Control of the finished form: ink behavior on the media. Printable conditions of the media.
Guidelines for the inspection of the form. Sampling. Reliability. Measurement.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
-Multi-purpose Aula of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
-60 m trial lab2.
-150 m print workshop2.
Professional profile of the trainer
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the performance of flexography printing, which will be credited by one of the following ways:
Academic training of Superior Technician or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
ANNEX CDXVIII
PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: PRINTMAKING PRINTING
Professional Family: Graphic Arts
Level: 2
Code: ARG418_2
General competition:
Make the impression by the process of hologravure, preparing and adjusting the elements of the printing process and the necessary raw materials, according to the productivity and quality established and intervening in the graphic process, applying the plan of prevention of occupational risks and of environmental protection.
Competition Units:
UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity conditions.
UC0201_2: Prepare raw materials and intermediate products for printing.
UC1346_2: Adjust the elements of the print process to a huecogravure.
UC1347_2: Perform the print on the engraving.
Professional environment:
Professional scope:
Develops its professional activity in the graphic industry, in the printing area. In small, medium or large enterprises, with very different organizational/technological levels. She is integrated into a work team where she develops individual and group tasks on the printing of the enrogravure. In general it will depend organically on an intermediate command. The work is carried out on behalf of others.
Productive Sectors:
Sector of graphic arts, constituting its own subsector of printing or forming part of other graphic sectors such as editorial and manufacturing of paper, cardboard and other supports, in which different preprint, printing, post-pressure processes are carried out.
Relevant Occupations and Jobs:
The operator of a huecogravure machine.
A humour-engraving machine operator.
A conductor of a huecogravure machine.
Associated training: (450 hours)
Training Modules
MF0200_2: Processes in graphic arts. (120 hours)
MF0201_2: Materials and products in print. (120 hours)
MF1346_2: Preparing the printout in an engraving. (120 hours)
MF1347_2: Impression of products in enhuecograving. (90 hours)
COMPETITION UNIT 1: OPERATING IN THE GRAPHICAL PROCESS UNDER SECURITY, QUALITY, AND PRODUCTIVITY
Level: 2
Code: UC0200_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Check and follow the graphical process as a whole through workflows and in its different phases: preprint, print and post-pressure, through standardization and communication, to achieve quality and productivity, in accordance with established specifications.
CR1.1 Graphic process tracking is done through workflows to facilitate planning, automation, procedures, and other factors that affect the production environment.
CR1.2 By standardizing and communicating the work phases, a final result of the most effective process is achieved.
CR1.3 The different phases of the graphical process are analyzed with specification of their elements, applying the employment and sequentiality of each of them.
CR1.4 The parameters and preprint elements chosen are checked, according to technical specifications.
CR1.5 The printing system is in accordance with the support used and the product to be obtained.
CR1.6 The finish is applied according to the support used, process followed and usage needs, according to the technical specifications.
CR1.7 The observed anomalies are collected to take the necessary preventive and corrective measures.
CR1.8 The graphical process, in all its phases, is performed taking into account and applying safety, hygiene and environmental regulations.
RP2: Apply quality control methods in the graphic arts process to achieve the specified product, following existing standards and standards.
CR2.1 The graphical product is realized taking into account the fundamental concepts of quality in the different phases of its manufacture.
CR2.2 The most significant quality features in each of the phases of the process are identified by variables and attributes.
CR2.3 Quality control is done methodically, using the appropriate control elements for each feature.
CR2.4 Quality criteria are applied based on established quality and tolerance levels.
CR2.5 Control frequencies are applied according to the type of characteristics to be controlled and the number of product units to be obtained.
CR2.6 Quality control results and incidences are collected in the corresponding control sheets.
CR2.7 The desired colors and tones are obtained according to the parameters and color measurements.
CR2.8 The measuring devices are used according to the specific needs of the required values.
CR2.9 The image transfer is analyzed according to the point variation and the contrast.
RP3: Determine the characteristics of the graphical products to establish the appropriate manufacturing process, taking into account the available elements and applicable regulations.
CR3.1 Graphic products are identified according to their functional and communicative characteristics.
CR3.2 The functional and technological relationships of graphic products are set according to their component elements.
CR3.3 Graphic products are defined according to originals, sketches, and models.
CR3.4 Graphic products respond to established technical specifications.
CR3.5 Graphic products enable you to maintain competitive conditions for your business.
CR3.6 The physico-chemical characteristics of the graphic products take into account environmental and safety and hygiene regulations in the workplace.
Professional context:
Production media:
Computer equipment. Laser printer. Standards of communication. Workflows. Normalized light pupitre. Measurement and control tools and tools: densitometer, tipometer, odometer, colorimeter, spectrometer.
Products and results:
Incidents of quality control. Control sheets. Identification of defects or defects in processes.
Information used or generated:
Production order. Technical documentation of preprint, printing and post-pressure equipment and machines. Safety, hygiene and environmental regulations. Quality standards and standards. Samples authorised. Technical sheets. Maintenance manuals. Control plans.
COMPETITION UNIT 2: PREPARE RAW MATERIALS AND INTERMEDIATE PRODUCTS FOR PRINTING
Level: 2
Code: UC0201_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Interpret production orders for work schedule with quality and productivity criteria.
CR1.1 Production orders are checked to contrast with the necessary technical information regarding quality and productivity.
CR1.2 Production orders are verified to ensure consistency with process elements: machine, materials, and methods.
RP2: Review the printer form to ensure its quality in the transfer.
CR2.1 The printer form is checked to ensure the adequacy of its surface in terms of the specified positioning, tracing, and measurements.
CR2.2 The printer form is inspected to correct any defects that may alter the surface transfer.
RP3: Prepare and control the media to be printed to feed the printing machine in a way that ensures the continuity of the print run.
CR3.1 The quantity and quality of the print media are verified to ensure compliance with the production order.
CR3.2 The print media is transported from the warehouse to the machine in accordance with the established security rules.
CR3.3 The print media is manipulated and treated according to the working methods established to secure your input and pass through the machine.
RP4: Prepare the inks and additives in standard tones and special colors according to the specifications, samples and supports to be printed.
CR4.1 The ink is chosen taking into account the printing process, the machine, the type of support and the finish.
CR4.2 The physico-chemical properties of printing inks: viscosity, draught, rigidity, are adapted to the production needs, by means of the appropriate operations: smoothie, addition of reducers, varnishes or oils.
CR4.3 The appropriate tones are obtained by mixing the inks according to the specifications indicated and carrying out checks with the "pantone" or color tables.
Professional context:
Production media:
Computer equipment. Sheet reader. Normalized light pupitre. Densitometer. Colorimeter, tell them.
Products and results:
Print media, printer shape, and inks.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Technical documentation of printing equipment and machines. Letters of color. Safety, hygiene and environmental regulations. Quality standards.
COMPETITION UNIT 3: ADJUST THE ELEMENTS OF THE PRINT PROCESS IN HUECOGRAVURE
Level: 2
Code: UC1346_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Prepare the input, step, and output mechanisms of the print machine in a huecogravure by mechanical or electronic adjustment operations to allow the correct passage of the media during printing.
CR1.1 Power system elements and mechanisms: pneumatic group, power head, carrier, tension bodies, and others are mechanically adjusted and/or through the control panel according to the needs of the printing support and its physical characteristics.
CR1.2 The support transport elements and mechanisms are mechanically regulated and/or through the control panel in relation to the nature of the support to be printed.
CR1.3 The elements and mechanisms of the output system are mechanically prepared and/or through the control panel adapting to the support to be printed, to the form to be obtained and to the format determined in the technical specifications.
CR1.4 The operations of preparing the machinery for the entry, passage and exit of the machine are carried out by applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
RP2: Prepare the engraving cylinder and the pressure cylinder on the engraving machine by making the necessary adjustments to ensure the correct inking and recording of the printed matter according to the technical specifications and/or authorised samples.
CR2.1 The engraving cylinder placement is performed according to the established working methods, thereby achieving its adaptation to the inking body.
CR2.2 The embossed cylinder is coupled to the printer or printer group by performing the precise positioning manoeuvres to ensure its stability.
CR2.3 The engraving cylinder is fixed on the inking body allowing an optimal position of pre-registration inking on the support to be printed.
CR2.4 The state of the pressure cylinder, its coating and dimensions is checked by verifying that it responds to the printing needs (type of engraving, ink and support) and to the technical specifications of the machine.
CR2.5 The printer cylinder is chosen according to its hardness, considering in the choice the characteristics of the support to be printed so as to ensure a correct transmission of pressure, a correct ink transfer and a quality of printing without defects or dimensional variations.
CR2.6 The pressure between the printing cylinder and the engraved cylinder is regulated according to the nature of the printing support and the hardness of the printing cylinder.
CR2.7 The recorded cylinders, when printing is finished, are removed, removed, cleaned and stored taking into account the safety and preservation measures of the recorded cylinder.
CR2.8 The machine pressure group preparation operations are performed by applying the safety standards specified in the occupational risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
RP3: Prepare the inking group by mechanical or electronic means to control the ink flow in relation to the nature of the ink, printing needs, and technical specifications.
CR3.1 The ink rheology measurements are made with the specific measuring devices: ford cup, viscosimeter, thermometer and others representing the measurements in their corresponding values.
CR3.2 Adding correctors: attenuants, retarders, accelerants, and others are performed according to the printing needs.
CR3.3 The rheology of the ink is modified by the control of the dispensers, in a mechanical, electronic or computer form.
CR3.4 The inking elements: trays, diffusers, givers, blades and tintero, are regulated according to the nature of the ink, obtaining that the ink dosage responds to the conditions of transfer and demand of ink of the support.
CR3.5 The inking trays are placed at the optimum distance in relation to the diameter of the embossing cylinder, ensuring their parallelism for the correct inking of the same.
CR3 .6. The diffuser is positioned so as to guarantee the homogeneous distribution of the ink, allowing control of the inking.
CR3.7 The auxiliary elements: reservoir, pump, closed circuit for power and return, manual viscosimeter, ford cup, thermometer and viscosities control mechanism, are adjusted to the inking group, facilitating the feeding and control over the ink.
CR3.8 The blade is positioned at the optimum angle and pressure so as to allow the inking of the printer form and the cleaning of non-printable areas.
CR3.9 The inking group and auxiliary elements, once the printing is finished, are cleaned until they are free of ink so as not to affect the next pull.
CR3.10 The excess ink is stored in accordance with current waste disposal regulations.
RP4: Prepare the finishing devices to achieve a final impression according to the technical specifications.
CR4.1 The dispensing devices for finishing products are adjusted by ensuring the control and uniformity of the dosage in their application.
CR4.2 The mechanisms of the finishing devices are arranged according to the treatments to be applied in the final product.
CR4.3 The timing and levelling of the finishing devices are performed according to the printability of the support and the treatment to be applied according to the instructions on the work order.
RP5: Perform first-level maintenance of the machines and engraving equipment for proper operation by following the manufacturer's technical instructions and established working protocols.
CR5.1 The periodic grease of the points arranged in the machines and equipment of the engraving is carried out according to the instructions of the manufacturer and within the deadlines established by the same or following the protocols established by the company.
CR5.2 The operation of the circuits and filters of the hydraulic and pneumatic systems is verified according to the established maintenance standards and deadlines.
CR5.3 The components of the machinery and equipment of the engraving are cleaned according to the procedures defined in the maintenance plan and following the protocols established by the company.
CR5.4 The maintenance operations of the machine and engraving equipment are carried out by applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection and recording the data in the documents enabled.
CR5.5 The safety devices of the humoengraving machines are checked and maintained in accordance with the current risk prevention plan and following the protocols established by the company.
CR5.6 The deposit of the waste generated in the established zones is carried out in accordance with the plan of prevention and environmental protection established by the company.
Professional context:
Production media:
Print machines in a huecogravure. Finishing devices. Control pupitre. Normalized light pupitre. Densitometer. Thermometer. Viscosimeter. Colorimeter. Ford Cup. Tell them. Standardised samples. Letters of color. Waste containers. Personal protective equipment.
Products and results:
Tuning the mechanisms of the machine's step-and-exit power systems. Recorded cylinder settings. Levelling of the inking system. Correct position of the blade. Clean and safe machine. Preventive maintenance. Preparation of the finishing devices.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Authorised impressions and samples. Technical documentation of printing equipment and machines. Plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection. Quality standards and standards. Record of maintenance data. Safety record for handling inks and solvents.
COMPETITION UNIT 4: PERFORM THE PRINT ON HUECOGRAVURE
Level: 2
Code: UC1347_2
Professional realizations and evaluation criteria:
RP1: Get the first printed samples, performing printing groups start up and process coordination to check the print quality according to the characteristics specified in the work order.
CR1.1 The power of materials: media, inks, and others, is done in such a way as to avoid unnecessary interruptions or stops, checking the correspondence with the work order.
CR1.2 The coordination of the process and the work team is established, where appropriate, to ensure the quality and continuity of the print run.
CR1.3 The first forms are controlled in sufficient quantity according to the company's rules of procedure, to check the registration, correction of the tones and absence of defects.
CR1.4 The registration of the form corresponds to the parameters and margins established in the work order, ensuring the chromatic quality.
CR1.5 The color, in its tonality and intensity, corresponds to the parameters determined in the work order or with the authorized samples.
CR1.6 The control over the rheology and the drying of the ink, allows a controlled impression without alterations: color, intensity, tonality, cleanliness, transparency and brightness.
CR1.7 The physico-chemical resistance of the ink to the rub, to the light and to other chemical agents on the support corresponds to the technical instructions.
CR1.8 Print parameters: intensity, contrast, tone error, and others, respond to the required quality on the work order or authorized samples.
CR1.9 The values of the printing parameters are measured with the optical measuring equipment: densitometer, colorimeter, spectrophotometer, expressing them in their corresponding units.
CR1.10 The control is performed based on samples, patterns, normalized tables, and technical specifications.
CR1.11 The separation between the embossed cylinder and the pressure cylinder is adjusted by taking into account the printing support and the required pressure.
RP2: Modify the process variables to correct the characteristics based on the results of the first printed sheets.
CR2.1 The circumferential record of the print is corrected by overtaking or delaying the transfer point support through the manual, electronic or computer procedure that the machine has.
CR2.2 The axial registration of the printed form is corrected by moving the engraved cylinder on its axis or by the displacement of the support through the manual, electronic or computer procedure of the machine.
CR2.3 The tonal variation is reset, acting on the ink intensity, varying the pressure and positioning of the blade.
CR2.4 Print values: color, intensity, tonality, cleanliness, transparency, brightness, and others are modified by acting on ink, cylinder pressure, and blade positioning.
CR2.5 The penetration and transfer of the ink to the support are modified by varying the rheology of the ink and the pressures.
CR2.6 The correction and adjustment is made on the materials to be used, modifying the physical and/or chemical characteristics of the ink and the treatment of the support.
RP3: Get the printed product by monitoring the process during the run and coordinating your activity with the work team to ensure the productivity and quality established in the work order.
CR3.1 Quality control is performed according to the frequency established by the company and with the appropriate measurement elements, according to the instructions of the work order, guaranteeing the uniformity of the results throughout the circulation and recording these controls in the documents authorized by the company.
CR3.2 The stability of the record is maintained by controlling all the parameters that act during printing: speed, voltage and fixed of the printer form with periodic reviews to ensure the quality of the print run.
CR3.3 The intonation is maintained in the parameters set within the tolerance margins.
CR3.4 The drying of the ink on the support is checked by ensuring that it allows for immediate manipulation.
CR3.5 The work areas of your responsibility are maintained in cleanliness, order, and security conditions.
CR3.6 All operations are coordinated with the workgroup that operates on the print machine to ensure process continuity and the results set on the work order.
RP4: Meet production parts for confirmation of work done with incident, quality, and productivity data.
CR4.1 Record mismatches, support alterations, stains, splashes, tonal variations, and stops are collected in the production parts as incidents of self-control.
CR4.2 Production parts are completed by checking that the specified productivity matches the one obtained.
CR4.3 Quality parameters: densitometric values, intensity, order of colors in the print run, material behavior, number of copies and consumption of material used are controlled during the run and are collected in the production part.
CR4.4 The data on the spin is collected in the production parts, enabling its analysis in subsequent reprints.
Professional context:
Production media:
Print machines in a huecogravure. Print media: papers, plastics and others. Control desks. Normalized light pupitre. Densitometer. Colorimeter. Spectrophotometer. Tell them. Waste container. Personal protective equipment. Ford Cup.
Products and results:
Different printed products on paper, plastic and other media: packaging and packaging, books, magazines and others. Control of waste.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Part of production. Product Summary of Product Characteristics Quality sheet. Authorised impressions and samples. Technical documentation of printing equipment and machines. Plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection. Quality standards and standards. Production data record. Safety record for handling inks and solvents.
FORMATIVE MODULE 1: PROCESSES IN GRAPHIC ARTS
Level: 2
Code: MF0200_2
Associated with UC: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity
Duration: 120 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Analyze the entire graphical process and its different phases: preprint, print and post-pressure, considering the communication between them using standardization models.
CE1.1 Explain the characteristics and configuration of companies according to the production phase.
CE1.2 From a graphical product, describe through workflows the sequence of tasks or operations in a supposed production environment.
CE1.3 Analyze, from the design point of view, the characteristics of a given process:
Formats and measures.
Typology.
Colors.
Media.
Encuadernacion and Finishing.
CE1.4 From a given product, relate and sequence the different preprint phases that have been involved in its elaboration:
Text: body, family, style, paragraph, interline.
Frames: linearature, point shape, and angulation.
Separation of colors.
Plot and layout systems used.
CE1.5 From a given product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:
Type of media used.
Inks: classes and layers.
Tramado.
The character profile.
Footprint or relief on support.
Defects in printing.
Number of passes on machines.
CE1.6 Analyze the different preprint, printing and post-pressure systems, describing and relating their main phases to machines, equipment, raw materials and products.
CE1.7 Describe the most significant electronic printing systems.
C2: Classify graphic products according to their composition and functional characteristics: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.
CE2.1 Explain the characteristics of the different graphic products.
CE2.2 Analyze the structural characteristics of the different graphic products.
CE2.3 From a sample of graphic products:
Assess the communicative and functional capacity of different graphic products.
Analyze your physicochemical composition and identify your functional capacity.
C3: Recognize and analyze the parameters and measures of color used in graphic arts.
CE3.1 Describe the chromatic spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab.
CE3.2 Describe the measuring devices used in the colour: colorimeter, glinometer, spectrophotometer.
CE3.3 Describe the various lighting sources, color temperature, and observation conditions.
CE3.4 From color samples:
Identify color parameters: brightness, saturation, tone, and metamery index.
Represent colorimetric values in chromatic spaces.
Evaluate color differences and their ability to play in the graphical system.
CE3.5 Handle the tools and measuring instruments: hygrometer, thermometer, conductmeter, precision scales, densimeter, viscosimeter and microscope, to obtain the values of humidity, temperature, conductivity, density, dimension variations of supports, materials and raw materials.
CE3.6 Describe the measuring devices used in colour: colorimeter, glinometer and spectrophotometer.
C4: Relate the safety, hygiene and environmental standards with the operations that are developed in the graphical process complying with the established regulations.
CE4.1 Describe and relate the rules regarding safety, hygiene and the environment, with the different phases of the process.
CE4.2 Identify the security elements installed in the different places and risk teams.
CE4.3 Using practical examples, identify the security labels that appear on the machines and products used in the graphical process.
CE4.4 Recognize the environmental documents and procedures applied in the graphical process.
C5: Analyze the process of quality control in a "type process" of graphic arts.
CE5.1 Describe the fundamental phases and concepts of quality control in manufacturing.
CE5.2 Describe a receive control process succinct.
CE5.3 Describe the instruments used in quality control: densitometres, colorimeters, control strips and production line control devices.
CE5.4 From a preprint test and considering printing standards:
Perform the densitometric and colorimetric measurements.
Assess that the reproduction of the color range conforms to the set standards.
CE5.5 From a printed product, and taking into account standards:
Select the measuring instrument.
Perform the calibration of the measuring instrument.
Perform densitometric, colorimetric, trapping, sliding, and gray balance measurements.
Chromatic space.
Take action on the control strip.
Check the setting with the set standards.
CE5.6 From a product to be bound and/or manipulate, identify and evaluate defects detected in:
Format and margins.
Cutting marks.
Signals of record.
Signatures.
Fibre Sense.
Repainted.
Troquels.
CE5.7 Describe the most significant quality features of the products:
Framing and manipulated: subjective assessment, cut marks, footprints, signs of registration, gluing.
Resistance to folding.
Resistance to rub.
Printing: density, trapping, stamping gain, color balance, pasting, sliding, recording.
Preprint: tests, standards.
CE5.8 Check the final status of the form and relate it to the specifications of the manipulated.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.5; C4 with respect to CE4.2; C5 with respect to CE5.3
Other capabilities:
Recognize the organization's productive process
Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to your activity
Respect internal company procedures and rules
Contents
1. Graphical process
Types of graphic products.
Company types: organization and structure.
Standardization and communication models. Workflows
Preprint Systems. Classes of originals. Digitalisation. Treatment of images and filming processes.
Input peripherals, output peripherals, specific software and hardware, processing and test systems.
Plotting and mounting. Elements of the assembly. Specific software.
Print systems. Equipment, performance, comparison of different systems.
Types of inks and supports for each printing system.
Encuaderation. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.
Paper and paperboard manipulated. Manipulated from other materials.
2. Colour and its measurement
Nature of light.
Electromagnetic spectrum.
Philosophy of vision.
Chromatic space.
Factors that affect color perception.
Color Theory. Additive and subtractive synthesis of the color.
Color rendering systems: Munsell, RGB, HSL, HSV, Pantone, CIE, CIE-Lab, GATF.
Color measurement instruments: densitometres, colorimeters, glinometers, and spectrophotometers. Colour assessment.
Color Management. Color profiles.
3. Safety, hygiene and the environment
Safety plans and regulations.
Rules in force.
Signals and alarms.
Environmental regulations.
4. Quality in processes
More characteristic tests, instruments and measurements.
Preprint quality: point gain, gray balance, and density.
Print variables: Print density, contrast, penetration, fixed, stamping gain, color balance, and gray.
Strips of control in printing. Measurement.
Quality in post-pressure.
Visual control of binding and manipulated.
Checking for bound and manipulated defects.
5. Quality Control
Quality in manufacturing.
Quality control. Concepts involved.
Control elements.
Phases of control: receipt of materials, processes and products.
ISO and UNE rules.
Standards and standards published by the AENOR committee 54 relating to the graphical process.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
-Multi-purpose 2 m2/pupil.
-60 m Trial Lab2
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to processes in graphic arts, which will be accredited by one of the following ways:
Academic training of Licentiated or Engineer or others of equal level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 2: MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS IN PRINT
Level: 2
Code: MF0201_2
Associated with UC: Preparing raw materials and intermediate products for printing
Duration: 120 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Recognize and analyze the main properties and characteristics of the raw materials used in printing processes.
CE1.1 Recognize and describe the type and structure of papers, cartons, plastics, metals and other media for printing.
CE1.2 Recognize and describe the main characteristics and physical-chemical properties of the supports, expressing them in their corresponding units.
CE1.3 Recognize and describe the main characteristics and physical-chemical properties of inks, pigments, dyes, resins, oils, varnishes and solvents, expressing them in their corresponding units.
CE1.4 Recognize and describe the main physical-chemical characteristics of the printing forms.
CE1.5 Characterize the main defects and alterations of the different media used for printing.
CE1.6 From media samples, inks and printer shapes, identify by your trade name the main materials used for printing.
C2: Analyze the behavior of the main materials (products, inks, varnishes, plates and supports) used in the printing system, binding and manipulated, related to its application.
CE2.1 Describe the main pigments, resins, oils, varnishes and solvents related to the inks.
CE2.2 Describe the main materials and chemical products related to the printer form.
CE2.3 Relate the various materials with the printing, binding or manipulated mode used and the number of copies of the print run.
CE2.4 Relating the properties of materials with the requirements of behavior in printing.
C3: Evaluate the characteristics of the quality variables of the raw materials, using appropriate instruments.
CE3.1 Relate the durability and behavior of the different supports in the printing with the alterations that this suffers because of: humidity and temperature, storage, the direction of the fiber and the composition of the paste.
CE3.2 Relate the durability and behavior of the inks and chemicals used in printing with the alterations that these suffer, due to the temperature, humidity, oxidation, exposure to light and its composition.
CE3.3 To differentiate the characteristics and functioning of the measuring instruments used for the quality control of raw materials.
CE3.4 From a practical case of an essay: Handle the tools and measuring instruments (gyrometer, thermometer, balance of precision, viscosimeter, microscope, IGT), to obtain the values of humidity, pressure, density, variations of dimension of supports, materials and raw materials, expressing correctly the results of the measurements.
CE3.5 From a practical assumption, duly characterized by quality standards, determine the appropriate materials for the production.
C4: Analyze the storage process of materials used in Graphic Arts.
CE4.1 Explain the characteristic storage systems of the Graphic Arts companies.
CE4.2 Explain the characteristics of equipment and means of loading, transport and unloading of materials used, related to their applications.
CE4.3 Relate the materials with the procedures and conditions that your storage requires.
C5: Prepare raw materials, according to technical specifications and in accordance with current safety and hygiene regulations.
CE5.1 Check that the raw materials to be treated match those indicated in the work order specifications.
CE5.2 Describe the components and dilutions to be used in the preparation of chemical products for printing.
CE5.3 Perform the mixtures and conditioning of the raw materials, according to the established parameters, respecting the safety and hygiene standards.
CE5.4 Check that the preparation of the materials is adapted to the expected results.
CE5.5 Relate the materials used in Graphic Arts, with the environmental regulations, considering the substitutes for the products traditionally used.
CE5.6 Identify the risks and level of danger posed by the manipulation of different materials and products used in Graphic Arts.
C6: Analyze and evaluate safety and hygiene plans and the corresponding regulations in place to correctly use media and safety equipment in the transport and handling of raw materials for printing.
CE6.1 Relate and describe the rules on symbology and physical situation of signals and alarms, fire equipment, transport safety and handling of raw materials.
CE6.2 Describe the properties and uses of clothing and personal protective equipment plus employees in the graphic industry for the transport and handling of raw materials.
CE6.3 From a certain number of security and business plans in the printing industry:
Identify and describe the most relevant aspects of each plan, collected in the documentation that contains it.
Identify and describe risk factors and situations for health and safety in the plans.
Relate and describe the appropriate preventive measures and prevention methods established to prevent accidents.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C3 with respect to CE3.5; C6 with respect to CE6.3.
Contents:
1. Print media
Physical-chemical structure of the composition of papers, cartons, cardboard. Vegetable materials, plastics, metals.
Classification, identification and trade names, formats and applications.
More important properties of print media as raw material.
Measurement of grammar, roughness, relative humidity, dimensional stability, hardness and flexibility.
Pasta classes for the stucate of the paper holders: paper, cardboard, cardboard.
Identification of defects in media.
Printability of the different media.
Conditioning.
Preparation and applications.
2. Inks
Physical-chemical composition of the inks.
Types of inks. Properties.
Colorimetric measurement, viscosity, density, rigidity, transparency, tolerance between inks and emulsification capacity with water.
Classification by print mode.
Identification, applications, and trade names.
Mixture of inks (Pantone). Preparation and applications.
Identification of defects. Mechanical resistors and different agents (light, water, fats, acids, alkalis and soaps).
3. Printer form and photographic films
Microscopic structure. Classes of emulsions.
Types of photographic films.
Chemicals.
Classification, identification, applications, formats and trade names.
Processed of sensitive materials.
More important properties of the forms used in printing: resistance to the spin, surface tension.
Different printer shapes according to print mode.
Preparation and mixing of products for processing.
4. Complementary materials
Barnices.
Lacas.
Adhesives.
Plastics.
Printing films.
Conditioning and preparation.
5. Transport, Packaging, Storage
Transport of materials from factory to printer.
Transport and packaging problems for media.
Storage conditions. Temperature, humidity.
Influence of storage in the print run.
6. Quality control of raw materials
Control process: on the materials (supports and inks), viscosity control, drying times, resistance to the rub and scratches of varnishes and lacquers.
Quality regulations. Commercial qualities.
Teams and instruments.
Inspection and reception procedures.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of 2 m2/pupil.
60 m trial lab2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the raw materials used in printing that will be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Technical Engineer and others of higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 3: PREPARING TO PRINT IN HUECOGRAVURE
Level: 2
Code: MF1346_2
Associated to UC: Adjust the elements of the print process in a huecogravure
Duration: 120 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Prepare and adjust the different systems for feeding, passing and leaving the engraving machines, by means of mechanical or electronic operations, according to the characteristics of the print media used.
CE1.1 Recognize the mechanisms of entry, step and exit by their structure and positioning in the machine relating them to the function they perform.
CE1.2 Describe the differences in the operation and regulation of the systems for feeding and passing through the systems of the huecogravure machines, pneumatic apparatus, marker apparatus, transmission systems, voltage equipment, tensioning rollers, pressure rollers, stacker, winder and others.
CE1.3 Identify and explain the use of the handlers, mechanical or electronic, that allow to adjust the elements that form the equipment: power, transmission and output.
CE1.4 In a practical case of preparation of the mechanisms for the entry, passage and exit of properly characterized huecogravure machines:
Adjust the mechanical and/or electronic elements and mechanisms of the power system based on the size and type of support.
Adjust the mechanical and/or electronic mechanisms of the support step, ensuring the continuity, tension and control of the support to be printed.
Adjust the mechanical and/or electronic mechanisms of the output system, ensuring their operation and synchronization between them.
Point out and perform all operations in safety and environmental protection conditions.
CE1.5 From a practical assumption, properly characterized and raised such incidents as band breakage, lack of tension, axial slide, wrinkled, torn:
Identify the reasons and causes that cause it.
Propose the necessary adjustments or maneuvers in the mechanical and/or electronic mechanisms of feeding, passing and leaving for correction.
C2: Perform the assembly of blades operating on the handlers that allow their installation, set and control of maneuver in safety conditions.
CE2.1 Describe the fixing mechanisms of the blade and counter in the corresponding carrier.
CE2.2 Relate the type and edge of the blade with its influence on the engraved cylinder: cleaning, penetration, wear.
CE2.3 Relate the blade edge and its contact angle with the white cleaning of the engraved cylinder.
CE2.4 Relate the distance between the recorded bucket-cylinder contact zone and the ink transfer point to the support with the inking and transmission of the ink to the support.
CE2.5 In a practical case of blade mounting in a properly characterized inking group:
Select the blade with the appropriate edge for the supposed printing as well as its corresponding counter.
Perform the mounting on the door carrier, ensuring uniform pressure and parallelism between the two.
Adjust the position of the blade and counter to the contact zone and the ink transfer point to the support.
C3: Perform preparation and tuning operations of the tintero and complementary elements, valuing the needs of the product to be printed.
CE3.1 Describe the mechanisms and elements of the tuning of the tinteres and complementary elements of the huecograving machines.
CE3.2 Identify the complementary elements of the tinteres in enrogravure machines: tank, circuit, pump, automatic viscosimeter, thermometer, coolers, metering devices and others.
CE3.3 Relate the different types of tray and their positioning with the diameter of the engraved cylinder.
CE3.4 In a practical case of preparation and setting up of the tintero and complementary elements of properly characterised huecogravure machines:
Perform pump tank filling maneuvers, with caution to avoid splashing and creating foam.
Conditioning the closed circuit of ink according to needs of inking and ink type.
Place the feeding tube from the pump to the tintero and the return tube from the tintero to the pump tank, with as little distance as possible and ensuring the absence of folds that hinder the flow of the ink.
Maneuver with the ink pump by adjusting the flow rate to the needs of the inking, controlling the absence of losses in the circuit, ensuring the flow control and preventing the decanting of ink pigments.
C4: Prepare the different inking systems of the printer form by relating and valuing their differences, advantages and disadvantages.
CE4.1 Identify the different inking systems of the printer form, relating them to the inking mode and type of inks, according to needs and printing characteristics.
CE4.2 Relating the common and specific elements of the different inking systems: tintero, trays, reservoir, pump, circuits, heaters, viscosimeter, thermometer, dador and others.
CE4.3 In a practical case of eninking the engraved cylinder properly characterized:
Perform the eninking of the engraving cylinder.
Determine the level of ink in the tintero and refill it by preventing it from reaching the axis of the cylinder, reasoning the causes.
Adjusting the tools and protection elements of the inking body (anti-evaporation and splashing)
CE4.4 In a practical case of eninking of the engraved cylinder properly characterized:
Perform the inking of the printer form by diffuser and inking tray.
Check the status and operation of the diffuser's inner tray.
Scale the height of the tinter/tinter/pan, ensuring its parallelism with the engraved cylinder.
Position the diffuser relative to the cylinder, allowing the ink to slide over the surface of the tray by matching the wet and preventing the ink drying in the alveoli.
Adjust the tools and elements of splatter protection and anti-evaporation of the inking body.
CE4.5 In a practical case of eninking the engraved cylinder properly characterized:
Perform the inking of the printer form by rolling roller.
Check the nature and status of the wetter's coating.
Ensure parallelism with the engraved cylinder.
Adjust the pressure of the wetter against the engraved cylinder, depending on the type of ink and engraving.
Adjust the ink level in the tintero without exceeding the wheel of the wetter.
Adjust the tools and elements of splatter protection and anti-evaporation of the inking body.
C5: Prepare and fix the recorded cylinders and pressure cylinders in the printing body by assessing their correct condition.
CE5.1 Describe the placement and fixed mechanisms of the engraved cylinder in the printing body.
CE5.2 Identify and assess the state of the mechanisms and fixed elements of the recorded cylinders: axes, supports and assembly cones, cleaning and lubricating them, if necessary.
CE5.3 Classify the different pressure rollers by their nature, hardness and dimensions, in relation to the ink, engraving and support to be printed and the efficiency to obtain the total transmission of the ink from the engraving to the support.
CE5.4 In a practical case of preparing and fixing the recorded cylinders and from a work order properly characterized:
Fit the axes into the recorded cylinders, using manual or pneumatic processes.
Perform the test of the development of each cylinder with the appropriate measuring devices and devices, checking their correspondence with the technical specifications.
Check the absence of defects on the surface of the recorded cylinders: hits, scratches, wear and other, which may affect the print quality.
Check the absence of eccentricity on the recorded cylinders: gauge, arc, pointer.
Thoroughly clean the alveoli of the cylinders, ensuring the absence of dry ink or foreign bodies inside, using suitable tools to avoid possible scratches.
Visually check on each cylinder that the positioning of the graphics, control strips and record crosses corresponds to the work order.
Take data from the measurements of the cylinders, verifying that the scale between them is correct and corresponds to the technical specifications.
Attach the recorded cylinders to the printer body by performing precise manoeuvres that prevent damage or damage to the surface.
Position the cylinders so that the log crosses can be synchronized.
CE5.5 In a practical case properly characterized and having the cylinders recorded and pressure correctly placed on the machine:
Maneuvering with different pressures between the engraving cylinder and the pressure cylinder, with different inks and supports, valuing the results of printing and support behavior, relating them to each other.
Determine the minimum pressure required and adjust the pressure roller so that it ensures an appropriate input and output angle to the type of support and characteristics of the ink and engraving.
CE5.6 Perform pressure tests with different rollers by defining:
The relationship between flexibility, hardness and pressure, achieving a uniform pressure point between the pressure cylinder, support and engraving cylinder.
Identify values and relate them to print needs.
Classify the rollers by their nature, hardness and dimensions.
C6: Prepare and adjust the different registration systems of the huecogravure machines according to the characteristics of the print media used.
CE6.1 Identify all elements that act on the axial and circumferential record and describe their mode of operation.
CE6.2 Perform adjustment operations on the elements that allow variation and control over the stability of the register: heels, tensioners, micrometers, barniers, photoelectric cells, television cameras and others.
CE6.3 In a properly characterized and real print run case:
Perform circumferential registration maneuvers by acting on the belt tensioners, relating their variation to the result obtained.
Perform axial registration maneuvers, acting on the support and displacement of the recorded cylinder, valuing its variation with the result obtained.
Perform maneuvers on the stress of the support, valuing its influence on the record.
C7: Perform finishing device preparation operations on enrogravure machines according to product completion needs.
CE7.1 Describe the various online finishes that can be done on a huecogravure printing machine.
CE7.2 Relate the different possible finishes of the product in a huecogravure machine with the materials and equipment necessary for its realization.
CE7.3 Value the technical possibility of making the various finishes on different print media.
CE7.4 In a practical case properly characterized and based on the information of a given work order:
Prepare the materials and/or devices involved in the various finishing operations.
Prepare the devices and perform the adjustment operations required to achieve the product finish as per the given indications.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the adjustment and preparation of finishing devices on enrogravure machines.
C8: Apply the first level maintenance described in the manual of a huecogravure machine, ensuring the correct operation of the system.
CE8.1 Identify all the points of the machines that require cleaning and ordinary grease.
CE8.2 Interpret in the maintenance book of a machine all points of grease by its shape, indicative color and positioning in the machine, relating them to the type of lubricant and periodicity of maintenance.
CE8.3 Acknowledge in the maintenance book of a huecograving machine the method of maintenance and the periodicity of all the auxiliary mechanisms: tires, hydraulic, filters and others.
CE8.4 Relating the cleaning additive products with the elements on which they act useful and self-protection materials in their applications.
CE8.5 In a properly characterized case:
Relate the security elements of a huecogravure machine to its position, function, and part of the operation of the machine on which it operates: emergency stop buttons, security grids, housings, and others.
Act on security elements by checking their proper operation and verifying that the expected responses occur: emergency stop, machine immobilization, or other.
CE8.6 In a practical scenario, properly characterized in the maintenance of a huecogravure machine and given a plan of prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection:
Identify the risks and level of danger posed by the handling of materials, products and equipment used in the handling and maintenance operations of the engraving machines.
Identify the rules of action that appear in the plan related to maintenance operations, as well as the individual protective equipment to be used.
Recognize the protocols of action in relation to the treatment of the waste produced during the first level maintenance.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.4 and CE1.5; C2 with respect to CE2.5; C3 with respect to CE3.4; C4 with respect to CE4.3, CE4.4 and CE4.5; C5 with respect to CE5.4, CE5.5 and CE5.6; C6 with respect to CE6.3; C7 with respect to CE7.4; C8 with respect to CE8.5 and CE8.6.
Other capabilities:
Take responsibility for the work you develop.
Finish the job within the set deadlines.
Propose alternatives in order to improve the results.
Demonstrate some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.
Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.
Contents:
1. Preparation of the feeding, passing and leaving bodies of the enrogravure machines
Mechanical handlers for use. Features and usage.
Electronic control Pupipres. Parts and handling.
Preparing and adjusting the power.
Preparing and adjusting the transmission.
Preparing and adjusting the output.
Element throttling problems. Solutions.
2. Preparation of the pressure body in a huecogravure machine
Regulation of the pressure group. Development and pressure of cylinders.
Stations. Elements that compose it
Cylinders written, types of engravings.
Preparation, fixation, regulation, treatment and corrections in the engraved cylinder.
Pressure roller preparation and fixation: nature, size, assembly, treatment.
The axial and circumferential record of the rollers.
3. Preparation of the inking systems in a huecogravure machine
Inking systems. Regulation of the inking elements.
Preparing the inking elements: tintero, tray, reservoir, pump, circuits, and others.
Adapting inks to printing needs.
Characteristics of the blades: type and edge.
Position and correct adjustment of the blades.
4. First-level maintenance on humecogravure printing machines
Technical instructions for maintenance.
Cleaning the machine.
Security elements of the different machine bodies.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to maintenance operations.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
-Multi-purpose Aula of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
-60 m trial lab2.
-150 m print workshop2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the adjustment of the elements of the process of printing in a huecogravure, which will be credited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Superior Technician or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 4: PRINTING OF PRODUCTS IN HUECOGRAVURE
Level: 2
Code: MF1347_2
Associated with UC: Perform the print on a humecogravure
Duration: 90 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Perform start-up operations on machines and printing equipment on the etching to obtain the first printed samples.
CE1.1 Describe the starting operations of the printing groups: support power, stop, inking, pressure and drying application.
CE1.2 Explain the parameters to be controlled during the start up of the printing groups: machine speed, timing of the elements, operation of the closed ink circuits, temperature of the drying elements and others.
CE1.3 Relate the power, strike, and drying handlers with the functions they perform.
CE1.4 From a practical case of start-up operations, duly characterized by a work order:
Determine the flow of the ink according to the needs of the inking.
Adjust the pressure of the blades in relation to the angle of incidence and needs of the ink.
Adjust the pressure cylinder pressure relative to the etching, support, and ut6ized ink.
Control the synchronization of the elements involved in the startup.
Get the first printed samples for your assessment of the instructions received or sample and take corrective action that results from this.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the performance of the printing on the etching.
C2: Perform the printing on the etching, keeping the process variables within tolerances established by the control and adjustment of the required parameters.
CE2.1 Describe the printing system's own defects and those relating to registration, color, and intonation.
CE2.2 Describe the elements of the process that require coordination by the team operating on the printing machines in the engraving.
CE2.3 Relate the machines and raw materials with the print speed of the print run, according to the parameters of the printed form: support, viscosity of the ink, density, contrast of printing, trapping, drying, diluent, retardant and accelerant.
CE2.4 Relate the characteristic defects in the form, caused by the step of the machine support: repainted, scratched, scratched and water.
CE2.5 In a properly characterized case:
Relate the causes and effects of the readjustment of the parameters of the form, by manually or by means of computerized equipment, the mechanical elements of the recording, the viscosity of the ink, the drying, the pressures and regulations of the system of feeding, transport and output.
Relate the print order of the appropriate engraved cylinder colors and diameter according to the type of work.
Compare the print to the original and the preprint test, readjusting the printing parameters: pressure, intonation, viscosity, drying, recording, or others to bring the results closer to the tests.
Define the required coordination in the printing process.
Get the print with the required quality.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the performance of the printing on the etching.
C3: Perform measurements on the quality variables of the printed product in the engraving, relating them to the printing processes, using the appropriate instruments.
CE3.1 Differentiate and describe the characteristics and functioning of the measuring instruments used for the quality control of the engraving.
CE3.2 From a practical assumption of printing of a properly characterized huecogravure product, describe the method and frequency of obtaining printed samples during the specified spin.
CE3.3 From a practical case of printing a product in duly characterized huecogravure, perform during the run the measurement of various parameters such as viscosity, drying, intonation, density, printing contrast, trapping, tone error, gray content, resistance to the rub, resistance to light, printability of the support and registration, using the appropriate instruments and expressing the result of the measurement in the units and appropriate form.
CE3.4 In a duly characterized case, performing ink viscosity conditioning maneuvers and drying time in relation to the type of engraving, support, pressure and printing speed, using the diluent, retarder and accelerant suitable to the nature of the ink.
CE3.5 From a practical case of measurement during the printing process:
Relate the different elements involved in a control strip with the deviation of the required quality parameters.
Identify and describe defects that need to be controlled during the run and, if applicable, represent the values in a chart.
Relate the resulting graphs of measurements: viscosity, drying, color intensity, print contrast, trapping, tone error, gray content, record, rub resistance, light resistance, support printability, and others, with the parameters set to the assumption.
Identify the control devices to be used.
Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.1; C2 with respect to CE2.2. CE2.3 and EC 2.4; C3 with respect to CE3.3, CE3.4 and CE3.5.
Other capabilities:
Take responsibility for the work you develop.
Comply with the correct production rules.
Finish the job within the set deadlines.
Propose alternatives in order to improve the results.
Demonstrate some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.
Recognize the organization's productive process.
Interpret and execute work instructions.
Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.
Respect the company's internal rules and procedures.
Contents:
1. Start-up operations of humour-gravure machines
Start up of the media feed, stop, inking, apply pressure and drying.
Control of the machine speed and synchronization of the elements.
Adjustments in the start-up of closed ink circuits, temperature of the drying elements and others.
2. The printing of the printed in the holoengraving
Manual, electronic or computer readjustment of the dosage elements.
Review of the form. Readjustment of the parameters of the form: inking, transfer of ink and recording of the image on the medium.
The speed of the machine. Relationship between raw materials and speed.
Defects in the huecogravure printing. Causes and corrections.
Printing and color of the print. Print sequence. Colour mixture. Check the form with preprint tests.
Viscosity conditioning and ink drying.
3. Quality control during the run of the huecogravure
Quality standards for the paper on a huecogravure.
Programs and equipment for the quality control of the engraving form.
Elements for control: control strips, side witness, patches.
Quality control procedures of the printout: record, mass density, tonal value, print contrast, trapping, tone error, gray content.
Control of the finished form.
Ink behavior on the media.
Media's printable conditions.
Guidelines for the inspection of the form. Sampling. Reliability. Measurement.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
-Multi-purpose Aula of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
-60 m trial lab2.
-150 m print workshop2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the performance of the printout in the engraving, which will be credited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Superior Technician or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
ANNEX CDXIX
PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: PRINTING IN SERIOGRAPHY AND TAMPOGRAPHY
Professional Family: Graphic Arts
Level: 2
Code: ARG419_2
General competition:
Make the printing of the screen printing and tambourgraphy procedures, making the preparation of the printing forms, adjusting the elements of the printing process and the necessary raw materials, according to the productivity and quality established and intervening in the graphic process, applying the plan of prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
Competition Units:
UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity conditions.
UC0201_2: Prepare raw materials and intermediate products for printing.
UC1348_2: Make printing in screen printing.
UC1349_1: Make printing in tampography.
Professional environment:
Professional scope:
Develops its professional activity in the graphic industry, in the printing area. In small, medium or large enterprises, with very different organizational/technological levels. She is integrated into a work team where she develops individual and group tasks on screen printing and tampography. In general it will depend organically on an intermediate command. The work is carried out on its own or with others.
Productive Sectors:
Sector of graphic arts, constituting its own subsector of printing, and any other sector in which prints or prints are made in screen printing and/or tampography on different supports.
Relevant Occupations and Jobs:
Serigrafia printer machine operator.
Tampography printer machine operator.
Screen Printing Printer.
Typography Printer.
screen printing technician.
Tampographic print technician.
Associated training: (450 hours)
Training Modules
MF0200_2: Processes in graphic arts. (120 hours)
MF0201_2: Materials and products in print. (120 hours)
MF1348_2: Printing of products in screen printing. (150 hours)
MF1349_1: Printing products in tampography. (60 hours)
COMPETITION UNIT 1: OPERATING IN THE GRAPHICAL PROCESS UNDER SECURITY, QUALITY, AND PRODUCTIVITY
Level: 2
Code: UC0200_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Check and follow the graphical process as a whole through workflows and in its different phases: preprint, print and post-pressure, through standardization and communication, to achieve quality and productivity, in accordance with established specifications.
CR1.1 Graphic process tracking is done through workflows to facilitate planning, automation, procedures, and other factors that affect the production environment.
CR1.2 By standardizing and communicating the work phases, a final result of the most effective process is achieved.
CR1.3 The different phases of the graphical process are analyzed with specification of their elements, applying the employment and sequentiality of each of them.
CR1.4 The parameters and preprint elements chosen are checked, according to technical specifications.
CR1.5 The printing system is in accordance with the support used and the product to be obtained.
CR1.6 The finish is applied according to the support used, process followed and usage needs, according to the technical specifications.
CR1.7 The observed anomalies are collected to take the necessary preventive and corrective measures.
CR1.8 The graphical process, in all its phases, is performed taking into account and applying safety, hygiene and environmental regulations.
RP2: Apply quality control methods in the graphic arts process to achieve the specified product, following existing standards and standards.
CR2.1 The graphical product is realized taking into account the fundamental concepts of quality in the different phases of its manufacture.
CR2.2 The most significant quality features in each of the phases of the process are identified by variables and attributes.
CR2.3 Quality control is done methodically, using the appropriate control elements for each feature.
CR2.4 Quality criteria are applied based on established quality and tolerance levels.
CR2.5 Control frequencies are applied according to the type of characteristics to be controlled and the number of product units to be obtained.
CR2.6 Quality control results and incidences are collected in the corresponding control sheets.
CR2.7 The desired colors and tones are obtained according to the parameters and color measurements.
CR2.8 The measuring devices are used according to the specific needs of the required values.
CR2.9 The image transfer is analyzed according to the point variation and the contrast.
RP3: Determine the characteristics of the graphical products to establish the appropriate manufacturing process, taking into account the available elements and applicable regulations.
CR3.1 Graphic products are identified according to their functional and communicative characteristics.
CR3.2 The functional and technological relationships of graphic products are set according to their component elements.
CR3.3 Graphic products are defined according to originals, sketches, and models.
CR3.4 Graphic products respond to established technical specifications.
CR3.5 Graphic products enable you to maintain competitive conditions for your business.
CR3.6 The physico-chemical characteristics of the graphic products take into account environmental and safety and hygiene regulations in the workplace.
Professional context:
Production media:
Computer equipment. Laser printer. Standards of communication. Workflows. Normalized light pupitre. Measurement and control tools and tools: densitometer, tipometer, odometer, colorimeter, spectrometer.
Products and results:
Incidents of quality control. Control sheets. Identification of defects or defects in processes.
Information used or generated:
Production order. Technical documentation of preprint, printing and post-pressure equipment and machines. Safety, hygiene and environmental regulations. Quality standards and standards. Samples authorised. Technical sheets. Maintenance manuals. Control plans.
COMPETITION UNIT 2: PREPARE RAW MATERIALS AND INTERMEDIATE PRODUCTS FOR PRINTING
Level: 2
Code: UC0201_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Interpret production orders for work schedule with quality and productivity criteria.
CR1.1 Production orders are checked to contrast with the necessary technical information regarding quality and productivity.
CR1.2 Production orders are verified to ensure consistency with process elements: machine, materials, and methods.
RP2: Review the printer form to ensure its quality in the transfer.
CR2.1 The printer form is checked to ensure the adequacy of its surface in terms of the specified positioning, tracing, and measurements.
CR2.2 The printer form is inspected to correct any defects that may alter the surface transfer.
RP3: Prepare and control the media to be printed to feed the printing machine in a way that ensures the continuity of the print run.
CR3.1 The quantity and quality of the print media are verified to ensure compliance with the production order.
CR3.2 The print media is transported from the warehouse to the machine in accordance with the established security rules.
CR3.3 The print media is manipulated and treated according to the working methods established to secure your input and pass through the machine.
RP4: Prepare the inks and additives in standard tones and special colors according to the specifications, samples and supports to be printed.
CR4.1 The ink is chosen taking into account the printing process, the machine, the type of support and the finish.
CR4.2 The physico-chemical properties of printing inks (viscosity, draught, rigidity) are adapted to the production needs, by means of appropriate operations (smoothie, addition of reducers, varnishes or oils).
CR4.3 The appropriate tones are obtained by mixing the inks according to the specifications indicated and carrying out checks with the "pantone" or color tables.
Professional context:
Production media:
Computer equipment. Sheet reader. Normalized light pupitre. Densitometer. Colorimeter, tell them.
Products and results:
Print media, printer shape, and inks.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Technical documentation of printing equipment and machines. Letters of color. Safety, Hygiene and Environmental regulations. Quality Standards.
COMPETITION UNIT 3: PERFORM PRINTING ON SERIGRAPHIC
Level: 2
Code: UC1348_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Perform surface treatments, such as thermal, corona and application of corrective varnishes, on the supports to be printed to ensure the anchoring of the ink and the stability of the materials by adjusting the devices to the production needs.
CR1.1 The work order is interpreted by identifying the materials to be printed as well as their characteristics and the treatments to be submitted to them.
CR1.2 Thermal sources, electronic equipment, barnizers and other devices are selected on the basis of the type of treatment to which the supports will be subjected, according to the instructions given in the work order.
CR1.3 The selected surface treatment equipment is adapted to suit the physical and morphological needs of the support, the nature of the ink and the drying system.
CR1.4 Thermal treatments are applied on the materials by adjusting the band's temperature and speed and matching the values to the actual production, verifying that a printable surface is obtained.
CR1.5 The corona treatment is applied according to technical instructions that appear on the work order, verifying that a printable surface is obtained.
CR1.6 The application of corrective varnishes on the surface of the material to be printed is performed according to the specifications of the work order and the characteristics of the material to be applied using the most appropriate method: injection plotter, airbrush, rollers or others.
CR1.7 All treatments are performed by applying the safety standards specified in the occupational risk prevention and environmental protection plan.
RP2: Prepare the feeding, printing and output mechanisms of the screen printing machine, taking into account the instructions of the work order and the materials to be used, to allow the correct feeding and output of the support and to facilitate the adjustment of inking and subsequent registration.
CR2.1 The technical instructions that appear on the work order, such as printing support, ink type, number of colors, total copies, drying instructions, quality control parameters, and others are interpreted by verifying the consistency with the materials supplied and checking the screen and other delivered materials.
CR2.2 Power system elements and mechanisms such as pneumatic group, power head, transport elements, record stops, and others are verified and adapted to the needs of the support to be printed and its physical characteristics.
CR2.3 The screen fixing jaws are adjusted according to the physical characteristics and the nature of the frame of the screen to be fixed on the machine.
CR2.4 The screen setting is performed based on the start of the printing, according to the technical needs of the graphics and the printing support through the handles that act on the jaws to ensure the immobility of the screen during the registration and the spin.
CR2.5 The micrometric recording adjustment screws are averaged, both horizontally and lengthwise, leaving them at the "zero" point so as to allow maximum travel in both directions.
CR2.6 The height and parallelism of the screen in relation to the printing board is adjusted by means of the machine's own resources: manuals, electronics, or others, taking into account the support to be printed and the out of contact required according to the technical characteristics of the printing, typology and tension of the mesh.
CR2.7 The scratch, and the counter-drag in its case, are selected for their size, hardness, height, thickness and edge according to the printing surface, characteristics of the mesh, typology of the graphics, density of the ink and of the materials on which the printing is carried out: papers, textiles, irregular objects or others.
CR2.8 The status of scratch is checked by observing the correct horizontality of the edge, the absence of pores, scratches or notches on the face affecting the ink transmission.
CR2.9 The drying systems: hot air, infrared, ultraviolet or others are prepared by adjusting the temperature, the exposure time, the speed of the band, the distance to the element or other parameters taking into account the characteristics of the inks, the printing and the material to be printed by valuing the obtained results.
CR2.10 The output devices and the stacking equipment are selected and prepared according to the morphology of the final product and according to the instructions of the work order as well as the established safety standards for each case.
RP3: Adjust the inking and ink transmission according to the printing needs to ensure the coverage of the graphics and ink transfer that allows for quality printing, according to technical instructions or authorized samples.
CR3.1 The pressure, angle and path of the scratch are adjusted according to the size of the graphics, the amount of ink to be transferred and the penetration needs in the support.
CR3.2 The countertop or entinter is adjusted in its vertical displacement on each stroke so as to allow the inking of the printer form.
CR3.3 The tailstock is adjusted by mounting parallel to the scratch and to the optimum distance that allows the ink flow between the two elements.
CR3.4 The synchronised movement between the scratch and the counter is checked on the screen, clean and without application of ink, verifying the functionality of the movement and the contact with the mesh.
CR3.5 The ink is deposited on the screen, extending it in parallel to the scratch and so that it covers the whole of the graphics to be printed.
CR3.6 The ink and ink transmission elements are put into operation by verifying that the entire surface of the graffiti is covered in the inking path and the scratch is achieved in the receding of the ink.
RP4: Get the first printed samples by preregistering the image on the media to print to assess the results of the printing and perform the corrective measures according to the results obtained and the specifications of the work order.
CR4.1 The first printed samples are controlled in sufficient quantity to check the color, tone, covering, drying and presence of print defects on the printed media.
CR4.2 The actual printing conditions are simulated by printing on maculature of the same characteristics of the support to be printed, with actual production parameters such as speed, drying and others.
CR4.3 The tonality and color intensity of the first forms is controlled by the optical measuring instruments: densitometres, colorimeters and/or spectrophotometers with respect to the authorized samples, patterns, sketches, standardized tables of color and technical specifications, observing the possible deficiencies to be corrected.
CR4.4 The preregistration of the image is performed by displacing the screen or the printing board by means of the machine's own mechanisms from registration templates, crosses and/or printed supports with a prior color.
CR4.5 The defects in the uniformity of the inking are corrected by acting on the scratch, the out of contact of the screen, modifying the characteristics of the inks or on the materials used according to the observed defects.
CR4.6 The deficiencies in the anchoring of the ink are solved by modifying the characteristics of the inks, the drying conditions or the treatment of the surface of the supports to be printed.
CR4.7 Print recording is achieved by acting on the position of the screen or the printing board by means of the mechanical or electronic devices of the machine.
CR4.8 The variations in the chromatic printing values: color, tone, intensity and brightness are corrected by acting on the amount of ink transferred, by adding diluents, varnish or color concentrate, depending on the results to be achieved.
CR4.9 The detected drying deficiencies are corrected by adjusting the temperature, the distance of the dryer element, the speed of the band, the intensity of the lamps and/or the exposure time in the drying equipment.
RP5: Get the printed product, monitoring the process during the run to ensure the productivity and quality established in the work order.
CR5.1 Print recording is controlled and maintained in the parameters set within the tolerance margins.
CR5.2 The amount of ink on the screen is maintained in sufficient quantity to ensure the inking of the entire surface during the printing process.
CR5.3 The ink anchorage is checked against the appropriate techniques and control elements, taking into account the safety criteria and verifying that it complies with the established parameters.
CR5.4 The tonality, intensity, and other color variables in printing during the spin are controlled visually or with the optical measuring instruments: densitometres, colorimeters, spectrophotometers, maintaining uniformity during the spin.
CR5.5 Quality control is performed with the frequency and measurement elements established by the company, following the directions of the work order, guaranteeing the quality and uniformity of the results throughout the circulation.
CR5.6 The handling of the screen printing machine during the run is carried out by applying the safety standards specified in the plan of prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
CR5.7 Waste produced in the workplace during the run is managed according to the current environmental protection plan.
RP6: Register technical production information with material, incident, quality and productivity data to contribute to production control, cost control and to facilitate future reprints.
CR6.1 The particularities of the printing process performed, such as prior treatments of the material to be used, special preparation of inks, drying conditions or other, are recorded detailing the special conditions carried out and attaching samples or the technical information of the materials used.
CR6.2 Data regarding the behavior of raw materials during the run are recorded confirming that production has been performed with the required quality.
CR6.3 Production data such as quantity of printed copies, production times, machine, type of stop, incidents and others are recorded in the document enabled by the company in order to contribute to the control of production plans and cost control.
CR6.4 Quality control information: control types, sampling frequency and deviations are recorded in the company-enabled documents in order to contribute to quality control in future reprints.
RP7: Perform first-level maintenance, following the manufacturer's technical instructions and work protocols established by the company to maintain the serigraphy machines and equipment in optimal operating and safety conditions.
CR7.1 The actions set forth in the first-level maintenance plan are performed according to the defined periodicity and recording the required data in the enabled documents.
CR7.2 The periodic greasing is performed according to the manufacturer's instructions on the grease points arranged in the serigraphy machines and equipment.
CR7.3 The operation of compressors, circuits and filters are checked according to the working protocols established by the company.
CR7.4 The components of the screen printing machines and equipment are cleaned according to the procedures laid down in the maintenance plan.
CR7.5 The deposit of the waste generated in the established zones is carried out by applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
CR7.6 The safety devices for machine and screen printing equipment are checked and maintained in accordance with the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
Professional context:
Production media:
Equipment of surface treatments of supports: thermal, corona and others. Support power mechanisms and devices. Support mechanisms and devices and support. Flat and cylindrical screen-screen displays. Drying equipment and devices: hot air, infrared, ultraviolet and others. Products and media to be printed: papers, plastics, textiles, wood, metals and others. Inks. Scrapes and contrasets. Printing machines in screen printing. Densitometres, colorimeters, spectrophotometers. Useful and elements of grease and maintenance: grease, oil, greasers and others. Waste containers. Personal protective equipment.
Products and results:
Adjustment and preparation of surface treatment equipment for media. Products and supports treated superficially for subsequent printing. Adjustment and preparation of drying equipment. Adjustment of power, transmission, output and stacking systems in automatic and semi-automatic machines. Adjustment of the adjustment and fixed elements of the screen. Regulation and adjustment of ink and ink transfer systems. Printed products and supports: papers, plastics, textiles, wood, metals, glass and others. Quality control during printing: color control, registration and others. Cleaning and maintenance of screen printing machines and auxiliary elements. Recording of the technical information of the production.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Sheets of technical specifications of materials, inks or other. Technical instructions of the manufacturer. Working protocols. Plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection. The company's maintenance plan. Record of quality control data. Record of maintenance data. Record document of the technical information of the production.
COMPETITION UNIT 4: PERFORM PRINTING ON TAMPOGRAPHY
Level: 1
Code: UC1349_1
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Prepare the different mechanisms and elements of the tampography machines, according to the instructions of the work order and the characteristics of the product to be obtained in order to achieve the production with the established quality criteria.
CR1.1 The technical instructions that appear in the work order, such as ink type, number of colors, total of copies, drying instructions, quality control parameters and others, are interpreted to verify the consistency with the materials supplied and checking the engraved plate and other materials delivered.
CR1.2 The system for securing and transporting the base slides, such as shuttles, carousel, spin system or other, is selected and mounted on the machine according to the characteristics of the object to be printed and the printing and recording needs of the different colors.
CR1.3 The slide moulds are selected or prepared according to the physical characteristics of the object to be printed using the appropriate materials, such as wood, cardboard, silicone, plastics or others, allowing the object to be immobile during the process until its extraction.
CR1.4 The slide moulds are fitted on the bases in the place that matches the tampon model, by means of the fixing devices provided by the machine or by means of self-adhesive.
CR1.5 The embossed sheets or tampography cliches are placed by matching the fixing and recording elements with the die-cut elements, such as perforations, notches and others, by fixing them by means of imantados or self-adhesive, in the corresponding printing body by the order of print and color, determined in the work order.
CR1.6 The tampons are selected according to their size, shape and hardness in relation to the morphology and nature of the object, to the typology of the surface and to the size and type of graphics to be printed: masses, lines or hatched.
CR1.7 The interchangeable tampons are coupled to the machine using the appropriate fixing pieces and acting on the elements that allow to adjust the horizontal and vertical travel with respect to the embossed plate and the object to be printed, as well as the inking pressure and ink transfer to the object.
CR1.8 The inking mechanisms are adjusted on the engraved or cliche plate of tampography by checking their inking and uniform cleaning, checking that the surface stability is maintained in the course.
CR1.9 The incidents that arise in the preparation of the tampography machine and cannot be solved are communicated to the person responsible or team leader detailing the actions taken.
CR1.10 The operations of preparation and adjustment of the mechanisms and elements of the tampography machines are carried out by applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
RP2: Obtain the first printed samples by assessing the results obtained and identifying the deficiencies and their causes to perform the appropriate corrective measures according to the instructions on the work order.
CR2.1 The actual printing conditions are simulated by printing on maculatures of the same characteristics of the support to be printed, with actual production parameters such as speed, drying and others.
CR2.2 Drying systems such as hot air, infrared, ultraviolet or other, are prepared by adjusting the temperature, the exposure time, the speed of the band, the distance to the element or other parameters taking into account the characteristics of the inks, the printing and the material to be printed.
CR2.3 The print on the object is checked to correspond to the size of the buffer and the ink transfer has been completed, taking corrective action if necessary.
CR2.4 The anchoring, transfer and drying of the ink on the material is checked with the appropriate techniques and control elements conditioning the ink with the addition of the suitable additives, such as diluents, retarders or others, depending on the results obtained.
CR2.5 The recording of the image on the object to be printed is carried out by taking as a reference the tests, samples or models provided, by the variation of the clichés or the slide bases.
CR2.6 The tonality and color intensity of the first printed products is checked by comparison with the authorized samples and/or parameters defined in the work order by making the necessary modifications to the inks.
RP3: Get the printed product by monitoring the process during the run to ensure the productivity and quality established in the work order.
CR3.1 Print recording is controlled and maintained in the parameters set within the tolerance margins.
CR3.2 The amount of ink in the tinteros is maintained in sufficient quantity to ensure optimal surface inking during the printing process.
CR3.3 The printing process is monitored by checking the operation of the inking and printing mechanisms and that the speed of the machine allows the controlled feeding and extraction of the printed object and the availability of raw materials.
CR3.4 The tonality, intensity, and other color variables in printing during the spin are visually controlled by comparison with authorized samples while maintaining uniformity during the run.
CR3.5 Quality control is done by following the directions of the work order and with the frequency and measurement elements established, ensuring the quality and uniformity of the results throughout the run.
CR3.6 Production data such as quantity of printed copies, production times, machine, stops, incidents, quality controls and others are recorded in the document enabled by the company in order to contribute to the control of production plans and cost control.
CR3.7 The incidents that arise during the run are communicated to the person responsible or team leader detailing the actions taken.
CR3.8 The handling operations of the tampography machine during the run are carried out by applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
RP4: Perform first-level maintenance by following the manufacturer's technical instructions and established working protocols for the correct operation of the tampography machine and auxiliary equipment.
CR4.1 The cleaning of the different elements of the tampography machine and the auxiliary equipment is carried out using the appropriate methods and products for each case, following the established working protocols and remaining in the conditions defined by the company.
CR4.2 The grease and other top-level maintenance operations of the tampography machine and auxiliary equipment are performed according to the manufacturer's instructions and the established maintenance plan.
CR4.3 The operation of air circuits and filters is verified according to established maintenance standards.
CR4.4 The security devices of the tampography machine and the auxiliary equipment are checked and maintained in accordance with the current risk prevention plan.
CR4.5 The fixed and interchangeable elements of the tampography machine and auxiliary equipment are cleaned and reviewed by staying at the cleaning levels set out in the company's maintenance plan and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
CR4.6 The actions set forth in the first-level maintenance plan are performed according to the defined periodicity and recording the required data in the enabled documents.
CR4.7 The anomalies and deficiencies observed in the operation of the tampography machine and the auxiliary equipment are recorded in the enabled documents informing the person responsible for the healing.
CR4.8 The waste generated is treated in accordance with the guidelines of the plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection established by the company, depositing them in the established zones.
Professional context:
Production media:
Typography Clichés. Tampons. Open and closed inking mechanisms. Moulds for securing products. Slide bases. Shuttle, carousel, spin system or other systems for securing and transporting the base slides. Drying equipment and devices: hot air, infrared, ultraviolet and others. Products and media to be printed: papers, plastics, textiles, wood, metals and others. Inks. Printing machines in tampography. Waste containers. Useful and elements of grease and maintenance: grease, oil, greasers and others. Liquid waste recycling equipment, rags and others. Personal protective equipment.
Products and results:
Adjustment and preparation of drying equipment. Selection and adjustment of the fastening and transport systems of the slide bases. Making moulds. Adjustment of the moulds in the slide bases. Selection and setting of tampons. Regulation and adjustment of the inking mechanisms. Printed products and supports: papers, plastics, textiles, wood, metals, glass and others. Quality control during printing: color control, registration and others. Cleaning and maintenance of tampography machines and auxiliary elements.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Sheets of technical specifications of materials: tampons, inks or other. Technical instructions of the manufacturer. Working protocols. Plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection. The company's maintenance plan. Record of quality control data. Record of maintenance data. Record document of the technical information of the production.
FORMATIVE MODULE 1: PROCESSES IN GRAPHIC ARTS
Level: 2
Code: MF0200_2
Associated with UC: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity
Duration: 120 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Analyze the entire graphical process and its different phases: preprint, print and post-pressure, considering the communication between them using standardization models.
CE1.1 Explain the characteristics and configuration of companies according to the production phase.
CE1.2 From a graphical product, describe through workflows the sequence of tasks or operations in a supposed production environment.
CE1.3 Analyze, from the design point of view, the characteristics of a given process:
Formats and measures.
Typology.
Colors.
Media.
Encuadernacion and Finishing.
CE1.4 From a given product, relate and sequence the different preprint phases that have been involved in its elaboration:
Text: body, family, style, paragraph, interline.
Frames: linearature, point shape, and angulation.
Separation of colors.
Plot and layout systems used.
CE1.5 From a given product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:
Type of media used.
Inks: classes and layers.
Tramado.
The character profile.
Footprint or relief on support.
Defects in printing.
Number of passes on machines.
CE1.6 Analyze the different preprint, printing and post-pressure systems, describing and relating their main phases to machines, equipment, raw materials and products.
CE1.7 Describe the most significant electronic printing systems.
C2: Classify graphic products according to their composition and functional characteristics: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.
CE2.1 Explain the characteristics of the different graphic products.
CE2.2 Analyze the structural characteristics of the different graphic products.
CE2.3 From graphic product samples:
Assess the communicative and functional capacity of different graphic products.
Analyze your physicochemical composition and identify your functional capacity.
C3: Recognize and analyze the parameters and measures of color used in graphic arts.
CE3.1 Describe the chromatic spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab.
CE3.2 Describe the measuring devices used in the colour: colorimeter, glinometer, spectrophotometer.
CE3.3 Describe the various lighting sources, color temperature, and observation conditions.
CE3.4 From color samples:
Identify color parameters: brightness, saturation, tone, and metamery index.
Represent colorimetric values in chromatic spaces.
Evaluate color differences and their ability to play in the graphical system.
CE3.5 Handle the tools and measuring instruments: hygrometer, thermometer, conductmeter, precision scales, densimeter, viscosimeter and microscope, to obtain the values of: humidity, temperature, conductivity, density, dimension variations of supports, materials and raw materials.
CE3.6 Describe the measuring devices used in colour: colorimeter, glinometer and spectrophotometer.
C4: Relating safety, hygiene and environmental standards with operations that are developed in the graphical process, complying with the established regulations.
CE4.1 Describe and relate the rules regarding safety, hygiene and the environment, with the different phases of the process.
CE4.2 Identify the security elements installed in the different places and risk teams.
CE4.3 Using practical examples, identify the security labels that appear on the machines and products used in the graphical process.
CE4.4 Recognize the environmental documents and procedures applied in the graphical process.
C5: Analyze the process of quality control in a "type process" of graphic arts.
CE5.1 Describe the fundamental phases and concepts of quality control in manufacturing.
CE5.2 Describe a receive control process succinct.
CE5.3 Describe the instruments used in quality control: densitometres, colorimeters, control strips and production line control devices.
CE5.4 From a preprint test, and taking into account printing standards:
Perform the densitometric and colorimetric measurements.
Assess that the reproduction of the color range conforms to the set standards.
CE5.5 From a printed product, and taking into account standards:
Select the measuring instrument.
Perform the calibration of the measuring instrument.
Perform densitometric, colorimetric, trapping, sliding, and gray balance measurements.
Chromatic space.
Take action on the control strip.
Check the setting with the set standards.
CE5.6 From a product to be bound and/or manipulate, identify and evaluate defects detected in:
Format and margins.
Cutting marks.
Signals of record.
Signatures.
Fibre Sense.
Repainted.
Troquels.
CE5.7 Describe the most significant quality features of the products:
Framing and manipulated: subjective assessment, cut marks, footprints, signs of registration, gluing.
Resistance to folding.
Resistance to rub.
Printing: density, trapping, stamping gain, color balance, pasting, sliding, recording.
Preprint: tests, standards.
CE5.8 Check the final status of the form and relate it to the specifications of the manipulated.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.1; C5 with respect to CE5.1 and CE5.2.
Other capabilities:
Take responsibility for the work you develop.
Demonstrate some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.
Respect the company's internal rules and procedures.
Contents:
1. Graphical process
Types of graphic products.
Company types: organization and structure.
Standardization and communication models. Workflows
Preprint systems. Classes of originals. Latent image and revealed processes.
Input peripherals, output peripherals, specific software and hardware, processing and test systems.
Plotting and mounting. Elements of the assembly. Specific software.
Print systems. Equipment, performance, comparison of different systems.
Types of inks and supports for each printing system.
Encuaderation. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.
Paper and paperboard manipulated. Manipulated from other materials.
2. Colour and its measurement
Nature of light.
electromagnetic spectrum.
Philosophy of vision.
Chromatic space.
Factors that affect color perception.
Color Theory. Additive and subtractive synthesis of the color.
Color rendering systems: Munsell, RGB, HSL, HSV, Pantone, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.
Color measurement instruments: densitometres, colorimeters, glinometers, and spectrophotometers. Colour assessment.
3. Safety, hygiene and the environment
Safety plans and regulations.
Rules in force.
Signals and alarms.
Environmental regulations.
4. Quality in processes
More characteristic tests, instruments and measurements.
Preprint quality: point gain, gray balance, and density.
Print variables (print density, contrast, contrast, penetration, fixed, stamping gain, color and gray balance).
Control patches in print. Measurement.
Quality in post-pressure.
Visual control of binding and manipulated.
Checking for bound and manipulated defects.
5. Quality control
Quality in manufacturing.
Quality control. Concepts involved.
Control elements.
Phases of control: receipt of materials, processes and products.
ISO and UNE rules.
Standards and standards published by AENOR committee 54 relating to the graphical process
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of 2 m2/pupil.
60 m Trial Lab2
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to graphic arts processes, which will be accredited by one of the following ways:
Academic training of Licentiated or Engineer or others of higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 2: MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS IN PRINT
Level: 2
Code: MF0201_2
Associated with UC: Preparing raw materials and intermediate products for printing
Duration: 120 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Recognize and analyze the main properties and characteristics of the raw materials used in printing processes.
CE1.1 Recognize and describe the type and structure of papers, cartons, plastics, metals and other media for printing.
CE1.2 Recognize and describe the main characteristics and physical-chemical properties of the supports, expressing them in their corresponding units.
CE1.3 Recognize and describe the main characteristics and physical-chemical properties of inks, pigments, dyes, resins, oils, varnishes and solvents, expressing them in their corresponding units.
CE1.4 Recognize and describe the main physical-chemical characteristics of the printing forms.
CE1.5 Characterize the main defects and alterations of the different media used for printing.
CE1.6 From media samples, inks and printer shapes, identify by your trade name the main materials used for printing.
C2: Analyze the behavior of the main materials (products, inks, varnishes, plates and supports) used in the printing system, binding and manipulated, related to its application.
CE2.1 Describe the main pigments, resins, oils, varnishes and solvents related to the inks.
CE2.2 Describe the main materials and chemical products related to the printer form.
CE2.3 Relate the various materials with the printing, binding or manipulated mode used and the number of copies of the print run.
CE2.4 Relating the properties of materials with the requirements of behavior in printing.
C3: Evaluate the characteristics of the quality variables of the raw materials, using appropriate instruments.
CE3.1 Relate the durability and behavior of the different supports in the printing with the alterations that this suffers because of: humidity and temperature, storage, the direction of the fiber and the composition of the paste.
CE3.2 Relate the durability and behavior of the inks and chemicals used in printing with the alterations that these suffer, due to the temperature, humidity, oxidation, exposure to light and its composition.
CE3.3 To differentiate the characteristics and functioning of the measuring instruments used for the quality control of raw materials.
CE3.4 From a practical case of an essay: Handle the tools and measuring instruments (gyrometer, thermometer, balance of precision, viscosimeter, microscope, IGT), to obtain the values of humidity, pressure, density, variations of dimension of supports, materials and raw materials, expressing correctly the results of the measurements.
CE3.5 From a practical assumption, duly characterized by quality standards, determine the appropriate materials for the production.
C4: Analyze the storage process of materials used in Graphic Arts.
CE4.1 Explain the characteristic storage systems of the Graphic Arts companies.
CE4.2 Explain the characteristics of equipment and means of loading, transport and unloading of materials used, related to their applications.
CE4.3 Relate the materials with the procedures and conditions that your storage requires.
C5: Prepare raw materials, according to technical specifications and in accordance with current safety and hygiene regulations.
CE5.1 Check that the raw materials to be treated match those indicated in the work order specifications.
CE5.2 Describe the components and dilutions to be used in the preparation of chemical products for printing.
CE5.3 Perform the mixtures and conditioning of the raw materials, according to the established parameters, respecting the safety and hygiene standards.
CE5.4 Check that the preparation of the materials is adapted to the expected results.
CE5.5 Relate the materials used in Graphic Arts, with the environmental regulations, considering the substitutes for the products traditionally used.
CE5.6 Identify the risks and level of danger posed by the manipulation of different materials and products used in Graphic Arts.
C6: Analyze and evaluate safety and hygiene plans and the corresponding regulations in place to correctly use media and safety equipment in the transport and handling of raw materials for printing.
CE6.1 Relate and describe the rules on symbology and physical situation of signals and alarms, fire equipment, transport safety and handling of raw materials.
CE6.2 Describe the properties and uses of clothing and personal protective equipment plus employees in the graphic industry for the transport and handling of raw materials.
CE6.3 From a certain number of security and business plans in the printing industry:
Identify and describe the most relevant aspects of each plan, collected in the documentation that contains it.
Identify and describe risk factors and situations for health and safety in the plans.
Relate and describe the appropriate preventive measures and prevention methods established to prevent accidents.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C3 with respect to CE3.5; C6 with respect to CE6.3.
Contents:
1. Print media
Physical-chemical structure of the composition of papers, cartons, cardboard. Vegetable materials, plastics, metals.
Classification, identification and trade names, formats and applications.
More important properties of print media as raw material.
Measurement of grammar, roughness, relative humidity, dimensional stability, hardness and flexibility.
Pasta classes for the stucate of the paper holders: paper, cardboard, cardboard.
Identification of defects in media.
Printability of the different media.
Conditioning.
Preparation and applications.
2. Inks
Physical-chemical composition of the inks.
Types of inks. Properties.
Colorimetric measurement, viscosity, density, rigidity, transparency, tolerance between inks and emulsification capacity with water.
Classification by print mode.
Identification, applications, and trade names.
Mixture of inks (Pantone). Preparation and applications.
Identification of defects. Mechanical resistors and different agents (light, water, fats, acids, alkalis and soaps).
3. Printer form and photographic films
Microscopic structure. Classes of emulsions.
Types of photographic films.
Chemicals.
Classification, identification, applications, formats and trade names.
Processed of sensitive materials.
More important properties of the forms used in printing: resistance to the spin, surface tension.
Different printer shapes according to print mode.
Preparation and mixing of products for processing.
4. Complementary materials
Barnices.
Lacas.
Adhesives.
Plastics.
Printing films.
Conditioning and preparation.
5. Transport, Packaging, Storage
Transport of materials from factory to printer.
Transport and packaging problems for media.
Storage conditions. Temperature, humidity.
Influence of storage in the print run.
6. Quality control of raw materials
Control process: on the materials (supports and inks), viscosity control, drying times, resistance to the rub and scratches of varnishes and lacquers.
Quality regulations. Commercial qualities.
Teams and instruments.
Inspection and reception procedures.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of 2 m2/pupil.
60 m trial lab2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the raw materials used in printing that will be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Technical Engineer and others of higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 3: PRINTING PRODUCTS IN SERIOGRAPHY
Level: 2
Code: MF1348_2
Associated with UC: Perform screen printing
Duration: 150 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Relate the supports with the applicable treatments that improve their printability through test-support test-support tests.
CE1.1 Describe the surface treatments applicable to media for screen printing and the characteristics they give them.
CE1.2 Identify materials that by their nature need to be treated to improve or allow their printability.
CE1.3 Perform simple tests with different inks on the most common printing supports, assessing their compatibility, drying, anchoring, tonal stability, mechanical strength, and chemical resistance.
CE1.4 Starting from a test of inking carried out on different supports to identify the treatments that need each material based on the obtained results.
CE1.5 Check in different materials the treatment that has been submitted to them, carrying out different tests of inking and evaluating the results obtained.
CE1.6 In a practical case, properly characterized and from given media:
Perform entintation tests on the same support by evaluating the results in relation to the support between treated and untreated materials.
Apply heat treatment to different temperatures on the same medium, assessing results of dimensional stability, surface alteration and ink support.
CE1.7 Carry out tests with different inks and their additives: diluent, accelerant and retarder adjusting them to the drying and anchoring needs on materials with need for surface treatment, relating the results with the type of ink, applied film, surface treatment and type of drying.
C2: Identify the functionality of the power and recording systems on the most common screen printing machines.
CE2.1 Relate the operation of different machines with the manual or automatic power supply system.
CE2.2 In a properly characterized case scenario.
Describe the characteristics of the manual marking system of flexible supports: paper, cardboard, plastic, self-adhesive, others.
Describe the characteristics of the manual marking system of rigid supports: cardboard, scrapak, metal, others.
Assess the advantages and disadvantages of marking on fixed or removable table machines, manual or mechanical heels, and operator effort and performances.
CE2.3 Describe the functionality of the elements that make up a pneumatic power supply: compressor, head, type of suckers and pulleys.
CE2.4 Relate the operation of the height and side heels of the pneumatic power machines, with the elements that regulate it both in height and in the pressure with respect to the support to be marked.
CE2.5 In a practical case and from the technical instructions of a screen printing machine.
Describe the setting of the pneumatic feeding apparatus, blowing pressure, absorption pressure, pulley travel, and synchronized to heels.
Identify the elements of the machine that enable the recording of the graphics on the support to be printed, describing the maneuvers and elements on which they act: screen, board and table.
CE2.6 Identify the different recording systems according to the elements that compose it, its position and function, in the most common printing machines in screen printing: manual, automatic and semi-automatic.
CE2.7 Describe the operation of the handlers that make it possible to move the elements on which they operate to perform the registration.
CE2.8 From a template or authorized sample:
Position the screen to pre-register on a first color or template set on the board in a polychrome machine.
Modify the record by acting on the height and side heels of a monocolor machine to position it according to technical instructions and authorized sample.
CE2.9 Modify the record by acting on the printing board of a monocolor to position it according to technical instructions and authorized sample.
C3: Operate in the printing body of screen printing machines acting on the set, inking and ink transmission systems.
CE3.1 Classify the machines according to the needs and elements necessary for the inking of the screen and the transfer of ink to the support: manual, semi-automatic and automatic.
CE3.2 Classify the scratches by their nature and technical characteristics: nature, hardness, height and shape of the edge.
CE3.3 Describe and classify the components of the printer body of a screen printing machine for its function and relationship, with the process of screen, inking and ink transfer.
CE3.4 Relate the operation, type of jaws and fixation of the screens with the most common nature and morphology in the manufacture of frames for screens.
CE3.5 From instructions given in relation to printing needs, position the screen in the press, facilitating the inking and the transfer of ink.
CE3.6 Identify the handlers that allow recording by its shape, position, and elements on which it acts: screen or table.
CE3.7 Perform the set of screens with different frames and sizes, placing them pre-registration based on the graphics and needs of the support.
CE3.8 From given print elements: screen, ink and support, perform printing tests with different scratches by valuing the results and comparing them with each other.
CE3.9 From given instructions:
Adjust the entinter in height and parallelism with the screen, securing the ink film to be given, in semi-automatic and automatic machines.
Determine the correct order of printing of the different colors in relation to the graphism that contains each screen according to the printing needs in relation to the support.
Perform all operations by applying risk prevention regulations linked to the process of tuning the inking system into screen printing machines.
C4: Analyze the relationship between ink, screen characteristics, type of graphics, and support.
CE4.1 Identify the most common inks used in screen printing according to their nature, performance and type of drying.
CE4.2 Describe the most common types of fabric used in the manufacture of screens according to their nature and structure: polyfilament, monofilament.
CE4.3 Relate the number of threads with the type of printable graphics: mass, plot, line and the needs of the inking of the support to be printed, valuing the suitability in each case.
CE4.4 From a printed product, identify the type of ink, the characteristics of the screen used and the type of drying applied.
CE4.5 In a practical case and from a given support and ink:
Perform ink transfer tests with screens of different number of threads and value the results by comparing them.
Determine the optimal value in relation to the given elements and justify the results.
C5: Operate on the most common printing machines in screen printing, keeping quality, intonation and registration values determined in a given technical specification or samples.
CE5.1 Describe the systems or methods of inking in the most common serigraphy machines by the mechanisms that compose it.
CE5.2 Relate the screen printing inks with the screen used in the inking process, its transfer, nature and type of drying.
CE5.3 In a practical case of screen inking, properly characterized:
Perform the inking by levelling the counter with different heights, angle and parallelism with respect to the plane of the screen using the same ink, screen and support.
Value the results obtained in relation to the minimum ink film required in the inking.
CE5.4 Make entintor or counter-displacement adjustments by ensuring the full coverage of the graphics with the ink film determined in given technical specifications.
CE5.5 Relate the nature, hardness, height, length and shape of the edges of the scrapes with their applications and the most common types of portasquettes.
CE5.6 In a properly characterized case:
Ensure ink transfer by leveling the scratch with different pressures, angle and parallelism with respect to the screen plane using the same ink, screen and support, considering the needs of out of touch.
Value the results obtained in relation to the minimum ink film required and transferred to the support in pre-established quality values.
CE5.7 Make scraping adjustments, ensuring the total transfer of the graphics with the ink film transferred to the support in pre-set quality values.
CE5.8 Perform the ink and ink transfer to the support by obtaining the first printed test to allow its assessment by comparison to authorized samples.
CE5.9 In a practical case, it has been duly characterized by operations in printing printing machines, and from a plan of prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection, to identify the rules of action that appear in this plan related to the management of equipment, as well as the risks and danger that this entails.
C6: Rate the quality of the screen printing and determine the necessary corrective measures to modify the results, adjusting them to the technical characteristics or authorized tests.
CE6.1 Identify the most common defects that occur in the printing of first tests: ink film, covering, intonation, and recording.
CE6.2 Recognizes the need for recording and optimizing the color printing order according to the needs of the graphics and a given support.
CE6.3 Identify the intonation needs that allow the printing of an established color on a given media.
CE6.4 From a first test and by comparison with an authorized sample:
Determine the adjustments to be made to allow the registration to crosses.
Determine the required ink film that allows the covering and the color specified in the sample.
Determine and adjust the elements that allow to modify the film and the tone of the ink: pressure and angle of the scratch, height of the out-of-contact and manipulated of the ink.
CE6.5 In a practical case properly characterized:
Contrast printed media with authorized samples with a minimum frequency that allows immediate readjustments.
Take color intensity measurements by optical media, colorimeter, densitometer, or by comparison with authorized patterns.
Compare the output of the print with the originals and with preprint tests.
C7: Select the drying and stacking systems of serigraphy printed products, ensuring that their operation responds to the needs of the process.
CE7.1 Describe the drying systems according to their operation in relation to the ink and the way in which it is modified during the process.
CE7.2 Relate the types of drying of a form in relation to the nature of the ink, applied film and type of printed support: air jet drying, infrared and UV.
CE7.3 In a practical case properly characterized and made from a printed material with a given ink:
Select the most appropriate heat source to the nature of the ink and the given support.
Adjust the temperature of the system by ensuring the drying of the ink without affecting the surface characteristics of the support and the dimensional stability.
Adjust the speed of passage through the oven in relation to the applied temperature and the need for drying in the thermal drying systems.
Check that the radiation of the ultraviolet lamp, inside the oven, acts exclusively on the printed support.
Adjust the step speed of the support printed by the UV drying oven according to the drying needs of the printing characteristics in relation to the support.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the drying and stacking process.
CE7.4 Contrastar that the corrective measures of temperature and speed adjustments made in a drying equipment are adjusted to the printing speed of the online equipment.
CE7.5 Choose the stacking mode most appropriate to the needs and morphology of a given support ensuring that it does not affect the printing done and ensures the stability of the support.
C8: Apply first-level maintenance procedures on the most common serigraphy machines, according to the instructions of the technical manuals.
CE8.1 Describe the cleaning operations to be performed on a screen printing machine, identifying the appropriate products that do not damage the parts.
CE8.2 From a serigraphy machine maintenance manual:
Identify machine safety devices and recommendations on the periodicity of cleaning and grease operations.
Describe the possible failures or deficiencies that can occur on the machines, as well as the solutions for each case.
CE8.3 In a practical scenario and from a screen "type" machine:
Remove, once the printing has finished, the removable elements: screen, scrapes, and counter-pieces, allowing their cleaning and preventing the drying of the ink on them.
Perform the cleaning of the screens, scrapes and counter-razups with the appropriate solvents to the ink and that does not affect the materials, ensuring their integrity for their subsequent file and possible reuse.
Promptly clean the fixed components of the machine after the printing has finished, preventing the ink from drying on them.
Grease the mobile elements of the machine with the lubricant and periodicity as instructed in the maintenance book.
Perform all operations by applying risk prevention regulations linked to maintenance operations.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.5, CE1.6 and CE1.7; C2 with respect to CE2.5, CE2.8 and CE2.9; C3 with respect to CE3.5, CE3.6, CE3.8 and CE3.9; C4 with respect to CE4.5; C5 with respect to CE5.3, CE5.6, CE5.7 and CE5.8; C6 with respect to CE6.4 and CE6.5; C7 with respect to CE7.3, CE7.4 and CE7.5; C8 with respect to CE 8.3.
Other capabilities:
Take responsibility for the work you develop.
Finish the job within the set deadlines.
Propose alternatives in order to improve the results.
Demonstrate some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.
Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.
Contents
1. Feeding and recording systems on screen printing machines
Manual and automatic power systems.
Features of the marking system.
A marking process on fixed or removable table machines.
pneumatic power systems: compressor, head, suckers and pulley.
Puesta to the point of the pneumatic power system. Blowing and absorbing pressures, pulley travel and heels synchronised.
Log System. Elements that compose it. Functionality.
Record items. Screens, board and table.
Operation of the handlers that enable logging.
Positioning of the screen. Pre-registration and registration maneuvers.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to food and registration operations.
2. Preparing the printing body on screen printing machines
Printer body components. Operation.
Fixed, inking, and ink transmission systems.
Types of jaws and screen fixing.
Handlers that allow logging.
Types of screens. Frames and sizes. Fixed from the screen.
Classification of machines: manual, semi-automatic and automatic.
Most common printing machines in screen printing.
Eninking and ink transfer needs.
Inking settings. The printing sequence of the colors.
Link between ink, fabric, number of screen threads and graphics.
Ink transfer tests across different screens.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards applicable to the preparation of the printing body.
3. Print printing in screen printing
Quality, intonation, and record settings.
Scratch angle. Height and parallelism with respect to the screen.
Counterpart adjustments. Displacement.
Nature, hardness, height, length and shape of the edges.
Ink and ink transfer.
Characteristics and operation of the drying and stacking systems.
Temperature and step rate adjustments of the material in the drying systems.
Online equipment speed settings: printing, drying and stacking.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards applicable to screen printing.
Print screen printing on different media.
4. Quality control during screen printing
Print quality. Corrective measures.
Most common print defects.
Registration needs.
Optimization of the print order.
Quality check. Frequency of sampling.
Log Settings. Ink film, pressure and angle of scratch, height of out of contact.
Color Intensity. Measurements. Optical measuring systems: colorimeter and densitometer.
5. First level maintenance operations on screen printing machines
Maintenance manuals. Frequency of operations.
Cleaning operations. Products to be used.
Security devices. Failures and deficiencies
Cleaning the removable and oiling elements of moving elements.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards in maintenance operations.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
150 m Print Workshop2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the making of screen printing, which will be accredited by one of the following ways:
Academic training of Superior Technician or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 4: PRINTING PRODUCTS IN TAMPOGRAPHY
Level: 1
Code: MF1349_1
Associated with UC: Perform Print in Tampography
Duration: 60 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Classify the most common printing machines in the same size according to the elements that make up the printing.
CE1.1 Describe the most characteristic iconography of printing equipment in tampography by relating it to the parameters, with the associated functions and with their influence on printing.
CE1.2 In a properly characterized case, select the appropriate equipment parameters according to the printing needs described in a work order.
CE1.3 Relate the components of a tampography machine with the function they perform in the process of inking, transmission and printing: table slides, iron, tintero, tampon support, tampons, slides.
CE1.4 Relate the different slides to the power, step, and print needs of the object to be printed.
CE1.5 Defer fixed, mobile and removable components by relating them to engraving, tampon, tintero and coordinate table.
CE1.6 Classify the types of tintero according to their performance on the engraving process.
CE1.7 Classifying the tampons by their nature, shape and hardness relating them to ink, graphics and support to print.
C2: Determine the technical feasibility of printing in the size of products of different morphology and nature by applying defined criteria.
CE2.1 Identify the different products for printing according to their morphology and nature by valuing the surface roughness and relating them to the type of ink and tampon to be used.
CE2.2 Recognize the most functional slide moulds that allow the attachment of the objects by allowing a controlled printing to be recorded.
CE2.3 Relate the object to be printed and the graphics that you want to apply with the tampon that for its form and hardness allows a transfer of controlled ink.
CE2.4 From different objects with different shapes and nature determine the buffer to be used, the type of ink and the most appropriate drying system for each product.
CE2.5 Rate the possibility of graphics printing for its size and typology: plot, mass, line, color and overlay of inks.
C3: Perform the printing of products in tampography by adjusting production parameters and applying the quality criteria established in a work order or according to samples provided.
CE3.1 Identify the production parameters: color printing order, record quality, color intonation, print speed and number of copies, relating to the printing needs in relation to the support.
CE3.2 Describe the different inking systems in the most common tampography machines by identifying their components.
CE3.3 Relate the inks used in tampography with the iron, tampon, ink transfer, the nature of the object and the drying method.
CE3.4 In a practical case properly characterized and from a machine type of tampography:
Place the engraving on the fixed table and adjust to pre-registration by means of the machine tools: pins, electromagnet or self-adhesive.
Perform the adjustment of different tinteros according to the needs of inking on the plate corresponding to the color and the ink it contains.
Adjust the selected tampon to the fixed element of the machine so that it can perform its function, displacement, inking and ink transfer in a controlled manner.
CE3.5 In a practical case of printing in tampography, properly characterized:
Perform the inking by levelling the elements that make up the tintero, ensuring the inking of the bajorrelieves and the surface cleaning of the iron.
Perform the adjustment of travel, pressure, and contact time of the tampon on the plate and the object to be printed.
Check the quality of ink transfer on the support by comparison with the sample provided, applying the necessary corrections with the appropriate additives to the nature of the ink: diluent, retardant, accelerant.
Perform all operations by applying risk prevention regulations linked to the printing process in tampography.
CE3.6 Describe the most common defects that occur in printing in tampography: ink film, intonation, covering, stamping gain, and recording.
CE3.7 Recognize the need for recording and optimization of the color printing order according to the needs of the graphics and a support given to printing in tampography.
CE3.8 From different raw materials available: wood, cardboard, silicone, plastic and others make slide moulds that allow the fixing of the object during printing and the step by machine.
CE3.9 Identify the intonation needs in relation to the ink film to be printed so as to allow the printing of a set color on a given color support.
CE3.10 Recognize the different drying systems for their performance characteristics and relate them to different inks used in tampography.
C4: Apply first-level maintenance procedures on the most common machines of tampography, according to the instructions of the technical manuals.
CE4.1 Describe the cleaning operations to be performed on a tampography machine, identifying the appropriate products that do not damage the parts.
CE4.2 From a Tampography Machine Maintenance Manual:
Identify machine security devices and recommendations on the periodicity of cleaning and grease operations.
Describe the possible failures or deficiencies that can occur on the machines, as well as the solutions for each case.
CE4.3 In a practical scenario and from a type-size machine:
Remove with speed from the machines, after the printing has finished, the removable elements: tintero, iron and tampon, allowing its cleaning and preventing the drying of the ink on it.
Perform the cleaning of the tinteros, plates and tampons with the appropriate solvents to the ink and that does not affect the materials, ensuring their integrity for their subsequent file and possible reuse.
Promptly clean the fixed components of the machine after the printing has finished, preventing the ink from drying on them.
Grease the mobile elements of the machine with the lubricant and periodicity as instructed in the maintenance book.
Perform all operations by applying risk prevention regulations linked to maintenance operations.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 with respect to CE2.4 and CE2.5; C3 with respect to CE3.4 and CE3.5; C4 with respect to CE4.3.
Other capabilities:
Take responsibility for the work you develop.
Finish the job within the set deadlines.
Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.
Identify the organization's production process.
Learn new concepts or procedures and effectively leverage training using acquired knowledge.
Respect the company's internal rules and procedures.
Habit to the business rhythm of the company.
Contents:
1. Characterization of the Tampography Equipment
Most common machines for tampography.
Elements that make up the machines: plates, plates, tinteres, tampons, slides.
Placement of objects. Step and print.
Fixed components and mobile components. Features.
Coordinate table. Types and characteristics. Relationship to the product typology.
tampons. Nature. Types, shape and hardness. Relationship to the product morphology.
2. Technical feasibility of printing different products
Most common products that are printed in tampography.
Adapting the system to the product.
Reproduction Feasibility: relationship to the required equipment and quality.
Product characteristics: morphology, nature, surface characteristics.
Relationship between product morphology and printing process characteristics.
Possibility of carrying out objects adapted to the product.
3. Printing products in tampography
Tuning production parameters
Placing and tuning of engraving, tintero, and tampon
Print quality: print order, record, intonation, color, and print speed.
Inking systems. Components
Link between ink, plates, tampon, nature of the object and method of drying.
The process of inking the iron. Buffer contact. Adjustments.
Print Defects. Ink film. Stamping gain.
Drying systems. Types. Features.
Safety, health, and environmental protection standards in the printing processes in tampography.
4. First-level maintenance operations on tampography machines
Maintenance manuals. Frequency of operations.
Cleaning operations. Products to be used.
Security devices. Failures and deficiencies
Cleaning the removable and oiling elements of moving elements.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards in maintenance operations.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
150 m Print Workshop2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the making of printing in tampography, which will be credited by one of the following ways:
Academic training of Superior Technician or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
CDXX ANNEX
PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: INDUS-TRIAL BINDING OPERATIONS IN PAPERBACK AND HARDCOVER
Professional Family: Graphic Arts
Level: 2
Code: ARG420_2
General competition:
To carry out the industrial binding of books and other products, preparing the raw materials and the auxiliary products, adjusting the elements of the machines of clothing and stamping of caps as well as the lines of rustic and hard cover, according to the productivity and quality established and intervening in the graphic process, applying the plan of prevention of occupational risks and of environmental protection.
Competition Units:
UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity conditions.
UC0691_2: Prepare raw materials and auxiliary products for the survey-task.
UC1350_2: Confect and stamp industrial binding caps.
UC1351_2: Perform industrial binding on rustic lines and hardcover.
Professional environment:
Professional scope:
Develops its professional activity in the graphic industry, in the area of post-pressure. In medium or large companies, with very different organizational/technological levels. It integrates into a work team where it develops individual and group tasks on the elaboration and stamping of tapas, as well as binding operations on rustic lines and hardcover. In general it will depend organically on an intermediate command. The work is carried out on behalf of others.
Productive Sectors:
Sector of graphic arts, constituting in its own subsector of binding or forming part of other graphic sectors such as editorial and manufacture of paper and cardboard articles in which different preprint, printing and post-pressure processes are carried out, being one of them.
Relevant Occupations and Jobs:
Operator of tapas-making machines.
Operator of tapas stamping machines.
Rustic line operator.
Hard cover line operator.
The operator of binding machines.
Cover machine operator.
Cover machine driver.
Associated training: (420 hours)
Training Modules
MF0200_2: Processes in graphic arts. (120 hours)
MF0691_2: Materials and binding products. (90 hours)
MF1350_2: Garment and stamping of covers for industrial binding. (90 hours)
MF1351_2: Industrial Encuadernación in lines of rustic and hardcover. (120 hours)
COMPETITION UNIT 1: OPERATING IN THE GRAPHICAL PROCESS UNDER SECURITY, QUALITY, AND PRODUCTIVITY
Level: 2
Code: UC0200_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Check and follow the graphical process as a whole through workflows and in its different phases: preprint, print and post-pressure, through standardization and communication, to achieve quality and productivity, in accordance with established specifications.
CR1.1 Graphic process tracking is done through workflows to facilitate planning, automation, procedures, and other factors that affect the production environment.
CR1.2 By standardizing and communicating the work phases, a final result of the most effective process is achieved.
CR1.3 The different phases of the graphical process are analyzed with specification of their elements, applying the employment and sequentiality of each of them.
CR1.4 The parameters and preprint elements chosen are checked, according to technical specifications.
CR1.5 The printing system is in accordance with the support used and the product to be obtained.
CR1.6 The finish is applied according to the support used, process followed and usage needs, according to the technical specifications.
CR1.7 The observed anomalies are collected to take the necessary preventive and corrective measures.
CR1.8 The graphical process, in all its phases, is performed taking into account and applying safety, hygiene and environmental regulations.
RP2: Apply quality control methods in the graphic arts process to achieve the specified product, following existing standards and standards.
CR2.1 The graphical product is realized taking into account the fundamental concepts of quality in the different phases of its manufacture.
CR2.2 The most significant quality features in each of the phases of the process are identified by variables and attributes.
CR2.3 Quality control is done methodically, using the appropriate control elements for each feature.
CR2.4 Quality criteria are applied based on established quality and tolerance levels.
CR2.5 Control frequencies are applied according to the type of characteristics to be controlled and the number of product units to be obtained.
CR2.6 Quality control results and incidences are collected in the corresponding control sheets.
CR2.7 The desired colors and tones are obtained according to the parameters and color measurements.
CR2.8 The measuring devices are used according to the specific needs of the required values.
CR2.9 The image transfer is analyzed according to the point variation and the contrast.
RP3: Determine the characteristics of the graphical products to establish the appropriate manufacturing process, taking into account the available elements and applicable regulations.
CR3.1 Graphic products are identified according to their functional and communicative characteristics.
CR3.2 The functional and technological relationships of graphic products are set according to their component elements.
CR3.3 Graphic products are defined according to originals, sketches, and models.
CR3.4 Graphic products respond to established technical specifications.
CR3.5 Graphic products enable you to maintain competitive conditions for your business.
CR3.6 The physico-chemical characteristics of the graphic products take into account environmental and safety and hygiene regulations in the workplace.
Professional context:
Production media:
Computer equipment. Laser printer. Standards of communication. Workflows. Normalized light pupitre. Measurement and control tools and tools: densitometer, tipometer, odometer, colorimeter, spectrometer.
Products and results:
Incidents of quality control. Control sheets. Identification of defects or defects in processes.
Information used or generated:
Production order. Technical documentation of preprint, printing and post-pressure equipment and machines. Safety, hygiene and environmental regulations. Quality standards and standards. Samples authorised. Technical sheets. Maintenance manuals. Control plans.
COMPETITION UNIT 2: PREPARE RAW MATERIALS AND AUXILIARY PRODUCTS FOR BINDING
Level: 2
Code: UC0691_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Interpret work orders for the preparation of raw materials and ancillary products, performing the work with quality and productivity criteria.
CR1.1 The technical and production information shown in the work order is interpreted to prepare raw materials and auxiliary products: papers, cartons, tails, steel wire, yarn, skins, fabrics, as well as the auxiliary equipment to be used: forklifts, cutters, seals, pallets and boxes.
CR1.2 The raw material preparation operations are performed taking into account the quality criteria established by the company.
CR1.3 The model, test, or any other product that serves as a model, is contrasted with the directions of the work order to avoid errors in the preparation of the raw materials and the auxiliary products.
RP2: Review printed sheets to ensure their quality in binding processes.
CR2.1 The printed sheets are checked to ensure their quality in terms of foliation, tracing, specific measures, options for repines, water, folding resistance, fibre sense, folding in folding and others.
CR2.2 The printed sheets are checked for defects that may have occurred in their printing phase and report for corrective action.
CR2.3 The sheets are reviewed to determine their positioning and entry into the machine, as well as their adjustment with the registration guides.
RP3: Prepare raw materials and auxiliary products so that continuity in the print run is guaranteed.
CR3.1 The quantity and quality of raw materials and ancillary products are verified to ensure their compliance with the production order.
CR3.2 The raw materials are stacked in an orderly manner in the machine environment to ensure the continuity of production without interruption, following the safety, health and environmental plan established by the company.
CR3.3 The raw materials and the auxiliary products are prepared according to the working methods established to ensure their entry and pass through the different machines that configure the binding processes.
CR3.4 The measurement of parameters of the auxiliary products: viscosity, temperature, mixtures, allows the adequacy to the required quality specifications.
CR3.5 The preservation and storage of auxiliary products is carried out in an orderly manner, facilitating its location.
Professional context:
Production media:
Paper Moisture Drivers, Squats, Flexometers. Auxiliary equipment.
Products and results:
Quality control of raw materials, auxiliary products and printed sheets. Papers, fabrics, skins, cardboard and cardboard stacked and prepared for binding. Auxiliary products: tails, wires, steel wire, prepared for binding.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Technical documentation of the raw materials. Maquettes. Safety, health and environmental protection regulations applicable to your job. Quality standards.
COMPETITION UNIT 3: MAKE AND STAMP INDUSTRIAL BINDING CAPS
Level: 2
Code: UC1350_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Interpret the work order by checking that it collects the instructions and data necessary to prepare the confection and stamping machines.
CR1.1 The technical instructions that appear in the work order for a process of making and stamping of caps: number of copies, type of cap-chrome, fabric, guaflex, other-, size and size of the cardboard, size and type of loin, characteristics of the stamping, game of the lid, and others, are verified in order to start the preparation of the machines of making and stamping caps.
CR1.2 The model or model that accompanies the work order is checked before starting the machine preparation, contrasting it with the work order data.
CR1.3 Quality controls defined in the work order are identified by interpreting the characteristics of the work order.
RP2: Regular and adjust the mechanisms of the lids making machine for commissioning, in accordance with the technical characteristics of the work.
CR2.1 The materials supplied are checked visually and/or by the appropriate measuring instruments, observing that they do not present anomalies that hinder their subsequent production and that they conform to the specific characteristics in the work order.
CR2.2 The measure of the cap to be made is valued taking into account the inner block of the product to be bound or the model, as well as the measures of the eyebrows and the spine established in the work order.
CR2.3 The board introducer body for the planes and the back is regulated by adjusting the brackets, the transport mechanisms and leveling the gauge according to the measures of the cap and the type of loin.
CR2.4 The chuck or engomator cylinder is prepared by manually placing the rubber in the correct position allowing application of the adhesive onto the cover material.
CR2.5 The introducer body of cover material is regulated according to the caliber of the material and adjusting the brackets and the transport mechanisms for delivery to the chuck or engomator cylinder.
CR2.6 The colero is regulated by adjusting the density, quantity and temperature of the adhesive taking into account the characteristics of the cover material and maintaining the stable level during the run.
CR2.7 The gluing and folding body is regulated by synchronizing the front, head, and foot folding arms, taking into account the thickness of the carton and the cover material, avoiding air bags, water bags, and the corners in the corners are mounted or unglued.
CR2.8 Pressure elements are regulated and adjusted, taking into account the surface and thickness of the cap and the amount and type of adhesive.
CR2.9 The elements and mechanisms of the stacking and output system are adjusted, taking into account the measures of the cap, the production speed and the stacking specifications.
CR2.10 The adjustment and adjustment operations of the cap-making machine are carried out by applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
RP3: Get the covers made according to the instructions of the work order by carrying out the product and process controls necessary to guarantee the productivity and the quality established.
CR3.1 The collection and feeding of the required materials: cartons, cover material and queues are performed in such a way as to avoid unnecessary stops, checking the correspondence with the work order.
CR3.2 Quality control is performed according to the frequency established by the company and with the appropriate measurement elements, according to the instructions of the work order, guaranteeing the uniformity of the results throughout the circulation and recording these controls in the documents enabled by the company.
CR3.3 The position of the text and images of the cover material is controlled, checking the loin, cover, and back cover.
CR3.4 The fixing of the cover material to the planes and the ball is controlled, checking the cover game, the absence of water and air bags, and the tips are correctly glued and without wrinkles.
CR3.5 The optimal speed of the machine is maintained throughout the run, correcting the anomalies if any, by adjusting the required parameters in each case.
CR3.6 Production data such as number of caps, production times, machine, stop rate, incidents and others are recorded in the company-enabled document in order to contribute to the control of production and cost control plans.
CR3.7 The made-up caps are palletized and identified by following the instructions of the work order, contributing to the control of the production and preventing them from deteriorating in the subsequent handling and transport.
CR3.8 The handling operations of the machine during the production of made-to-end caps are carried out by applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
CR3.9 The waste produced in the workplace is deposited in the places foreseen in the plan of prevention and environmental protection established by the company.
RP4: Regular and adjust the mechanisms of the lids stamping machine for commissioning, in accordance with the technical characteristics of the work.
CR4.1 The supplied lids are checked visually and/or by the appropriate measuring instruments, observing that they do not have anomalies that hinder their subsequent production and that they conform to the specific characteristics in the work order.
CR4.2 The introduction of lids to the stamping platen is regulated by adjusting the brackets and the transport mechanisms taking into account the size and size of the cap.
CR4.3 The placement and advancement of the embossing film coil are determined according to the location and surface of the stamping, enabling the best to be used in the film.
CR4.4 The fixation of the embossing on the stamping plate is done by adjusting its position with respect to the test or the supplied model, verifying its correspondence and verification of the contents thereof.
CR4.5 The temperature and pressure of the plate are adjusted taking into account the stamping film, the surface to be stamped, the caliber of the cardboard, the cover material and the characteristics of the engraving.
CR4.6 The stamping is performed by synchronizing the input in pressure of the plate, the feeding of the lid and the advance of the stamping film.
CR4.7 The elements and mechanisms of the stacking and output system are adjusted, taking into account the measures of the cap, the production speed and the stacking specifications.
CR4.8 The preparation and adjustment operations of the mechanism of the lids stamping machine are carried out by applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
RP5: Get the stamped caps according to the work order instructions by performing the product and process controls required to ensure productivity and quality established.
CR5.1 The collection and feeding of the lids and films required for production is done in such a way as to avoid unnecessary stops, checking the correspondence with the work order.
CR5.2 The stamping of the cap to one or more colors is done in one or several passes depending on the surface and location of the elements to be stamped, checking the correct record of the colors.
CR5.3 The content of the stamping is checked by checking its correct position and comparing the texts and other elements with the test.
CR5.4 The quality of the stamping is controlled by checking the uniformity in the bottoms, the adhesion of the film, possible burst and loss of details, readjusting the pressure and/or the temperature if necessary.
CR5.5 Quality control is performed according to the frequency established by the company and with the appropriate measurement elements, according to the instructions of the work order, guaranteeing the uniformity of the results throughout the circulation and recording these controls in the documents enabled by the company.
CR5.6 The optimal speed of the machine is maintained throughout the run, correcting the anomalies if any, by adjusting the required parameters in each case.
CR5.7 Production data such as quantity of stamped caps, production times, machine, type of stop, incidents and others are recorded in the document enabled by the company in order to contribute to the control of production plans and cost control.
CR5.8 The stamped caps are placed in pallets following the instructions on the work order, checking that they are not countercombed and avoiding that in the subsequent handling and transport they may deteriorate.
CR5.9 The pallets are identified by means of carnets according to the instructions of the work order, to facilitate the control of the production and to help their easy identification afterwards.
CR5.10 Machine handling operations during the stamping of caps are performed by applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
CR5.11 The waste produced in the workplace is deposited in the places provided for in the plan of prevention and environmental protection established by the company.
RP6: Perform the maintenance of the first level of the machines for making and stamping of caps, according to the technical instructions of the machines and the working protocols established by the company, in order to maintain them in optimal conditions of operation and safety.
CR6.1 The periodic greasing is performed according to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
CR6.2 The operation of air circuits and filters is verified according to established maintenance standards.
CR6.3 The components of the manufacturing and stamping machines are maintained at the cleaning levels set out in the company's maintenance plan.
CR6.4 The coleros are kept clean by removing the pieces of materials and impurities from their inside, avoiding an incorrect feeding of the tail.
CR6.5 The actions set out in the first level maintenance plan are performed according to the defined periodicity and recording the required data according to company procedures.
CR6.6 The safety devices of the clothing and the lids stamping machines and the auxiliary equipment are checked and maintained in accordance with the current risk prevention plan.
Professional context:
Production media:
Cartons. Cover materials. Glues and adhesives. Film of stamp. Machines for making tapas. Printing machines. Measuring instruments: meter, flexometer. Prints to stamp. Waste containers.
Products and results:
Set to the machine to make tapas: adjustment and adjustment. Setting of the machine to stamp: adjustment and adjustment. First-level cleaning and maintenance. Made-up tapas. Stamped lids. Palletized of the lids.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Model or model. Quality procedures defined by the company. Document with the process quality parameters. Technical information sheet of the materials used. Technical documentation of equipment and machines for making and stamping caps. Plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection. Quality standards and standards. Production control documents. Record of maintenance data.
COMPETITION UNIT 4: PERFORM INDUSTRIAL BINDING ON RUSTIC LINES AND HARDCOVER
Level: 2
Code: UC1351_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Interpret the work order by verifying that it collects the data necessary to prepare the hardcover and hardcover lines, check the correspondence with the supplied materials, and determine the coordination with the work team where appropriate.
CR1.1 The technical instructions that appear in the work order such as type of binding, number of copies, total of sheets and number of pages of the same, type of cover and/or cover, page format, weight of the paper, game of the lid, size of the courtesy and others are validated verifying that they are executable and contrasting with the supplied materials.
CR1.2 The supplied materials such as covers or lids, guards, folded cuaderls, stitched blocks, and others are visually checked by observing that they do not present anomalies such as: vice caught in the pallet, incorrect stitching tension, scratches, folds or others.
CR1.3 The product to be bound is previously checked by performing a sample with the supplied materials and comparing it with the model model, contrasting it with the work order data.
CR1.4 The quality controls defined in the work order are identified by interpreting the characteristics of the work order.
CR1.5 The technical instructions regarding the types of stacked, finished and labeled are identified by interpreting the characteristics of the same.
CR1.6 The coordination of the work team is established, where appropriate, in order to optimize the process and from the specifications that appear in the production order.
RP2: Prepare the materials and output mechanisms of the finished product in the rustic and hardcover lines, taking into account the characteristics of the materials involved, to achieve continuity during the run avoiding unnecessary stops.
CR2.1 The standard stations for the milling products are prepared by checking the paging and the matching of the foot or the head of each of the quadrillos, calibrating them according to the thickness of the ring, guaranteeing the correct disposition of the same.
CR2.2 The inner block marker is adjusted by placing the head, foot and front stops at the product size, allowing the passage of a single block.
CR2.3 The store addition module is prepared for hardcover bound products by adjusting the feeding system, the sizing system and the pressure mechanisms by allowing the fixing of the beginning and end guards in the correct position.
CR2.4 The feeding mechanisms of the covers and the lids are prepared by taking into account the size and thickness of the covers, adjusting the covers of the covers and the rounding station of the loin if necessary.
CR2.5 The elements and mechanisms of the stacking and output system are adjusted, taking into account the measures of the product to be bound, the production speed and the stacking specifications.
CR2.6 The preparation operations of the materials and output mechanisms of the finished product are carried out in accordance with the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
RP3: Adjust the mechanisms for the preparation of the product loin to be bound in the rustic lines and hardcover, according to the technical specifications of the work order, to achieve the correct canning and to allow the correct attachment of the covers and covers with the block of the product to be bound.
CR3.1 The cutting, milling and brushing plates of the milling module are adjusted taking into account the type of paper, the thickness of the cuadernillos and the white of the spine, guaranteeing a homogeneous surface for the sizing.
CR3.2 The coleros are visually checked by controlling the temperature and fill levels, adjusting and filling in case necessary.
CR3.3 The loin sizing module is prepared by adjusting the applicator devices to the shape and thickness of the loin.
CR3.4 The module of rounding the back and removing the caklet is prepared by regulating the temperature prior to heating the spine and adjusting the pressure of the rounding rollers, the rub and jaws according to the thickness and the shape of the loin of the product to be bound.
CR3.5 The placement of the reinforcements and heads is done by adjusting to the measures of the spine, placing the heads of the right and left on the back of the product to the binding and focusing the reinforcement material between the head and the foot of the spine.
CR3.6 The adjustment operations of the mechanism for the preparation of the loin are carried out by applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
RP4: Adjust and synchronize the mechanisms of covering or tucking in lids, formation and finalization of the products to be bound, in the lines of rustic and hard cover, according to the technical characteristics of the work and the materials to be used, in order to obtain the product to binding with the required quality.
CR4.1 The block pressing module is adjusted according to the thickness of the loin so that it is uniform and compact.
CR4.2 The trilateral guillotine is prepared by adjusting the guides and selecting the foot and the cassette according to the size and type of the support to be cut.
CR4.3 Cutting blades are reviewed and changed depending on the type of support to be cut or if they are observed or rebabed, preparing them for repair or emptying or keeping them in accordance with the safety procedure established by the company.
the invention relates to a device for preparing adhesive application devices for the sizing of the lomo and the lomo.
CR4.5 The cap-in-cap module is prepared by allowing the entry of the product to be pre-bound together with the perfectly aligned lids or covers by adjusting the attachment mechanisms and fixing the blocks thereto.
CR4.6 The formation of the loin in the rustic products is achieved by adjusting the mechanisms that cinch the cover to the block, thereby making the loin well profiled.
CR4.7 The final formation of the product to be bound in the hard-cover products is made by cinching the inner block to the lid by adjusting the pressure jaws, marking the cap on the lid.
CR4.8 The operations of adjusting and synchronizing the mechanisms to cover or meter in caps, formation and finalization of the products are carried out by applying the safety standards specified in the plan of prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.
RP5: Get the bound products according to the technical instructions of the work order by performing the necessary process controls as well as coordination with the work team to ensure the productivity of the binding lines.
CR5.1 The collection and feeding of materials during the run, such as cuadernillos, stitched blocks, lids, covers, loin reinforcement materials, heads, tails and others is performed in such a way that unnecessary stops are avoided, correcting or separating the covers, covers, cuadernillos and/or wrinkled sewn blocks, with incorrect tension of the stitching, with vice or with other defects.
CR5.2 The lump-sum in the milling products is performed by verifying the correct order of the signatures and the orientation of the booklets.
CR5.3 The loin preparation operations are performed by checking the depth of the milling, the correct application of the adhesive, and the uniformity of the spine.
CR5.4 The cutting of the product to be bound to the output of the three-way is performed by checking the absence of them, the status of the spine, the squadron and the perpendicularity of the cut, and that the size and margins are maintained in the allowed tolerance values.
CR5.5 The attachment of the inner block to the covers or covers is performed by checking that the absence or excess of the tail does not cause pockets, air bubbles or other damage.
CR5.6 The optimal speed of the machine is maintained throughout the run, correcting the anomalies if any, by adjusting the required parameters in each case.
CR5.7 The bound products are arranged according to the instructions of the work order by placing on pallets and identifying themselves by means of labels and carnets according to the instructions of the work order, avoiding stops in production and facilitating the control of production.
CR5.8 The handling operations of the rustic and hardcover lines are carried out by applying the safety standards specified in the plan for the prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.
CR5.9 The waste produced in the workplace is deposited in the places foreseen in the plan of prevention and environmental protection established by the company.
CR5.10 All operations are coordinated with the workgroup that operates on the production line to ensure process continuity and the results set on the work order.
RP6: Perform quality controls during the run, correcting the observed defects to achieve product uniformity with the established quality criteria and recording the work data that contributes to the production control.
CR6.1 Quality control is performed according to the frequency established by the company and with the appropriate measurement elements, following the instructions of the work order, guaranteeing the uniformity of the results throughout the run.
CR6.2 The bound product is controlled by ensuring the correct position of the cover or the cover with the interior and verifying the absence of stains, scratches and tail debris both outside and inside, checking that the product is compact.
CR6.3 The paperback product is controlled by verifying that the courtesy of the covers are at a distance and with the correct pressure.
CR6.4 The hard-cap bound product is controlled by verifying the size of the eyebrow, placing the guards, and that the lids enter the cap.
CR6.5 The size of the eyebrow or flaps is controlled by checking its centering and rectitude by ensuring that it is maintained in the values set on the work order and within the permitted tolerances.
CR6.6 Production data such as: quality controls, quantity of bound copies, production times, machine, type of stop, incidents and others are recorded in the document enabled by the company in order to contribute to the control of production plans and cost control.
RP7: Perform the first level maintenance of the hardcover and hardcover lines, according to the technical instructions of the lines and working protocols established by the company, to keep them in optimal operating and safety conditions.
CR7.1 The periodic greasing is performed according to the manufacturer's instructions for the hardcover and hardcover lines.
CR7.2 The operation of air circuits and filters is verified according to established working protocols.
CR7.3 The adhesive deposits are cleaned according to the established maintenance plan or when impurities are detected that prevent good adhesion or application of the adhesive.
CR7.4 The trilateral cutting module is cleaned daily to prevent the accumulation of environmental dust and paper waste.
CR7.5 The components of the hardcover and hardcover lines are maintained at the cleaning levels defined in the maintenance plan established by the company.
CR7.6 The safety devices of the lines and auxiliary equipment for the use of hard cover and hardcover are checked and maintained in accordance with the current risk prevention plan.
CR7.7 The actions set forth in the first level maintenance plan are performed according to the defined periodicity and recording the required data in the enabled documents.
Professional context:
Production media:
milling machines. Rustic line. Hardcover line. Trilateral. Stacker. Flejador-atadoras. Computer control means. Measuring instruments: meter, flexometer. Waste containers.
Products and results:
Set to point of the milling machine. Setting of the line of rustic and of the auxiliary equipment of the same. Set to the point of the hardcover line and the auxiliary equipment of the same. First level cleaning and maintenance of the lines. Books and other finished products. Palletizing of finished products.
Information used or generated:
Work Order. Model or model. Manuals of the manufacturer of the machine. Document with the process quality parameters. Quality procedures defined by the company. Technical information sheet of the materials used. Technical documentation of the lines of rustic and hard cover and of the auxiliary equipment. Plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection. Quality Standards. Production control documents. Record of maintenance data.
FORMATIVE MODULE 1: PROCESSES IN GRAPHIC ARTS
Level: 2
Code: MF0200_2
Associated with UC: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity
Duration: 120 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Analyze the entire graphical process and its different phases: preprint, print and post-pressure, considering the communication between them using standardization models.
CE1.1 Explain the characteristics and configuration of companies according to the production phase.
CE1.2 From a graphical product, describe through workflows the sequence of tasks or operations in a supposed production environment.
CE1.3 Analyze, from the design point of view, the characteristics of a given process:
Formats and measures.
Typology.
Colors.
Media.
Encuadernacion and Finishing.
CE1.4 From a given product, relate and sequence the different preprint phases that have been involved in its elaboration:
Text: body, family, style, paragraph, interline.
Frames: linearature, point shape, and angulation.
Separation of colors.
Plot and layout systems used.
CE1.5 From a given product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:
Type of media used.
Inks: classes and layers.
Tramado.
The character profile.
Footprint or relief on support.
Defects in printing.
Number of passes on machines.
CE1.6 Analyze the different preprint, printing and post-pressure systems, describing and relating their main phases to machines, equipment, raw materials and products.
CE1.7 Describe the most significant electronic printing systems.
C2: Classify graphic products according to their composition and functional characteristics: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.
CE2.1 Explain the characteristics of the different graphic products.
CE2.2 Analyze the structural characteristics of the different graphic products.
CE2.3 From graphic product samples:
Assess the communicative and functional capacity of different graphic products.
Analyze your physicochemical composition and identify your functional capacity.
C3: Recognize and analyze the parameters and measures of color used in graphic arts.
CE3.1 Describe the chromatic spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab.
CE3.2 Describe the measuring devices used in the colour: colorimeter, glinometer, spectrophotometer.
CE3.3 Describe the various lighting sources, color temperature, and observation conditions.
CE3.4 From color samples:
Identify color parameters: brightness, saturation, tone, and metamery index.
Represent colorimetric values in chromatic spaces.
Evaluate color differences and their ability to play in the graphical system.
CE3.5 Handle the tools and measuring instruments: hygrometer, thermometer, conductmeter, precision scales, densimeter, viscosimeter and microscope, to obtain the values of: humidity, temperature, conductivity, density, dimension variations of supports, materials and raw materials.
CE3.6 Describe the measuring devices used in colour: colorimeter, glinometer and spectrophotometer.
C4: Relating safety, hygiene and environmental standards with operations that are developed in the graphical process, complying with the established regulations.
CE4.1 Describe and relate the rules regarding safety, hygiene and the environment, with the different phases of the process.
CE4.2 Identify the security elements installed in the different places and risk teams.
CE4.3 Using practical examples, identify the security labels that appear on the machines and products used in the graphical process.
CE4.4 Recognize the environmental documents and procedures applied in the graphical process.
C5: Analyze the process of quality control in a "type process" of graphic arts.
CE5.1 Describe the fundamental phases and concepts of quality control in manufacturing.
CE5.2 Describe a receive control process succinct.
CE5.3 Describe the instruments used in quality control: densitometres, colorimeters, control strips and production line control devices.
CE5.4 From a preprint test, and taking into account printing standards:
Perform the densitometric and colorimetric measurements.
Assess that the reproduction of the color range conforms to the set standards.
CE5.5 From a printed product, and taking into account standards:
Select the measuring instrument.
Perform the calibration of the measuring instrument.
Perform densitometric, colorimetric, trapping, sliding, and gray balance measurements.
Chromatic space.
Take action on the control strip.
Check the setting with the set standards.
CE5.6 From a product to be bound and/or manipulate, identify and evaluate defects detected in:
Format and margins.
Cutting marks.
Signals of record.
Signatures.
Fibre Sense.
Repainted.
Troquels.
CE5.7 Describe the most significant quality features of the products:
Framing and manipulated: subjective assessment, cut marks, footprints, signs of registration, gluing.
Resistance to folding.
Resistance to rub.
Printing: density, trapping, stamping gain, color balance, pasting, sliding, recording.
Preprint: tests, standards.
CE5.8 Check the final status of the form and relate it to the specifications of the manipulated.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.1; C5 with respect to CE5.1, CE5.2.
Other capabilities:
Take responsibility for the work you develop.
Demonstrate some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.
Respect the company's internal rules and procedures.
Contents:
1. Graphical process
Types of graphic products.
Company types: organization and structure.
Standardization and communication models. Workflows.
Preprint systems. Classes of originals. Latent image and revealed processes.
Input peripherals, output peripherals, specific software and hardware, processing and test systems.
Plotting and mounting. Elements of the assembly. Specific software.
Print systems. Equipment, performance, comparison of different systems.
Types of inks and supports for each printing system.
Encuaderation. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.
Paper and paperboard manipulated. Manipulated from other materials.
2. Colour and its measurement
Nature of light.
electromagnetic spectrum.
Philosophy of vision.
Chromatic space.
Factors that affect color perception.
Color Theory. Additive and subtractive synthesis of the color.
Color rendering systems: Munsell, RGB, HSL, HSV, Pantone, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.
Color measurement instruments: densitometres, colorimeters, glinometers, and spectrophotometers. Colour assessment.
3. Safety, hygiene and the environment
Safety plans and regulations.
Rules in force.
Signals and alarms.
Environmental regulations.
4. Quality in processes
More characteristic tests, instruments and measurements.
Preprint quality: point gain, gray balance, and density.
Print variables (print density, contrast, contrast, penetration, fixed, stamping gain, color and gray balance).
Control patches in print. Measurement.
Quality in post-pressure.
Visual control of binding and manipulated.
Checking for bound and manipulated defects.
5. Quality control
Quality in manufacturing.
Quality control. Concepts involved.
Control elements.
Phases of control: receipt of materials, processes and products.
ISO and UNE rules.
Standards and standards published by AENOR committee 54 relating to the graphical process
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of 2 m2/pupil.
60 m trial lab2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to graphic arts processes, which will be accredited by one of the following ways:
Academic training of Licentiated or Engineer or others of equal level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 2: SUBJECTS AND PRODUCTS FOR BINDING
Level: 2
Code: MF0691_2
Associated with UC: Preparing raw materials and auxiliary products for binding
Duration: 90 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Interpret work orders for the preparation of raw materials, to perform the work with quality and productivity criteria.
CE1.1 In a practical scenario, interpret work orders relating the technical and production information to the preparation of the raw materials and the auxiliary equipment to be used:
Carretillas.
Ators.
Seal.
Pallets.
Boxes.
Binding to binding.
Raw materials for different binding trains.
Auxiliary elements of the machines.
CE1.2 Perform a sequencing of the binding process by interpreting a type work order.
CE1.3 In a practical scenario, starting from the model, test or any other product that serves as a model, contrast the indications of the work order with these models.
CE1.4 Starting from the model, test or any other product that serves as a model, identify the raw materials and auxiliary products according to the directions of the work order.
C2: Analyze the printed sheets with respect to their quality in the binding processes.
CE2.1 Perform actual printed sheet measurements of the following properties, handling the corresponding measuring devices:
Statement of the specification.
Resistance to folding.
Moisture from paper.
CE2.2 With real printed sheets check quality in the following aspects:
The foliation.
Plotted.
Record.
Specific measures.
Repines.
Aguacero.
Resistance to folding.
Fibre Sense.
Break in folding.
CE2.3 Detect, in real printed samples, defects that occurred in printing, using a spin with defective folds.
C3: Prepare raw materials and auxiliary products for a binding process.
CE3.1 In a practical scenario, prepare raw materials and auxiliary products according to a real work order, checking their quantity and quality.
CE3.2 Interpreting working methods, taken from the reality of a company, on handling raw materials and auxiliary binding products.
CE3.3 Pillar the raw materials and auxiliary products and manipulate them according to the working methods established to ensure their entry and pass through the different machines that configure the binding processes.
CE3.4 Identify established safety standards to stack raw materials and auxiliary equipment in a binding company.
CE3.5 Analyze the characteristic storage process of the binding companies.
CE3.6 Relate materials with the procedures and conditions that your storage requires.
C4: Evaluate the characteristics of the quality variables of the raw materials, using the appropriate instruments.
CE4.1 Relate the durability and behavior of the different supports used in binding with the alterations that these suffer because of the humidity and temperature, the storage and the direction of the fiber.
CE4.2 Relate the durability and behavior of the different chemicals used in binding with the alterations that they suffer because of: temperature, humidity, composition, oxidation and light.
CE4.3 To differentiate the characteristics and functioning of the measuring instruments used for the quality control of raw materials.
CE4.4 From a practical case of a test, handle the useful and measuring instruments: hygrometer, thermometer, balance of precision, viscosimeter, microscope, to obtain the values of humidity, pressure, density, variations of dimension of supports, materials and raw materials, expressing correctly the results of the measures.
CE4.5 Check that the properties of the different raw materials used in the binding processes are in line with the characteristics of the materials to be bound and the final result for which they are intended.
Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.1; C3 with respect to CE3.1 and CE3.3.
Other capabilities:
Take responsibility for the work you develop.
Respect the company's internal rules and procedures.
Habit to the business rhythm of the company.
Contents
1. Binding raw materials
Plotted: classes and features.
Standard specifications of the pleadings.
With respect to the printed sheets for binding: repines and water.
Resistance to folding.
Fibre Sense.
Break in folding.
Queues.
Barnices.
Wire.
Threads.
2. Packaging and storage in binding
Storage conditions. Temperature and humidity.
Automatic storage systems.
Stacked. Carcloths.
Ators: operation and handling.
Seal: Types and Placement.
Pallets: placement and handling.
Boxes: types, material utilization.
Retracter: handling and utilization.
3. Auxiliary elements of machines
Encuaderation. Benefits.
Types of machines for the binding process.
Components of the machines.
Auxiliary machines of the machines.
Guillotines.
4. Quality control of binding raw materials
Quality of the printed.
Viscosity control.
Drying times.
Resistance to the rub and scratches of varnishes and tails.
More characteristic tests and measurements.
Measuring devices: gyrometer, flexometer, gage, micrometer, thermometer and viscosimeter.
Training context parameters
Spaces and installations
60 m trial lab2.
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil
Professional profile of the trainer
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to raw materials and products used in graphic arts, which shall be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Licentiated or Engineer or others of equal level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 3: CLOTHING AND STAMPING OF COVERS FOR INDUSTRIAL BINDING
Level: 2
Code: MF1350_2
Associated with UC: Confect and Stamp Industrial Binding Caps
Duration: 90 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: To regulate the mechanisms of maneuver, service and start up of machines for the manufacture of tapas, adapting them to the type of work and the materials to be used.
CE1.1 Relate each of the mechanisms and elements that make up the tapas-making machine with the function they perform in the production process.
CE1.2. To relate the mechanisms of maneuver, service and commissioning of the machines for the manufacture of caps with the types of materials and type of product to be obtained.
CE1.3 On a machine type of tapas clothing, and given a work order properly characterized:
Interpret the technical specifications of the work order for the preparation of the different machine elements and mechanisms.
Consider the characteristics of the materials supplied and their impact on the adjustments of the different mechanisms of the machine.
Introduce the cap and loin measurement parameters, taking into account the inner block of the book and the model.
Regulate the elements of the carton and loins board introducer body and cover material.
Place the rubber on the engine cylinder in the correct queue application position.
Adjust the density, quantity, and temperature of the adhesive and the pressure mechanisms to secure the glue
Prepare the stacking and output system elements and mechanisms.
C2: Make the clothing of tapas, according to the instructions of a given work order, carrying out the necessary quality controls and respecting the current safety regulations.
CE2.1. To relate the various methods of making tapas with the types of products to be obtained.
CE2.2 Describe defects that can occur in a tapas-making process.
CE2.3 Relate materials used in the manufacture of lids: cartons for planes and loins, cover material and adhesives.
CE2.4 Describe the measurement procedures of the lids-making material by means of the most common measuring equipment: flexometer, gauge and others.
CE2.5 In a practical case, duly characterized by a given work order, of tapas clothing:
Perform the spin by controlling the stability of the established quality parameters.
Perform quality control in process, checking: the correct location and focus of texts and images on the back, front cover and back cover; the correct fixing of the cover material to the planes and lomeras, without wrinkles or airbags; the correct cap play and the correct bending and sticking of the tips.
To deposit the waste produced in the planned places according to an established plan of prevention and environmental protection.
Register the results of the controls in the enabled documents.
Place the tops made in pallets, preventing their deterioration.
Place the identification cards in the pallets.
Operate on the tapas-making machines in compliance with the established safety standards.
C3: Regulate the mechanisms of maneuver, service and start up of the stamping machines, adapting them to the type of work and the materials to be used.
CE3.1 Relate the mechanisms of maneuver, service and commissioning to operate, which constitute the machine of stamping of caps with the types of materials and type of product to be obtained.
CE3.2 Relate each of the mechanisms and elements that constitute the cap stamping machine with the function they perform in the production process of stamping of caps.
CE3.3 From a practical case of preparation of a machine type of cap stamping duly characterized by a work order:
Regular the elements of the cap introducer body.
Place the stamping film coil and adjust its advance.
Set and adjust the position and record of the prints on the stamping plate.
Properly adjust the temperature and pressure of the stamping plate.
Synchronize the pressure mechanisms of the plate, the cap feeding mechanisms, and the advancement mechanisms of the stamping film.
Prepare the stacking and output system elements and mechanisms.
C4: Perform the stamping of caps, according to the instructions of a given work order, carrying out the necessary quality controls and respecting the current safety regulations.
CE4.1 Relate the various tapas stamping procedures with the types of products to be obtained.
CE4.2 Describe the errors that may occur in a tapas stamping process.
CE4.3 Relate the materials used in the stamping of caps with the necessary application characteristics.
CE4.4 In a practical case, duly characterized by a given work order, of stamping of caps to a single color:
Perform the spin by controlling the stability of the established quality parameters.
Check the uniformity of the printing and the adhesion of the film by readjusting, if necessary, the pressure and temperature.
Register the results of the controls in the enabled documents.
To deposit the waste produced in the planned places according to an established plan of prevention and environmental protection.
Place the tops made in pallets, preventing their deterioration.
Place the identification cards in the pallets.
Operate on the cap stamping machines in compliance with the established safety standards.
CE4.5 In a practical case, duly characterized by a given work order, of stamping of caps to various colors:
Mount the engraving on the stamping plate and perform the first color print to record.
Perform the unmounted and mounted operations on the stamping plate of the engravings of the successive colors.
Perform the spin of each of the successive colors by controlling the registration of the prints.
Operate on the cap stamping machines in compliance with the established safety standards.
C5: Perform the first level maintenance of the machines involved in the process of making and stamping of caps.
CE5.1 Identify and explain the established maintenance instructions for the clothing and the lids stamping machines.
CE5.2 Identify the most common actions established in a first-level maintenance plan of the clothing and clothing machines.
CE5.3 On a type of clothing and lids stamping machines:
Verify and execute the maintenance of the security systems of the machines for making and stamping of caps and auxiliary equipment in the established safety conditions, obtaining the stop of the machines in case of opening of any of its elements.
Make the grease of the clothing and clothing machines, according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Check the operation and maintenance of the air circuits and filters of the clothing and clothing machines, according to the established maintenance standards.
Perform the cleaning of the components of the clothing and clothing machines, according to the levels laid down in the maintenance plan.
Record the required maintenance data in the document-enabled documents.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 with respect to CE2.3; C3 with respect to CE3.3; C4 with respect to CE4.4 and CE4.5; C5 with respect to CE5.3
Other capabilities:
Take responsibility for the work you develop.
Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.
Respect the company's internal rules and procedures.
Responsible attitude in the development of their work and unexpected.
Contents:
1. Process for making tapas
Tapas-making procedure.
Tapas making machines.
Materials used in the manufacture of lids.
Quality control in the clothing of tapas. Control parameters.
Safety, health and environmental protection regulations linked to the clothing of tapas.
2. Operation and handling of the cap-making machines
Elements of the tapas-making machines.
Regulation and adjustment of the elements of the cap-making machine.
Stacking and output systems of the cap-making machine.
Top-level maintenance.
Security systems of the tapas-making machines.
3. Process of stamping of caps
Tapas stamping procedure.
Tapas stamping machines.
Materials used in the stamping of caps.
Quality control in the stamping of caps. Control parameters.
Safety, health and environmental protection regulations linked to the stamping of caps.
4. Operation and handling of cap stamping machines
Elements of the tapas-making machines.
Regulation and adjustment of the elements of the cap stamping machine.
Stacking and output systems of the cap stamping machine.
Top-level maintenance.
Security systems of the cap stamping machines.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
180 m2binding and transformed workshop.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the manufacture and stamping of caps for industrial binding, which shall be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Superior Technician or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 4: INDUSTRIAL BINDING IN RUSTIC LINES AND HARDCOVER
Level: 2
Code: MF1351_2
Associate to UC: Perform industrial binding on rustic lines and hardcover
Duration: 120 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: To regulate the mechanisms for feeding materials and output of finished products in rustic lines and hardcover, adapting them to the type of work and the materials to be used.
CE1.1 Relate the mechanisms and elements of material and output power of the finished product in rustic lines and hardcover with the function they perform in the production process of binding.
CE1.2 In a practical case of binding a product in a paperback properly characterized and from a given work order, perform the following operations:
Adjust the material power mechanisms: interior block marker and cover power.
Prepare the stack and output system elements and mechanisms of the finished product.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the hardcover and rustic binding lines.
CE1.3 In a practical case of binding a hard-cap product properly characterized and from a given work order, perform the following operations:
Adjusting the material feeding mechanisms: interior block marker and lids feeding.
Adjust the add-on module, regulating the power system, the sizing system, and the pressure mechanisms.
Prepare the stack and output system elements and mechanisms of the finished product.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the hardcover and rustic binding lines.
C2: Regular the mechanisms for the preparation of the loin in rustic lines and hardcover depending on the interior block, adapting them to the characteristics provided of a binding.
CE2.1 Relate the loin preparation operations in books and other products with the inner block to prepare and the type of binding.
CE2.2 In a practical case of binding a product in a properly characterized milling product and from a given work order, perform the following operations:
Prepare the coleros by correctly adjusting the density, quantity and temperature of the adhesive depending on the product to be bound.
Prepare the lump-sum stations, cancelling the ones that are not to be used.
Regular the cutting, milling and brushing of the milling module.
Regular the adhesive applicators of the loins-sizing module in terms of temperature and fill level.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the hardcover and rustic binding lines.
CE2.3 In a practical case of binding a hard-covered hard-cap product, properly characterized and from a given work order, perform the following operations:
Regular the adhesive applicators of the loins-sizing module in terms of temperature and fill level.
Prepare the trilateral cutting module, checking the state of the blades, changing them if necessary.
Regular and adjust the preparation elements of the loin: block pressing module, loin heating system and pressure elements of the rollers, module to round the back and pull out the cab, if carried, and mechanisms for placing heads and reinforcements in the back.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the hardcover and rustic binding lines.
C3: Operate on the mechanisms of covering or tucking in lids, forming and finishing books and other products by adapting them to the finishing characteristics of a defined product.
CE3.1 Relate the operations of covering or tucking into lids, with the interior block and the characteristics of the binding.
CE3.2 Relate the operations of formation and completion of books and other products, with the interior block and the characteristics of the binding.
CE3.3 In a practical case of covering a product in paperback properly characterized and from a given work order, perform the following operations:
Prepare the mechanisms to perform the cover hovers.
Adjust the block pressing module.
Adjust the cover module and the cover the cap to the block.
Prepare and adjust the trilateral cutting module, checking the state of the blades, changing them if necessary.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the hardcover and rustic binding lines.
CE3.4 In a practical case of tucking a hard-capped product into lids properly characterized and from a given work order, perform the following operations:
Regular the back end of the cap.
Adjust the adhesive application devices in the back box.
Adjust the module into lids and the mechanisms for centing the cap to the back.
Perform all operations by applying the risk prevention regulations linked to the hardcover and rustic binding lines.
C4: Perform the hardcover and rustic binding, according to the instructions of a given work order, carrying out the necessary process controls and respecting the established safety standards.
CE4.1 Relate the procedures for the use of the products obtained in paperback and hardcover.
CE4.2 Describe the elements of the process that must be coordinated by the teams operating on the cover lines in paperback and hardcover to achieve the continuity of the process and guarantee the expected results.
CE4.3 Interpret the data needed for the hardcover and paperback binding specified in a work order, taking into account the characteristics of the defined quality control.
CE4.4 In a practical case, duly characterized by a given work order, paperback binding, and other hardcover binding:
Define the coordination of equipment required for both processes.
Use the most appropriate spin technique for the type of product and materials used.
Assess the first specimens obtained from the rustic binding at real production speed.
Perform the spin by controlling the stability of the established quality parameters.
Place the products bound in paperback in pallets, preventing their deterioration.
Place the identification cards in the pallets.
Operate in paperback and hardcover binding machines while respecting established safety standards.
CE4.5 Perform all operations by applying the rules on risk prevention linked to the cover lines in paperback and hardcover.
C5: Carry out quality controls on products bound in paperback and hardcover, visually or through the appropriate measuring instruments.
CE5.1 Describe the defects that can occur in the hardcover and rustic binding products.
CE5.2 Recognize the parameters of quality of the courtesy, size of the eyebrow, placement of guards or others, in processes of binding in rustic and hard cover, relating them to the characteristics of the product.
CE5.3 In a practical case, of quality control of rustic bound products, duly characterized by a given work order:
Check the correct position of covers with the interior, the absence of stains, scratches and tail debris.
Verify the position and pressure of the courtesy of the covers.
Check that the size of the flap is within the set parameters.
Register the results of the controls in the enabled documents.
Perform the controls with the appropriate measurement elements.
CE5.4 In a practical case, quality control in hardcover bound products, characterized by a given work order:
Check the correct position of the lids with the inside, the absence of stains, scratches and tail debris.
Check that the size of the eyebrow is within the set parameters.
Register the results of the controls in the enabled documents.
Perform the controls with the appropriate measurement elements.
C6: Perform the first level maintenance of the machines involved in the paperback and hardcover binding processes.
CE6.1 Identify and know the established maintenance instructions for the hardcover and rustic binding machines.
CE6.2 Identify and manage the tools and materials of grease, maintenance and cleaning used in the paperback and hardcover binding machines.
CE6.3 Identify the most common performances set forth in a first-level maintenance plan of the hardcover and rustic binding machines.
CE6.4 On a machine type of paperback and hardcover:
Verify and execute the maintenance of the security systems of the hard cover and hard cover machines and auxiliary equipment under the established security conditions, obtaining the stop of the machines in case of opening of any of its elements.
Perform the periodic greasing of the hardcover and rustic binding machines, according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Check the operation and maintenance of the air circuits and filters of the hardcover and rustic binding machines, according to the established maintenance standards.
Perform the cleaning of the components of the hardcover and hardcover binding machines, according to the levels set out in the maintenance plan.
Record the required maintenance data in the document-enabled documents.
CE6.5 Perform all operations by applying the rules on risk prevention linked to the cover lines in paperback and hardcover.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.2 and CE1.3; C2 with respect to CE2.2 and CE2.3; C3 with respect to CE3.3 and CE3.4; C4 with respect to CE4.2 and CE4.3; C5 with respect to CE5.3 and CE5.4; C6 with respect to CE6.4.
Other capabilities:
Take responsibility for the work you develop.
Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.
Respect the company's internal rules and procedures.
Responsible attitude in the development of their work and unexpected.
Contents:
1. Preparing the lines of paperback binding
Elements of the rustic binding machines.
Regulation and adjustment of power and output devices: block markers, cover power. Stack and outlet system.
Regulation and adjustment of milling and sizing devices.
Regulation and adjustment of completion modules: cover module and cutting module.
Top-level maintenance.
Safety systems of the rustic binding machines.
2. Process of industrial binding in paperback
Rustic binding procedures: rustic, fresh, stitched rustic.
Rustic binding lines.
Coordination of equipment in paperback binding.
Quality control in the paperback process.
Control procedures and parameters.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the process of binding in rustic lines.
3. Preparation of the hard-cap industrial binding lines
Elements of hardcover binding machines.
Regulation and adjustment of power and output devices: block markers, cap power. Stack and outlet system.
Regulation and adjustment of the cutting and tinkering devices.
Regulation and adjustment of the module in lids and finalization.
Top-level maintenance.
Safety systems of hardcover binding machines.
4. Hard-cap industrial binding process
Hard-cap binding procedure: straight back, rounded back.
Hard-cap binding lines.
Coordination of hard-cap binding equipment.
Quality control in hardcover binding process.
Control procedures and parameters.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards linked to the binding process in hardcover lines.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
180 m2binding and transformed workshop.
Professional profile of the trainer
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to industrial binding in lines of rustic and hardcover, which will be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Superior Technician or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
CDXXI ANNEX
PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: ARTISTIC BINDING
Professional Family: Graphic Arts
Level: 3
Code: ARG421_3
General competition:
To carry out artistic binding projects, to design and develop the architecture of the book binding, protective elements and containers as well as its construction and artistic ornamentation, managing the materials involved, giving a coherent way to historical and artistic work, applying both traditional and contemporary techniques and collaborating in restoration processes with their own artistic binding operations.
Competition Units:
UC1352_3: Define artistic binding projects.
UC1353_3: Perform graphic-plastic developments of artistic binding projects.
UC1354_3 Select, prepare and treat required materials in artistic binding projects.
UC1355_3: Perform and monitor the construction of the book and make the protective elements and containers.
UC1356_3: Perform the artistic ornamentation of books, protective elements, and containers.
Professional environment:
Professional scope:
Develops its professional activity in publishing companies and the arts of the book, in general on its own, in a workshop as an independent professional or in a cooperative, although it can also be an outsider. She works as a team or in collaboration with other professionals related to her profession. In public or private institutions, in the departments dedicated to artistic binding. Collaborates with the conservative and graphical document restorer in the conservation and restoration of books and documents.
Productive Sectors:
Within the publishing and arts sector of the book are in a small subsector of artistic binding, or are part of public or private institutions in their departments of binding or in any company of other sectors in which traditional or contemporary manual binding is carried out.
Relevant Occupations and Jobs:
Artistic bookmaker.
Luxury Encuter.
Dorador by hand or press.
Dorator of cuts.
Artisanal-Restorer.
Handling Cossor, by hand.
Designer of artistic binding.
Associated training: (750 hours)
Training Modules
MF1352_3: Artistic binding projects. (150 hours)
MF1353_3: Graphic-plastic expression techniques for artistic binding. (120 hours)
MF1354_3: Materials in artistic binding. (150 hours)
MF1355_3: Building the book and making the protective elements and containers.
(180 hours)
MF1356_3: Ornamentation in artistic binding. (150 hours)
COMPETITION UNIT 1: DEFINE ARTISTIC BINDING PROJECTS
Level: 3
Code: UC1352_3
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Define the artistic and technical solution of the artistic binding project, completing the document of specifications to respond to the requirements of the client, by assessing the formal, historical and aesthetic elements of the printed material or manuscript.
CR1.1 The document that collects the information necessary to elaborate the binding of the book and the container is opened by clearly registering the conditions of the order that predetermine the initial characteristics of the job.
CR1.2 The reasons for the assignment: functional, preservation, conservation, aesthetic or other, are collected in the document taking into account the destination of the work bound: bibliographic collection, a certain library or others.
CR1.3 The literary and historical data relating to the work collected in the text and its author are recorded, obtaining and adding the necessary documentation to facilitate the harmony between the binding and the text.
CR1.4 The typographical and compositional characteristics of the graphic design, the editorial and printing data as well as those referring to the format and volume of the text block are valued according to their stylistic characteristics and other aspects that influence the design of the binding, making a report where all relevant data are recorded.
CR1.5 The types of materials are valued and recorded in the specification document, noting their stylistic particularities and other aspects that influence the design of the binding.
CR1.6 The description of the illustrations of the work is carried out on the basis of its aesthetic and formal values, the techniques and the style in which they are carried out, collecting the data on its authorship and its historical and stylistic contextualization.
CR1.7 The stylistic and artistic study of the work is carried out, analyzing the historical context of the work, the stylistic characteristics of the time and the impact on the elements that compose it: texts, images and others.
CR1.8 The data on the technical characteristics of the work: type of paper, sheets and other faces, type of printing, size and volume of the block, nature of the guards if it is appropriate to keep them and others are recorded, describing the details and details.
CR1.9 The previous binding of the work, in the case of a re-binding is described and recorded, valuing for the later design, both the technical and the formal and aesthetic aspects.
RP2: Collaborate with the restaurateur in assessing the conservation status of impaired books to propose repair or restoration actions.
CR2.1 The materials of the book: skins, fabrics, paper, cardboard and others are visually inspected, observing the breakages, cracks, dirt and other damage and recording the incidences in a document.
CR2.2 The book binding is reviewed, determining the need for intervention according to the conservation criteria.
CR2.3 The research to be performed on the work to be restored is identified and recorded, along with the restorer, from the visual inspection of the work to be bound.
CR2.4 The restoration treatment assessment is performed, together with the restorer, by determining the neutral, innocuous and differentiable materials, as well as the techniques to be applied according to the conservation status of the work.
CR2.5 The cleaning treatments to be carried out are proposed, establishing the cleaning techniques and the areas to be treated, as well as the products to be used, based on the prior identification of the damage and the results to be obtained according to the criteria agreed with the restaurateur.
RP3: Determine the techniques, styles and materials of artistic binding according to the functional, aesthetic, stylistic and conceptual values of the project to be used in the construction and ornamentation of the book and the container.
CR3.1 The binding techniques are determined according to the nature and conditions of the order, taking into account the complexity and difficulty of its execution.
CR3.2 The definition of the construction techniques of the body of the book is carried out from the analysis of the material characteristics of the work to be bound: types of papers, sheets and other faces, size and volume of the block, nature of the guards, if by its value it is convenient to keep them and others.
CR3.3 The styles of binding and ornamentation are determined according to the historical and stylistic characteristics of the editing of the material to be bound: typography and printing techniques, style and techniques of illustration and others.
CR3.4 The styles and techniques of prior binding of the work to re-binding as well as its architecture and construction are valued, using them as a reference of the techniques in the new binding, respecting the significant aspects in attention to its historical and artistic value.
CR3.5 The technical and artistic guidelines for the development of novel or contemporary techniques for the construction, covering, and ornamentation of the book, of the protective elements and containers are established according to the technical and artistic needs.
CR3.6 Traditional and/or contemporary techniques of binding and ornamentation are selected based on the assessment of aesthetic and stylistic concepts as well as the communicative, expression and symbolic contents gathered in the specification document
CR3.7 The materials are selected according to their technical characteristics, quality and compatibility with specific styles and techniques as well as aesthetic and functional criteria.
RP4: Develop the budget of the binding from the technical and aesthetic characteristics of the work to be carried out and accompany it with the graphic documentation necessary to transmit to the client the concepts that constitute it.
CR4.1 The economic valuation of the resources required to perform the binding is detailed by recording all the items that constitute a cost in the execution of the project.
CR4.2 The cost of materials is collected in the budget, considering its quality, value or rarity and reflecting its economic impact.
CR4.3 The quality and degree of manufacturing of the binding, the complexity of the operations and other technical characteristics foreseen in the processes of framing the binding, are taken into account in the realization of the budget.
CR4.4 Temporary aspects: expected delivery times and an assessment of the working hours used in the construction of the work, are evaluated and collected in the budget.
CR4.5 The quality memory is drawn up by collecting the technical and material factors and their economic implications in the project.
CR4.6 The binding budget is drawn up taking into account all aspects and conditions, applying the corresponding professional rates according to them.
CR4.7 The budgets are accompanied by sketches in which the decisions taken in a first approach are clearly represented in relation to the material, technical and aesthetic aspects according to the concept of the intended binding.
RP5: To assess the need and feasibility of intervention by other professionals in the development of contemporary or creative techniques, determining their involvement in the project.
CR5.1 The binding processes that require the intervention of other professionals in the development of creative techniques, are identified according to the orders to be addressed, determining their quality and outcome.
CR5.2 Execution techniques are identified, specifying materials and products to be used.
CR5.3 The professionals who must intervene in the binding process are identified, according to the suitability with the processes.
CR5.4 The economic estimate and the execution period are requested from the professionals in order to assess their viability and need.
CR5.5 The intervention of other professionals in the processes of realization and/or ornamentation is concrete, establishing the criteria of intervention in each case.
RP6: Manage the documents generated in the different phases of project development, ordering the fundamental aspects: structure, documents, graphical representations and general contents for presentation to the client.
CR6.1 Reports and documentation such as photographs, infographics and others, provided to define, describe and illustrate the requirements of the client and the conditions of the order are collected and archived guaranteeing their correct conservation.
CR6.2 The sketches, sketches, templates, studies, sketches, photographs, infographics and all the graphic-plastic documentation generated or provided is collected and arranged according to its material nature, to the techniques used in its performance and to the chronological development of the work, protecting them with elements of protection and containers and, if necessary, applying the treatments that guarantee their conservation.
CR6.3 The model and, where appropriate, the samples generated in the quality tests are protected using the appropriate structures to the size, format and other material aspects.
CR6.4 The operations necessary for the digitalization of the information collected in the documents generated throughout the different phases of the project are monitored or performed, using a standard digital file format that guarantees their conservation and the appropriate accessibility in their consultation.
CR6.5 All material generated in the different phases of the project is archived by applying logical and chronological order criteria so that the result accurately reflects the development processes of the binding project.
Professional context:
Production media:
Questionnaires, tokens and models of collection of technical, formal, stylistic information of the material to be bound and its literary and historical context.
Products and results:
Specification document. Historical, stylistic and technical reports of binding. Outlines of the protective elements and containers. Determination of the techniques, styles and binding materials. Assessment of re-binding, restorations or repairs. Binding budgets. Estimation of professionals involved in the development of the project of binding and feasibility study.
Information used or generated:
Texts, catalogues and stylistic studies, and historical, monographs of artists of the book, specialized essays of typography, illustration, engraving and stamping. Manuals on binding techniques and the arts of the book in general.
COMPETITION UNIT 2: PERFORM GRAPHIC-PLASTIC DEVELOPMENTS OF ARTISTIC BINDING PROJECTS
Level: 3
Code: UC1353_3
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Carry out specific sketches and studies, using appropriate graphic-plastic techniques to define the structure of the book, protection elements and container taking into account the constructive, format and volumetric aspects of the project.
CR1.1 The outlines that point to the technical, formal and aesthetic concepts of binding are performed by interpreting and valuing the information gathered in the specifications document.
CR1.2 The particular studies of the details of the ligation and consolidation of the body of the book, the spine and the fastening of the lids are carried out by means of the systems of representation that ensure greater clarity in their interpretation.
CR1.3 The details and characteristics of the joint, displacement, and closure systems of the structural planes are described using the most appropriate representation system.
CR1.4 The drawings of the main views of the book and the container: lids or planes, loins and cuts; and those that collect the general aspects of format and volume are sketched using the appropriate representation systems that ensure clarity and graphic accuracy.
CR1.5 The structural and constructive details as well as the particular studies describing the constructive details of the container frame and the fixing of the structural plans are described by the representation systems that ensure greater clarity in their interpretation.
CR1.6 The outlines and particular studies are carried out taking into account the techniques of binding and the technical and stylistic aspects that reflect the conceptual, aesthetic, expressive and symbolic intentions of the binder as well as those derived from the nature of the order and the material to be bound.
RP2: Make templates and patterns by means of the appropriate graphic-plastic techniques, defining the textures, shapes and colors for the decoration of the book and the container adapting them to the formal and aesthetic values of the project.
CR2.1 The notes that define the general aspects of the ornamentation of the book and/or container are made taking into account and valuing the historical, stylistic, conceptual and aesthetic aspects of the typography and the illustrations of the text to be bound.
CR2.2 The notes for the ornamentation are performed by valuing the formal, volumetric and format aspects as well as the binding techniques collected in the previous sketches.
CR2.3 The topography of the covers and the cuts and, where appropriate, of the container planes are established by the studies and notes that define their chromatic and textural characteristics.
CR2.4 The particular studies necessary to establish the ornamental details are carried out with the necessary graphic definition to enable their later use during the processes of ornamentation.
CR2.5 The templates and patterns used in the ornamentation are made from the notes and particular studies by collecting in detail and precision the lines, planes and the shapes of the designs of ornamentation.
CR2.6 The materials used in the realization of the templates and patterns are chosen according to their adaptability to the surfaces to work, their mechanical strength and the ease of their cut so that they accurately collect the details of the ornamentation.
CR2.7 The formats of the templates and patterns are rigorously adapted to the sizes and dimensions of the surfaces and planes according to the proportions of the ornamental design.
RP3: Perform the final sketches by means of the appropriate graphic-plastic techniques, which define the concept and architecture of the book and the container establishing the formal structure, the ornamental aspects and all the details of the binding project.
CR3.1 The views that define the architecture of the book and the container are plotted using the most appropriate rendering systems, taking into account all the information gathered in sketches, notes, and previous studies.
CR3.2 The constructive and volume details are represented using two-dimensional and three-dimensional representation software that allow clear and precise representation of the elements.
CR3.3 The different graphic-plastic languages are used in sketches by clearly collecting the expressive and stylistic aspects of the work to be performed.
CR3.4 Final sketches are developed, collecting all the details and definitions of the technical aspects needed to perform the work according to the required binding concept and previously established.
CR3.5 The final definition of constructive, format and volumetric, chromatic and textural aspects is included in the design, considering the conceptual, expressive, symbolic and all other formal and aesthetic aspects of the work to be done.
RP4: Make, when necessary, the model of the book and the container, taking into account the sketches and previous studies as well as the supports, techniques and materials chosen to check their suitability to the needs collected in the final sketches.
CR4.1 The structure of the model is made to the size indicated in the sketches that define the architecture of the book and the container, respecting the volumetric, formal and technical aspects.
CR4.2 The ornamental techniques determined in the notes and studies of the project are simulated on the surface of the model respecting textures and colors as well as the shapes, lines and plans of the designs in the three-dimensional materialization of the project.
CR4.3 The changes and adjustments of the material or technical aspects of the project whose viability is questioned during the process of making the model are modified respecting the formal and aesthetic intentions of the project.
CR4.4 The constructive and ornamental details of the project needed to develop the model are displayed by the most appropriate computer programs that allow to observe the three-dimensional representation.
CR4.5 The solutions provided in the model are proven to be the best suited to the needs of the sketches.
Professional context:
Production media:
Instruments, tools and tools of the graphic-plastic expression techniques. Pigments, dyes, binders, solvents and other means of chromatic intervention. Supports suitable for dry and wet techniques used. Computer equipment. Three-dimensional design and design software (3D). Printers, plotters. Digital storage media.
Products and results:
Drawings, paintings, infographics and photographs. Notes, particular studies and templates of the ornaments. Final sketches. Maquettes. Sketches, sketches, views and particular studies of the book and the elements of protection and containers in 2D and 3D.
Information used or generated:
Texts, catalogues and stylistic studies, and historical, monographs of artists of the book, specialized essays of typography, illustration, engraving and stamping. Manuals on binding techniques and the arts of the book in general.
COMPETITION UNIT 3: SELECT, PREPARE AND TREAT REQUIRED MATERIALS IN ARTISTIC BINDING PROJECTS
Level: 3
Code: UC1354_3
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Manage a database on materials and suppliers required in the process of artistic binding to meet the needs of the project.
CR1.1 Search is done by contacting suppliers, exposing them to the needs and experiences with current materials.
CR1.2 Supplier information is classified according to the possible uses of the materials that make it possible to improve the product and facilitate its realization.
CR1.3 The information obtained through the most common means: computer, written and audiovisual, is in contrast with the supplier determining its usefulness and advantages.
CR1.4 Samples of the contrasting materials are classified and archived according to their possibilities of use in the binding processes.
CR1.5 The samples of novel materials are accompanied by a technical document specifying their characteristics, way of use and possible advantages of use in relation to other materials.
CR1.6 The nature of the materials, technical characteristics, evaluation of the tests, costs and suppliers are collected in a database, structured according to the most operational criteria for the management of the work
RP2: Perform physico-chemical tests on the materials to be used in the binding, valuing their behavior to guarantee the expected results.
CR2.1 The relationship of the support with different dyes is checked by means of dyeing tests, determining the most suitable according to the degree of coloration, anchored and resistance in the light of each one of them.
CR2.2 The materials are subjected to stress tests and elasticity capacity and dimensional stability in dry and wet, valuing their behavior according to their applications.
CR2.3 The cover materials are subjected to resistance tests on the surface of the surface, determining the degree of mechanical strength.
CR2.4 The skins are subjected to rewind or removal tests of the dermis, valuing the level of fineness that we can achieve and their resistance, and measuring it in the corresponding units of measurement.
CR2.5 The capacity of the different materials to the waffling is checked by subjecting them to different pressures, temperatures and degrees of humidity with the imprint of the same printer form.
CR2.6 The acceptance and quality of printing on different materials: cellulosic supports, skins, textiles and others, is valued by the test with different temperatures, pressures, gold and color films, determining the quality of the stamping in order to choose the most optimal.
CR2.7 The ability of different materials to admit embeds is valued by subjecting them to different pressures with other materials such as skin, parchment, fabrics, wood, metals and others.
CR2.8 The different materials are subjected to cutting tests with different tools and machines, valuing the capacity and the result of each one.
CR2.9 Adhesives are subjected to tests, assessing their behavior in terms of drying time, adhesive strength, flexibility, ability to adapt to different surfaces of materials, stability, reversibility and others, adopting environmental protection criteria.
CR2.10 The non-conventional materials to be used in the different processes in contemporary binding: cuts, dyeing, resistance to the rub or other, are subjected to the necessary tests valuing the results and allowing to check the suitability in their use.
RP3: Select and treat the materials used in the ligature and consolidation of the block of the book, protection elements and containers, according to the indications contained in the draft binding and applying quality criteria that guarantee the results sought.
CR3.1 The materials and products required to perform the body of the book are identified by the interpretation and assessment of the information collected in the documents that make up the binding project.
CR3.2 The selection of the materials is performed taking into account their suitability with the predetermined and experienced techniques in the project.
CR3.3 The cards and papers are cut, ripped and/or bent to the corresponding measurements taking into account the fibre direction if their manufacture is mechanical and ordering them in a way that guarantees their availability when used in the different binding processes.
CR3.4 The different adhesives: grubby, glues, glues and others are selected and prepared in the appropriate proportions to meet the needs of pasting different materials, or other applications and taking into account the specifications of quality, safety and environmental protection.
CR3.5 The papers are chosen taking into account their components and the possible loads, the gramage and the pH level, so that they guarantee their resistance and good conservation.
CR3.6 The yarns and twine are chosen according to their composition and coating according to the quality criteria that ensure good resistance and durability, taking into account the number of cuadernillos and the bulge of the spine to be achieved.
CR3.7 The threads, twine and ribbons are prepared by cutting them in the determined measurements, providing the required quantities in the different processes and having them in the right order to facilitate their use during the stitching of the body of the book and the realization of the heads.
CR3.8 The caliber and width of the threads, twine and ribbons are selected according to the nature and dimensions of the material to be sewn, taking into account the final thickness of the spine and depending on the sewing technique.
CR3.9 The non-conventional materials used for the construction of the structure of the book, of the cases, covers and containers: wood, methacrylate, cork and others, are selected according to the nature of their composition and other physical characteristics so that they respond to the conditions of solidity, resistance, flexibility and durability according to the plan.
CR3.10 All operations are performed by observing the safety, health and environmental protection rules applicable to the treatment of materials.
RP4: Treating textural and chromatically the materials to be used through the most appropriate techniques to adapt them to the specifications determined in the binding project.
CR4.1 The nature of the material of the guards and the techniques of colouring and pigmentation used in their performance are selected according to the criteria defined in the sketches, according to the formal and stylistic characteristics of the material to be bound and to the techniques of ornamentation intended to be applied on them.
CR4.2 The inks, paints, anilines and other colorants used in the pigmentation processes of the different materials are chosen, mixed and prepared according to the chromatic and plastic effects sought.
CR4.3 The aqueous solutions are prepared to adapt their characteristics to the dye to be used and considering the defined plastic results.
CR4.4 The paper pigmentation processes are performed using the bathrooms and techniques such as: marbling, combing, marbling, and others that guarantee the achievement of the drawings, textures and colors appropriate to the styles and aesthetics determined in the project.
CR4.5 The dyeing and/or colouring of the skins and parchment is performed taking into account its surface characteristics, grain, porosity and type of tanning, obtaining the colors, effects of textures and motifs indicated in the binding project as well as the aesthetic, expressive or ornamental purposes of the binder.
CR4.6 The operations necessary for the appropriate chromatic and textural adaptation of the surfaces of non-conventional materials are performed according to the functional, formal, aesthetic and symbolic criteria sought and established in the binding project and in accordance with the safety, health and environmental standards.
RP5: Select and treat materials to cover the book, harmonizing aesthetic, technical and functional criteria for application in binding according to project indications
CR5.1 The skins are selected according to their nature and origin, the quality of their tanning, their consistency, thickness, elasticity, flexibility and color according to the needs of the binding project.
CR5.2 The textile material is selected according to the nature of its composition and warp to ensure good tear and wear resistance.
CR5.3 The skins are cut and marked according to the appropriate measures to the styles and techniques of coverage chosen and specified in the project by performing the cutting operations so as to ensure the best use of the material taking into account the characteristics of each part of the skin.
CR5.4 The textile materials are cut to the appropriate extent according to the surfaces to be covered taking into account the direction of bending dominant result of their manufacture and, where appropriate, are reinforced with paper or other material in a way that facilitates their pasting and avoiding deformations and stains produced by the adhesives.
CR5.5 The alternative materials used in the covering processes are selected according to their nature and the qualities they present and according to the needs and indications collected in the project.
CR5.6 The metric and format adaptation operations of the alternative materials used in the book coverage are performed according to the project guidelines.
CR5.7 The edges and the different surfaces of the materials used in the covering are adapted in shapes, thicknesses and finishes to the surfaces and planes responding to the formal and aesthetic needs defined in the project, by liling them, lowering them, chiphing them and/or dividing them.
CR5.8 The materials used to build and cover the book are treated in a way that guarantees resistance to organisms that threaten the conservation of the work and protect itself in the environment.
CR5.9 The different materials and products used to cover are arranged in an orderly manner to facilitate their use.
CR5.10 The handling of the materials is carried out according to the labor standards of safety, health and environmental protection, guaranteeing at all times its cleanliness and correct conservation.
RP6: Prepare the materials needed to perform the ornaments in the book, protective elements and containers and have them properly available for application according to the design set in the ornamentation project
CR6.1 The skins for the mosaics and inlays are adapted in shape, thickness and finish by lowering them and/or dividing them according to the ornamentation defined in the project.
CR6.2 The fabrics and/or papers for the inlays are cut to the exact measure according to the ornamentation defined in the project using, if applicable, the corresponding templates.
CR6.3 The other ornamentation materials are prepared by cutting and adapting their shape to the indications collected in the design using the corresponding templates and patterns.
CR6.4 The altorrelief of the cartons to be used in the techniques that require it, is done by pasting on them cardboard of different thicknesses, depending on the type of ornamentation that they require.
CR6.5 The mordants and other preparations and products used in the ornamentation of the surfaces are prepared according to the appropriate processes and proportions.
CR6.6 Gold bread and colored films used for the dorar or ornament are selected and arranged for use in order and care and providing for the necessary quantities in the application of the golden ones.
CR6.7 The watercolors, anilines, dyes, and other colorant materials are prepared, in mixtures and proportions, according to the indications of chromatic ornamentation collected in the project.
CR6.8 The waxes, albumins, varnishes and other materials used in the polishing and finishing of the surfaces are prepared by mixing them in suitable proportions and following the processes that guarantee a good behavior in their application and the optimal result sought.
CR6.9 The pigments, colorants, films and other materials used in the processes of chromatic and textural ornamentation of the surfaces are prepared following adequate proportions and processes, having them in order and providing for the necessary quantities for their application.
CR6.10 The different appliqués and trimmings of the cover are prepared by adapting them according to the indications described in the binding project according to aesthetic and quality criteria.
CR6.11 The handling of all products and materials is carried out according to safety, health and environmental protection standards and are arranged in order to ensure that they are cleaned up in successive processes.
RP7: Manage, according to the needs and the indications in the project, the intervention of other professionals in the preparation of the materials to be used in the binding processes.
CR7.1 The needs and conditions of the processes to be developed by other professionals are specified, providing the necessary reports.
CR7.2 The professionals who need to intervene are identified, contacting them and requesting an economic estimate and execution period that allows them to assess their viability and need.
CR7.3 The graphical documents that collect the metric and format information, the textural and chromatic qualities sought and the different finishes as well as the necessary patterns and templates are selected from the project and are provided as documentation that will guide the development of the works.
CR7.4 The continuous monitoring of the phases of the work is carried out in search of a correct coordination between the different professionals involved.
CR7.5 The work is carried out by maintaining a continuous and fluid communication among the professionals that guarantees the adequacy to the delivery deadlines.
CR7.6 The results of the interventions of other professionals are controlled by checking the quality and the correct execution according to the needs requested and collected in the indications provided.
Professional context:
Production media:
Instruments and cutting tools, tools for rewinding and adapting papers and cartons, textile materials and skins, spatulas, pleadings, rules, punches, brushes and brushes. Presses, shears, guillotines, torcles. Cutting plate. Pesos. Lithographic stone. Capacity and weight measurement vessels. Calibers, pHmetros. Containers for mixtures, gold bread and colour films, waxes, anilines, pigments, dyes, watercolours and other colouring agents, solvents, and chemical products for the manufacture of teeth, albumins, varnishes and paints, adhesive materials and/or organic or synthetic products for their manufacture. Combs, sponges, brushes and brushes. Lijas, limes and abrasive products, lubricating oils and fats, fabrics and rags. Yarns, ribbons, cordels, cartons, woods, skins, paper, textiles. Printer forms.
Products and results:
Material and supplier management. Selection, preparation and treatment of materials and products of artistic binding. Structural, covering and ornamentation materials for binding adapted to their use and their subsequent application in the processes of artistic binding. Pigmented and textured guards. Physical-chemical tests and trials of tinting, resistance, elasticity and others in binding materials. Preparation of appliqués and ornaments of the ornamentation.
Information used or generated:
Manuals and technical instructions for the use and handling of chemicals, colorants and pigments. Machine and tool maintenance instructions. Safety, health and environmental protection standards.
COMPETITION UNIT 4: PERFORM AND MONITOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE BOOK AND MAKE THE PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS AND CONTAINERS
Level: 3
Code: UC1355_3
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Determine and prepare the machines, tools, tools and auxiliary products necessary to perform the construction of the book, ensuring its correct operation according to the technical instructions of the manufacturer and the safety standards.
CR1.1 The workshop space is organized by adapting it to the needs of the jobs to be run.
CR1.2 The machines are arranged to ensure their proper state and cleanliness to the correct development of the necessary operations in the binding processes.
CR1.3 The correct operation of all the equipment is maintained and reviewed, correcting any defects that can be presented in accordance with the technical instructions provided by the manufacturers.
CR1.4 The tools and tools are determined according to the materials to be processed and the processes defined in the project.
CR1.5 The various tools and tools are prepared by performing the necessary operations to ensure their correct state of use and cleaning, correcting, where appropriate, the possible wear defects that they can present and disposing of them in order to facilitate their use during the binding process.
CR1.6 The handling and handling of machines, tools and tools is carried out in compliance with the safety and occupational health requirements at all times.
RP2: To intervene in the restoration or repair of books of artistic or historical value, collaborating with the restaurateur in the execution of own operations of binding, assuring the integrity and quality of the work, according to the techniques indicated in the project.
CR2.1 The instructions that appear in the project about the restoration or repair techniques and the materials to be used, are proven to respond to the needs of restoration or repair of the book and the incidents are communicated to the restaurateur if necessary.
CR2.2 The body of the book to be reframed is reviewed, checking the correct pagination of the book and numbing the illustrations, photographs, maps, engravings, inserts and others that are not, recording the incidents.
CR2.3 The details of the construction of the book: sewing technique, characteristics of the threads and cordals as well as the lost or pending leaves of repair or restoration are collected by a scheme of quadrernillos in the sheet of technical specifications.
CR2.4 The rebinding material is disassembled by removing the threads, twine and tail, and separating the cuadernillos from each other, respecting the integrity of the work.
CR2.5 The body of the book is mechanically cleaned with the rubbers of different hardness and brush removed from the general dirt.
CR2.6 The broken or torn cuadernillos are repaired by joining and reinforcing the cracks, and reintegrating the support losses with the appropriate paper and adhesive, following the conservation rules.
CR2.7 The aesthetic and stylistic elements of the work are respected in all the restoration operations as well as in the adjustment that require the materials according to the artistic criteria marked by the restaurateur.
RP3: Build the body of the book, ensuring the solidity, functionality and final quality of the architecture of the book, by developing the techniques defined in the project.
CR3.1 The sheets or booklets that make up the book are raised in the correct order and checking the result of the set.
CR3.2 The illustrations, engravings, and any loose document or sheet that are not part of a ring are made possible by enabling their binding without altering the original.
CR3.3 The preselected respect sheets are attached by pasting them or reserving them for later incorporation into the body of the book above the previous cover and/or cover.
CR3.4 The block of the book is based on the pressing of the body of the book and is built on its case, adapting it to the format established in the project.
CR3.5 Sees or seam perforations are performed with the necessary tools taking into account the characteristics of the ligatory materials and the technique established in the project.
CR3.6 The leaves or cuadernillos are stitched together with the threads and cordals or preselected tapes following the sewing technique determined in the project and achieving, if necessary, the established bulge of the loin, and verifying its resistance and measures.
CR3.7 The symmetrical rounding of the loin is performed, if any, with the appropriate tools adjusting the cap to the needs of the caps by correcting it if necessary.
CR3.8 The attachment of the lids to the body of the book, in the encutated binding, is performed by adjusting the risclated cordals, the natural nerves or ribbons, fixing them to the lids with the suitable adhesive and avoiding possible protrusions.
CR3.9 In the cover of the technique of tucking into lids, the guards are attached to the body of the book and the cordals are pasted previously risclated to the back of the same, checking that no bulges are produced and verifying that it is well adhered and properly adjusted.
CR3.10 The loose heads and recording tapes are attached to the loin, leveled and reinforced by applying paper, tarlatana or other materials taking into account the fiber direction and the flexibility of the loin.
CR3.11 The heads are made by covering the core with skin, fabric and/or paper, or are embroidered directly or separately with threads, following the aesthetics of the project.
CR3.12 The union and consolidation operations of the body of the book, through other techniques, are performed in such a way as to achieve the functional, formal and aesthetic results determined in the project.
RP4: Cover the book and put in lids according to the style and technique indicated in the project to achieve its correct protection and proper mechanical and functional behavior.
CR4.1 The compensation of the cakjo and the canning are made with cardboard, paper or similar by pasting them on the lids, obtaining the necessary thickness to allow the lodging of the lids.
CR4.2 Thanks are done by cutting and sanding the inner edges of the lids in a triangular shape and beveling, if this is required by the work, avoiding the edges that in their use could deteriorate the material to cover.
CR4.3 The lids, in the covers by means of the technique of tucking into lids, are made by sticking the planes and the loin on the cover material, previously formatted to the necessary size.
CR4.4 The lids are covered with the material previously cut and prepared by making the turns avoiding bulging and deformations of the material in the corners.
CR4.5 The marking of the cajes, thanks, the cozies and the nerves is made by cinching them and adjusting them with the appropriate tools.
CR4.6 The tucking into lids is done by sticking the bellows canning onto the false cover of the cover by adjusting the three feet of foot, head and front, and press the assembly by consolidating the assembly and ensuring the integrity of the relief elements.
CR4.7 The step of the turns is covered with a card fill or similar according to the cover material and the shot so that they remain at the same level.
CR4.8 The trays are attached to the cajo, if any, ensuring the correct opening of the book
CR4.9 The guards, in the encrustnations, are attached to the contrapapa and to the respect sheet with the appropriate adhesive avoiding wrinkles, bulging or air bags, taking the necessary measures to prevent them from sticking to the drying and pressing of the book.
RP5: Perform and/or supervise the construction of the protective elements-cases, shirts, folders, boxes-and containers, meeting the needs and following the indications described in the binding project.
CR5.1 The construction operations of the protection elements: cases, shirts, folders, boxes and other containers and containers are carried out guaranteeing the solidity and strength of the result and respecting the measures and proportions in accordance with the material to be contained in the binding project.
CR5.2 The pieces of various materials that make up the body of the protective elements and the containers are joined together by applying the assembly techniques that guarantee the solidity of the result.
CR5.3 The techniques of fixing covering materials: skins, textile materials, papers and others are used on the interior and exterior planes, achieving a good slide of the book and avoiding the wear of the surfaces.
CR5.4 The hinges and other systems of rotation or sliding of the movable planes of the protective elements and containers are properly fixed achieving a correct movement of the plane.
CR5.5 The materials and techniques used in the finishing of the protective elements and the containers are used to ensure the consolidation and protection of the final work.
CR5.6 The appliques and closures are secured by ensuring their attachment and function according to the project specifications.
CR5.7 The different operations are performed and/or monitored for the achievement of a supporting and supporting structure that ensures the solidity and strength of the container.
CR5.8 The other materials are molded, fastened and applied on the structural planes, guaranteeing solidity and strength in such a way as to protect the possible content in terms of the characteristics of the same and the aesthetic, conceptual and expressive criteria included in the project.
CR5.9 The processes of carrying out the structure of the container are carried out in compliance with the rules of safety and occupational health of the application in the use of the various materials and techniques.
RP6: To manage, according to the needs and indications contained in the project, the intervention of other professionals in the process of construction of the book and the preparation of protective elements and containers.
CR6.1 The needs and conditions of the processes to be developed by other professionals are specified, providing the necessary reports.
CR6.2 The professionals who need to intervene are identified, contacting them and requesting an economic estimate and execution period to assess their viability and need.
CR6.3 The graphical documents that collect the metric and format information, the textural and chromatic qualities sought and the different finishes as well as the necessary patterns and templates are selected from the project and are provided as documentation that will guide the development of the works.
CR6.4 The work is carried out by maintaining a continuous and fluid communication among the professionals that guarantees the adequacy to the delivery deadlines.
CR6.5 The results of the interventions of other professionals are controlled by checking the quality and the correct execution according to the needs requested and collected in the indications provided.
RP7: Manage and evaluate the results of the work done by the internal and external professionals involved in the art binding process to ensure the final quality of the product and the fulfillment of the established or planned deadlines.
CR7.1 The control of the binding processes performed by professionals of the workshop itself is carried out by monitoring the correct execution and the quality established in each operation.
CR7.2 The coordination of the binding processes executed by professionals outside the binding workshop is directed in time and form to ensure the optimization and the outcome of the work.
CR7.3 Product quality control is performed by verifying the mechanical behavior of the book, the functionality of the protection elements, and the fidelity to the project.
CR7.4 The control of the operations, the quality of the work and the internal and external deadlines is carried out by checking the correct execution and the result sought in the time determined according to the indications of the project.
CR7.5 The errors or defects are corrected in case it is possible or the operation is repeated until the required result is achieved.
RP8: Develop new contemporary techniques of construction and covering of books, protective elements and containers, considering current artistic currents to respond to the artistic requirements posed to them.
CR8.1 The continuous update on new techniques, materials of use in the construction and covering of books, elements of protection and containers is achieved by direct contact with suppliers, publications specialized in paper or digital and attendance to courses, seminars and others.
CR8.2 The selection of the materials to be used is based on the results obtained in the tests carried out previously and considering their suitability for the required technical and artistic needs.
CR8.3 The development of new artistic currents and contemporary techniques of construction and covering is achieved from their research and research work.
CR8.4 Contemporary construction and covering techniques are developed using conventional or novel materials, giving artistic and technical response to what is established in the art binding project.
Professional context:
Production media:
Machines and art binding tools: presses, shears, sacs, mills, mills. Boards. Pesos. Serrated tools. Tools for rounding the back. Ligatory materials: strings, threads, ribbons, twine, tarlatan. Small tools: folding, rules, scissors, cutter, compas, squats, punches, brushes, lijas. Heads and tapes. Leaves of respect. Guards. Cartons, wood for lids or other, dry papers. Adhesives. Risclar useful. Lithographic stone. Cardboard and paper. Secantes. Cover material: skin, textile, paper and others. Chifla, caliber, wets. Closures, brooches of skin, fabric or metal. Hinges or other elements of rotation or displacement.
Products and results:
Review, disposal and preparation of machines, tools and binding tools. Preparation of auxiliary products. Control and coordination in the execution of the works: workshop staff and external professionals. Construction of the body of the book and the binding. Construction of protective elements: boxes, cases, folders, shirts and containers.
Quality control of the product in process and the finished product. Development of new contemporary techniques of binding that with classical or contemporary elements, provides an interpretation or expression of plastic, ideological or intellectual. Repair and collaboration in book restoration.
Information used or generated:
Project of artistic binding. Technical instructions for the use and maintenance of equipment and products. Safety, health and environmental protection regulations. Specialized publications of artistic binding techniques. Conservation rules. Record of repair or restore incidents. The scheme of booklets for the repair.
COMPETITION UNIT 5: PERFORM THE ARTISTIC ORNAMENTATION OF BOOKS, PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS, AND CONTAINERS
Level: 3
Code: UC1356_3
Professional realizations and realization criteria:
RP1: Perform the ornamentation of the book cuts with the techniques of gilding, marbling, coloring, chiselling, marbling and waxing following the parameters previously established in the project.
CR1.1 The head, foot and skirt of the book to be ornamented is prepared by referring it to the appropriate machines and they are treated to a satinada surface that allows the ornamentation, leaving the cuts ready for the ornamentation.
CR1.2 The block of the book is printed on the appropriate machine and with the necessary pressure, which allows the application of the ornamentation determined in the project.
CR1.3 The gold pan applies to the surface previously treated with the appropriate bite to allow for attachment and subsequent brung.
CR1.4 The chiseled is performed by applying the necessary pressure on the matrix to mark an imprint defined in low relief of the drawing, on the cut of the book.
CR1.5 The marmolate is performed by chromatically treating the book cuts in the aqueous solution, ensuring a uniform pressure all over its surface and protecting the block from the book with disposable lids.
CR1.6 The dyeing of the cuts is carried out by applying colorant elements with the appropriate useful ones, which guarantee the uniformity of tone on the cuts and which allows for their subsequent waxing and brunching.
CR1.7 The jaspeate performs by splashing or buffering colorant elements on the book cuts by achieving a gauge, shape, and density according to the preset results.
CR1.8 The finishing of the book cuts is done by applying a wax film on its surface and repairing it evenly.
CR1.9 The ornamentation technique specified in the project is performed on the edges of the book by applying the dyes, gold and/or waxes, or by working with the appropriate tools until the texture and aesthetics specified in the project are achieved.
CR1.10 All operations are performed by applying the safety, health, and environmental protection rules.
RP2: Perform the ornamentation of the cover planes, book protection elements and containers with the techniques of scale, incisions and mosaic, following the parameters previously established in the project.
CR2.1 The surface of the material to be ornate is valued and prepared by getting the proper texture that allows the fixing of the ornamentation.
CR2.2 The pieces of the template are positioned and imposed on the cover material, fixing them by removable adhesives following the design set in the project.
CR2.3 The pieces to embed are cut according to the shape of the template, of the different skins selected for the technique, extracting them for later use.
CR2.4 The selected pieces are embedded with the embedded mosaic technique, or are pasted if it is surface mosaic, in the corresponding gaps by settling the entire surface evenly.
CR2.5 The joint joints of the different pieces used in the mosaic technique are concealed by subjecting the two surfaces to pressure, brunited, gold or other treatments.
CR2.6 The ornaments with incisions are prepared by cutting the thickness of the skin to allow it to be emptied, according to the strokes marked in the template and applying tapapores in the cut that will moderate the absorption of the colorants of subsequent application.
CR2.7 The different metal, textile, leather or other materials are fixed on the surfaces, in the position indicated in the project, by means of the techniques and processes that guarantee the solidity of the result.
CR2.8 All operations are performed by applying the safety, health and environmental protection rules.
RP3: Perform the ornamentation of the lids, loin, protective elements and containers, with the techniques of gold and classical embossing following the parameters previously established in the project.
CR3.1 The surface of the material of lids or protective elements and containers is valued and prepared by obtaining the appropriate texture that allows the fixing of the ornamentation.
CR3.2 The wetting and fixing elements are applied in the previously marked pieces, obtaining an alteration of the surface that allows the embodiment of the ornamentation.
CR3.3 The recessed mosaic materials are embedded and fixed with adhesive in the empty spaces following the model and templates of the ornamentation project.
CR3.4 The irons of the composition are marked by appropriate pressure and temperature, defining the stroke and positioning the marking by using the templates.
CR3.5 The drawing of the drawing is done by applying the irons with the appropriate pressure and temperature and with the color film in the case of the gold or superimposing on the strokes marked the skins selected for the mosaic.
CR3.6 The leftovers: rebabas or out-of-line prints, are removed by making use of the right tools until you get a perfect definition of the ornamentation.
CR3.7 All operations are performed by applying the safety, health, and environmental standards.
RP4: Perform the kneecap that allows the identification of the book and its contents, applying the predetermined techniques that guarantee its fixation, permanence, legibility and the artistic style of the work.
CR4.1 The alphabet is chosen taking into account the size of the book, the typography, its style and the rest of the ornamentation, following the aesthetic criteria of the project.
CR4.2 The layout template of the letters is performed on a fine and resistant paper accurately and accurately, as the area where it is to be applied, with the right tools.
CR4.3 The area receiving the label prepares, smoothing it, bringing it with the appropriate tool and applying fixative products, if necessary.
CR4.4 The composition of the text is made on the basis of the alphabet, while maintaining the basic rules of composition and readability, and taking into account the guidelines of the project.
CR4.5 The composition deposited in the component is heated by placing it on a heat source until the required temperature is achieved allowing the transfer of the characters.
CR4.6 The book is rolled using, with the right pressure and temperature on the gold, colored film, or directly on the loin and lids, getting the text to be aligned, with well defined and perfectly readable features.
CR4.7 The fillings or burrs are removed by rubbing on the stamping with some less hardness exfoliating material than the skin to achieve good readability.
RP5: Carry out research and trials of new contemporary techniques for the ornamentation of books, protective elements and containers, considering current artistic currents to respond to the artistic requirements that arise.
CR5.1 The continuous update on new techniques, materials of use in ornamentation is achieved through direct contact with suppliers, publications specialized in paper or digital and assistance to courses, seminars and others.
CR5.2 The research of new methods of ornamentation on known or novel materials allows to contrast the results, valuing their possible use in future projects.
CR5.3 The knowledge of contemporary aesthetic currents is acquired through fairs, galleries, exhibitions, publications and other sources, allowing to assess their influence in our field of vision and its possible application in the ornamental design of the book.
CR5.4 The artistic currents are analyzed, valuing their possible application in the development of ornamental designs by using their own graphics of a certain style.
CR5.5 The application of the new artistic trends is taught about different materials obtaining novel products, valuing the difficulties in their realization and the results obtained.
Professional context:
Production media:
Guillotines, mills. Presses. Boards. Pesos. Dorar useful: wheels, pallets, florals, fillets, alphabets, components. Compas, rules, squads, lijas, punch, pleadings, calibers, scissors, cutter, scalpel, and other cutting elements. Stone of agata, brunidor. Brushes, brushes. Cutting plates. Croquis papers. Materials for the removal of leftover prints. Colouring elements, gold, colour films, toothless. Adhesives and fixatives. Wetting elements. Materials for the mosaic, parts for incrustations: skins, textiles, paper, wood, metals, plastics. Metal, textile, or other closures and appliqués. Exfoliating materials. Ovens or other sources of heat.
Products and results:
Ornamentation of book cuts, loins, caps, songs, turns and protective elements and containers such as cases, boxes and shirts by means of techniques of gold, embossing, classical mosaic, incrustation techniques and incisions as well as any other technique of ornamentation that with elements, classics or contemporaries, provides an interpretation or expression of plastic, ideological or intellectual. Composition of the texts of the kneecap. Rolled over the material. Research and testing on new techniques: transfer, use materials and methods of ornamentation.
Information used or generated:
Art binding project. Sketches and templates of the ornaments. Technical instructions for equipment and products. Safety, health and environmental protection standards. Basic rules for composition and readability. Publications specialized in paper or digital. Notes, images and any other elements that reflect the process of plastic and intellectual creation.
TRAINING MODULE 1: ARTISTIC BINDING PROJECTS
Level: 3
Code: MF1352_3
Associate to UC: Define artistic binding projects
Duration: 150 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Valoring different projects of artistic binding in relation to historical, artistic and functional criteria.
CE1.1 Identify and describe the main aspects that should include an artistic binding project.
CE1.2 Identify, in a given document of specifications, the sections to be completed when starting a project of artistic binding.
CE1.3 Rate the incidence of data on the purpose of the binding: functional, preservation, and conservation.
CE1.4 Analyze the historical and aesthetic literary data of a specification document, in order to assess the decisions taken on the binding work done.
CE1.5 From various artistic binding projects, duly characterized:
Assess, in the technical document, the parameters to be considered relative to the aesthetic, stylistic, formal, historical and other characteristics.
Analyze the sketches that have been developed to define the binding project, the degree of detail, the representation systems used, and others.
Analyze the design of the ornaments, valuing the sketches and the templates that have been developed.
Assess the defining model of the project, ensuring that the optical simulation is as close as possible to the reality.
Analyze the work plan and the professionals to intervene.
Calculate the cost and assess your suitability for the project.
C2: Analyze the material, technical and formal defining elements of printed or handwritten works to cover different artistic binding projects.
CE2.1 Explain clearly all the technical parameters that appear in a document of type specifications and that have a direct impact on the development of the project: delivery times, economic aspects, historical aspects and others.
CE2.2 Relating to the technical, formal and conceptual aspects significant of a possible custom, in order to adapt them to a project.
CE2.3 Point out the technical particularities of belonging to a given bibliographic collection or library of a work to be bound.
CE2.4 In a practical case in which the aspects of different works of artistic binding are analyzed properly characterized:
Identify the technical parameters required to perform the book binding and contrast them with the order conditions.
Identify the data related to the author, the editorial data, and the printing data.
Value the material to be bound, identifying the technical characteristics: type of paper, face, nature of the guards, size and volume of the block.
Register all parameters and features in a spec document.
C3: Analyze the aesthetic, stylistic, conceptual and symbolic elements of printed or handwritten works to find in different projects of artistic binding.
CE3.1 Relate the significant literary and historical aspects of the text of a possible order in order to adapt them to the project.
CE3.2 Recognize and describe the main formal, conceptual and iconographic features of given illustrations.
CE3.3 Identify the defining typographical characteristics of a given bound material, considering the elements of the characters, families, styles, interlinings, tonal value, tipometry, and readability.
CE3.4 Analyze and describe the characteristics of the graphic design to be taken into account when projecting artistic binding.
CE3.5 Identify editorial and printing data, and all those aspects that need to be taken into account for the design of binding.
CE3.6 In a practical case properly characterized and given a work to binding:
Identify the typographical characteristics of the text of the work, valuing its incidence in the binding project.
Assess the compositional characteristics of the graphic design of the material to be bound, making as clear a description as possible in a specification document.
Assess the illustrations contained in the work to be binding considering the aesthetic, stylistic and formal aspects, contextualizing them historically and valuing their incidence in the binding.
Analyze the literary and historical data relating to the work and its author, valuing the stylistic characteristics of the time.
Analyze the design of the work by assessing the aesthetic, formal and conceptual aspects.
Determine the documentation necessary to complete the information about the literary and historical aspects of the order, taking into account the harmony between the binding, the text, the illustrations and the design.
C4: To value the techniques of construction and ornamentation as well as the materials to be used in different artistic binding, taking into account the previous study.
CE4.1 Identify the constructive techniques used in binding, assessing their complexity and difficulty of execution.
CE4.2 Identify the ornamental techniques that are commonly used in binding, assessing their complexity and difficulty of execution.
CE4.3 Recognize the parameters that are taken into account when selecting the different construction techniques: type of paper, gramage, inserts, format and others.
CE4.4 Recognize the parameters to be taken into account when selecting different ornamentation techniques: cover material, functionality, format and others.
CE4.5 Rate the suitability of the binding materials given in relation to the different construction techniques.
CE4.6 Valorize the suitability of a covering and ornamentation materials given in relation to the different techniques of ornamentation.
CE4.7 Relating materials to binding such as types of papers, sheets and others, with the most appropriate construction techniques.
CE4.8 In a practical case properly characterized by different materials to be bound:
Assess the stylistic and formal characteristics in relation to the techniques to be used.
To evaluate the historical study of the material to be treated in relation to the techniques and materials of possible use in the work ensuring the correct interaction between them.
Choose and adjust the binding techniques to all previously performed studies.
C5: Analyze the conservation status of different books, proposing restoration, repair or re-binding actions according to the needs of the works.
CE5.1 Recognize and describe the deterioration of different books, protective elements and containers.
CE5.2 Determine the causes of each deterioration of each of the elements that make up the material to be involved.
CE5.3 Rate the status of different damaged works and propose the most suitable repair or restoration actions according to the conservation criteria.
CE5.4 Determine the appropriate techniques and materials to the requirements specified in a possible re-binding order properly characterized.
CE5.5 Analyze the type of materials that make up the book to be reframed by deciding on its possible reuse, and in its case the treatment to be followed.
CE5.6 In a scenario of re-binding, properly characterized:
Identify the techniques of the previous book binding and describe it in a document.
To conduct research on the work in relation to its origin and historical identification: year of realization, identification of style and others.
Assess the need for possible repair and/or restoration.
Identify the basic lines of the type of intervention to be performed: historicist, conservation or other.
Propose repair actions as well as materials and techniques to use.
C6: Develop budgets of different artistic binding projects based on certain technical and aesthetic parameters.
CE6.1 Identify the concepts that need to be taken into account to draw up a budget estimate and select and apply the appropriate rates and prices in each case.
CE6.2 Identify the cost of the materials involved in the art binding from different suppliers ' rates or catalogues, always taking into account the value for money.
CE6.3 Identify the cost involved in the development of different art binding techniques, taking into account the estimated time spent in the project previously defined.
CE6.4 In a practical case of budgeting, properly characterized:
Calculate the cost of materials taking into account their quality, using supplier catalogs and tariffs, and value the possible treatments of some of them.
Value the resources and means involved in the process including the temporary estimate of labor.
Consider the difficulty of implementing the project, taking into account the techniques, the materials involved, valuing their influence on the costs.
Consider the cost of the proposed binding style: construction of the book, tucked into lids and others.
Assess the costs of the book's ornamentation, taking into account the technique used.
Temporarily plan the execution of the proposed order, setting delivery times.
Make a number of proposals that clearly specify the differences in results between them.
C7: Archive, collect, order and preserve all documents generated in the different phases of the development of a given binding project.
CE7.1 Recognize the different file systems and conservation of documents generated in the development of artistic binding projects and consider the most appropriate in each case.
CE7.2 Collect and order following a logical system: type of binding, entity that performs the order, alphabetical order and others, the reports and the documentation provided to define, describe and illustrate the requirements of the client and the conditions of a duly characterized order.
CE7.3 Generate an appropriate database to the information that is managed by looking for appropriate accessibility in your query, and using the software that allows correct information management.
CE7.4 In a practical scenario given of a complete project of a binding:
To frame and archive the sketches, sketches, templates, studies and sketches and all the graphic-plastic documentation generated according to their material nature, to the techniques used in their performance and to the chronological development of the work; protecting them with the appropriate structures and, if necessary, applying the treatments that guarantee their conservation.
Digitalize the images of studies and sketches for your archive and consultation respecting the chronological order and using the formats that better guarantee their conservation and accessibility.
Protect the model, the memory of qualities and materials and, where appropriate, the samples generated in the quality tests, using the appropriate structures to the size, format and other material aspects and applying the treatments that guarantee their proper conservation.
Correct the documents that make up the budget of the job to be performed.
To locate the material generated in the different phases of the project in a space of the workshop, duly conditioned to its correct conservation and the ease of access and consultation throughout the work, guaranteeing the preservation of the documentary archive of the workshop.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.5; C2 with respect to CE2.4; C3 with respect to CE3.4 and CE3.6; C4 with respect to CE4.3, CE4.4, CE4.5 and CE4.8; C5 with respect to CE5.4, CE5.5 and CE5.6; C6 with respect to CE6.4; C7 with respect to CE7.4.
Other capabilities:
Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment.
Propose alternatives with the aim of improving results.
Take Responsibility for the work that you develop and the fulfillment of the objectives.
Contents:
1. Methodology for artistic binding projects
Order enunciation: needs analysis.
Physical components: form, technical and economic checks.
Contextual components: aspects of the cultural and historical environment related to the project.
Phases of development. Structure, specification document, client requirements, graphical representations.
Job Plan. Professionals to intervene.
Temporary schedule. Delivery times.
Memory Elaboration: Graphic Documentation, Cost Study.
File and preservation of generated documents. Digitisation of documents and images. Development of databases.
Data Management Programs. Digital file formats.
Graphic-plastic documentation file. Protection and processing of documents.
2. Analysis of aesthetic and stylistic elements of printed or handwritten works
Valuation of significant formal and conceptual elements. Process of adaptation to the project.
The technical particularities of bibliographic collection works or libraries.
aesthetic, stylistic, conceptual and symbolic elements of the works to be bound.
Literary and historical aspects of the text.
Formal, conceptual and iconographic characteristics of the illustrations in works to be bound.
Typography. Characters: the shape, parts of the letter, spacing, size. Families and styles: classification, function.
The text: the word, the interline, tonal value, the tipometry, readability.
Analysis of the graphic design in the works to be bound. Harmony in binding.
3. Assessment of construction and ornamentation techniques and materials
Analysis of the material defining elements of printed or handwritten works.
Valuation according to complexity and execution difficulties.
Parameters to be taken into account in the selection of constructive techniques.
Assessment of binding materials.
Analysis of the technical characteristics: type of paper, face, nature of the guards.
The size and volume of the block.
Criteria to be taken into account in the selection of ornamentation techniques.
Relations between materials, construction techniques and ornamentation techniques.
4. Analysis of repair, restoration and re-binding needs
Analysis of the conservation status of printed books or manuscripts.
Valuation of the material to intervene. Degree of deterioration. Analysis of causes that cause deterioration.
Assessment of actions to be undertaken: repair, restoration or re-binding.
Cleaning and rebinding processes.
Preservation treatments. Chemical agents and physical agents.
Safety, health and environmental protection regulations.
5. Drawing up budgets for artistic binding projects
Economic aspects to consider.
Delivery deadlines.
Indexes and rates.
Cost of the materials involved. Quality. Possible treatments.
Cost of developing techniques and styles.
Supplier catalogs and rates.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
Technical Classroom 60 m2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the definition of artistic binding projects, which will be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Technical Engineer, Diplomacy, Technical Architect or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 2: GRAPHIC-PLASTIC EXPRESSION TECHNIQUES FOR ARTISTIC BINDING
Level: 3
Code: MF1353_3
Associate with UC: Perform Graphic-Plastic Developments of Artistic Binding Projects
Duration: 120 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Perform sketches and sketches of the architecture of the binding, starting from the basic lines defined in the project, using the elements of visual language as well as the fundamental, two-dimensional and three-dimensional compositional principles.
CE1.1 Identify the elements that configure the architecture of a book and relate them to the fundamental compositional principles.
CE1.2 Recognize the basic lines of a container's architecture and consider the most appropriate representation systems for its definition.
CE1.3 Rate the use of sketches and sketches as successive phases that define the conceptual, technical and formal aesthetic concepts of the binding collected in a given token.
CE1.4 Perform particular and global studies that collect the key elements of the book's construction using the most suitable representation systems for its correct interpretation.
CE1.5 Make different practical cases to represent the most precise technical and stylistic aspects required of different binding and containers carrying out the necessary studies, sketches and notes and using all the elements of the required graphic language.
CE1.6 In a practical case properly characterized, make the final drawings for a binding, taking into account all the parameters previously established in a given order, contemplating the best adaptation to the formal requirements conceptual, technical, historical and stylistic.
CE1.7 In a practical case of binding architecture design, properly characterized:
Carry out studies that mark the general and formal and aesthetic guidelines of the binding to be carried out always according to the data collected and indicated on the card.
Perform structural and constructive detail studies by choosing the most appropriate representation systems and ensuring the greatest clarity of interpretation.
Represent the main views of the book and container by defining volumetric and formatting aspects using the most appropriate rendering system.
To project the defining general aspects of the final aesthetic aspect of the work with regard to both the book and the container if it is, using both the design language and the color as precisely as possible, searching through the graphical representation, a three-dimensional simulation that shows the final result.
C2: Create different artistic binding ornaments using the techniques of graphic expression and taking into account the basic elements of the visual language as well as the fundamental compositional principles.
CE2.1 Value the fundamental compositional principles of proportion, balance, reference, symmetry, harmony, tension and rhythm in given ornaments.
CE2.2 Make notes of different ornaments considering, valuing and relating the formal and aesthetic data collected in a technical document about the book and using the most suitable representation systems for its correct interpretation.
CE2.3 Define the basic lines, colors and textures of the book ornamentation representing the material, technical and stylistic aspects.
CE2.4 In a practical case of ornamentation design for a book and a container, properly characterized by technical, aesthetic, historical and conceptual instructions:
Define the general aspects of the ornamentation by pointing, describing the volume, the format and the technical aspects.
Determine the materials, colors and textures of the design for both the ornamentation of the book and the plans of the container.
Carry out structural and constructive details of the container if you have, choosing the most appropriate representation systems, which ensure the greatest clarity of interpretation.
Select the material to use in the development of a template, considering its adaptability.
Set precisely, the lines and shapes of the design on the template in relation to the design of the ornamentation.
C3: Build models of books and containers based on sketches and previous studies of artistic binding.
CE3.1 Describe in a concise manner all the requirements of the work collected in a technical tab.
CE3.2 In a practical scenario of a custom, properly analyzed and reflected its parameters in a technical tab, make the final model incorporating all the possible changes required.
CE3.3 In a practical case of making models and containers and starting from sketches and previous studies:
Interpret the sketches and studies that are provided.
Select the appropriate materials to perform the mockup.
Check, using three-dimensional computer simulations, the correct volumetry of the final object.
Run the mockup, looking at all the specifications listed in the technical tab.
Incorporate the necessary changes for the good performance of the model in case it is observed that some preset parameters are not optimal.
Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.5, CE1.6 and CE1.7; C2 with respect to CE2.4; C3 with respect to CE3.2 and CE3.3.
Other capabilities:
Recognize the organization's productive process.
Propose alternatives with the aim of improving results.
Take Responsibility for the work that you develop and the fulfillment of the objectives.
Contents:
1. Graphic expression materials and supports for artistic binding
Graphic expression useful.
Dry Drawing Materials.
Pigments, binders and solvents.
cellulosic supports: paper and other paper.
Synthetic, acrylic, vinyl and other supports.
2. Graphic-plastic expression techniques for the realization of sketches and sketches in artistic binding
The color in the graphical representation. Constructive, descriptive and expressive values of color.
Development of sketches and sketches.
Dry and wet drawing techniques.
The line as the configurator element of the image.
Constructive, descriptive, and expressive values of the line.
Development of particular and global studies.
Determination and development of representation systems.
3. Analysis of the structure of the image
Basic elements of the graphic-plastic language.
Visual field relationship figure background.
Organization of the elements in the two-dimensional space.
Organization of elements in three-dimensional space.
Strength lines and care centers.
Relationship between the structure and composition of all elements.
4. Book Architecture Design
Fundamental principles of design.
Basic lines of book architecture.
Project Language. Use of color.
Design and graphical representation software.
Analysis of the book: Typologia of architecture and historical and contemporary styles.
The book object of design, format, taxation, and documents and others.
5. Creation of artistic binding ornaments
Graphic expression techniques used in the creation of ornaments.
Fundamental principles compositional.
Defining the basic lines, colors, and textures.
Representation of material, technical and stylistic aspects.
Development of specific notes and study.
Determination of materials, colors and textures of the ornaments.
Template development. Design and materials.
6. Construction of model books, protective elements and containers
Interpretation of previous studies and sketches.
Selection of materials.
Three-dimensional computer simulations. Checking the volume of the object.
Product Optimization. Process of improvement.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
Classroom 60 m graphic expression workshop2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Mastery of knowledge and techniques related to the realization of graphic-plastic developments of artistic binding projects, which will be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Technical Engineer, Diplomacy, Technical Architect or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 3: MATERIALS IN ARTISTIC BINDING
Level: 3
Code: MF1354_3
Associate with UC: Select, prepare and treat required materials in artistic binding projects
Duration: 150 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Apply search techniques and organization of documentary sources to obtain information on materials and suppliers of artistic binding.
CE1.1 Identify the main documentary sources that make it possible to obtain information on binding materials.
CE1.2 Rate the most appropriate classification criteria for material and supplier information
CE1.3 Recognizes the capabilities of databases that enable the classification, processing, consultation and archiving of data relating to binding material.
CE1.4 In a practical scenario of finding data on art binding material, it is properly characterized:
Value the most appropriate sources of information: technical journals, Internet and others.
Perform the search by applying the appropriate selection criteria.
Organize a database of materials and suppliers, based on criteria of adequacy, both of quality and economic, in which information is collected from suppliers.
Perform a comparative supplier analysis based on the price quality ratio.
Store properly documented all the material samples needed for good information.
C2: Perform physical-chemical tests of different materials commonly used in artistic binding, analyzing their behavior and valuing the results obtained.
CE2.1 Identify the parameters to be checked in the materials, to determine their behavior
CE2.2 Describe the test methods for the measurement of the corresponding values: mechanical strength, stability, degree of fineness, capacity of the chipping and others.
CE2.3 Identify the equipment as well as the materials needed to perform different tests.
CE2.4 Perform interaction tests between support and color contribution elements by looking for a correct set of coloring, pigmentation and stability.
CE2.5 Analyze the resistance of materials: skins, papers, fabrics, cartons, metals and others, to the possible changes in temperature, humidity and light to which the book may be subjected.
CE2.6 Carry out tests on different papers and cartons by assessing their mechanical characteristics: loads, composition, gramage, acidity and fibre direction.
CE2.7 Analyze the behavior of different adhesives by performing adherence, drying, flexibility, stability, reversibility, and other assays.
CE2.8 In a practical laboratory case where you want to determine the behavior of the material to be used as a work material, evaluate the following parameters and express them in the corresponding units:
Degree of mechanical strength.
Degree of chemical resistance.
Versatility to treatments.
Sensitivity to interaction with other binding materials.
CE2.9 Perform stamping tests on different materials by applying color films at different temperatures by analyzing and evaluating the results obtained.
CE2.10 Perform tests on unconventional materials by assessing their stability, mechanical strength, adhesion, composition and compatibility with skins, papers, fabrics and others.
C3: Select and prepare the construction materials used in the process of artistic binding in relation to the techniques and characteristics defined in projects for artistic binding.
CE3.1 Recognize the building materials of books: threads, cordels, tapes, papers, cartons and others and classify them by their structure and application.
CE3.2 Relate the materials that appear in the technical instructions of a binding project with the aesthetic and formal values of the work to be bound.
CE3.3 Select materials and binding products by interpreting and valuing the information collected in the documents that make up a binding project.
CE3.4 Determine the suitability of given materials and products in relation to defined construction techniques, applying environmental protection criteria.
CE3.5 Describe the characteristics and manufacture of the various materials and glues to be used in an artistic binding, differentiating the quality, composition and manufacture of the different materials involved as well as the glues that are most suitable for each material.
CE3.6 Given a practical assumption of a binding project, identify the materials and binding products according to:
The information gathered in the binding project.
Their suitability with the default techniques in the project.
The nature of its composition and other physical characteristics.
CE3.7 From a given binding model:
Select papers and cartons based on characteristics that guarantee their resilience and good conservation.
Select the threads, twine, and tapes according to the volume of the block of text and the number of the booklets and determine their gauge and width.
Select and prepare the adhesives in the appropriate proportions taking into account their nature and characteristics, and the construction techniques to be employed.
Adapt the papers and cartons to the corresponding measures by cutting, tearing and bending operations.
Determine the correct layout of the different materials to be used as well as the order of use for process optimization.
Propose unconventional materials for the application of specific construction techniques.
CE3.8 From an ornamentation sketch and its corresponding patterns and templates, perform the relief of the cartons using the most appropriate techniques to the desired result.
C4: Select and prepare the materials to be used to cover books, protective elements and containers in artistic binding processes in relation to established techniques and considering the formal and stylistic characteristics of the material to be bound.
CE4.1 Identify the different materials used in the covering of books, protective elements and containers describing the most important characteristics in each case: composition, color, quality.
CE4.2 Perform skin marking and cutting operations in such a way as to ensure the best use of the material taking into account the characteristics of the skin such as spina, skirt and paw.
CE4.3 Perform cutting operations on textile materials following pre-established patterns and measures and respecting fiber addresses to ensure the best use of the material and to apply safety and health standards.
CE4.4 According to a practical assumption of binding, the covering materials are adapted in form, thickness and finish by performing with correction the operations, sanding, lowering, chipping and, dividing the material to guarantee a formal and aesthetic response according to the intentions collected in the document of the project.
CE4.5 Given a properly characterized binding project:
Identify the binding techniques that are proposed in the project.
Determine the materials of the book's coverage by assessing the technical and aesthetic suitability with the formal and expressive characteristics of the work to be bound.
Select the covering materials of the protection elements according to their optimal suitability for the project.
Select and prepare the adhesives in the appropriate proportions taking into account their nature and characteristics, and the techniques of covering to be employed.
Determine the materials to be used to cover the containers according to their optimal suitability for the project.
Determine and apply the preservation and preservation treatments of the material used in the covering to ensure its resistance.
CE4.6 From a practical assumption of a binding project identify and select the skins to cover the planes according to:
The nature and origin.
The quality of the tanning.
Consistency, thickness, elasticity and flexibility.
The color, the grain, the brightness.
The formal and stylistic characteristics of the material to be bound.
The ornamentation techniques planned for application in the back and the outer planes of the book.
The given quote.
CE4.7 To perform the different operations of handling materials under conditions of safety knowing and applying the current regulations.
C5: Select and prepare the materials to be used in the ornamentation of books, protective elements and containers according to defined techniques and specified parameters.
CE5.1 Relate the different materials used to make ornaments with the techniques defined in a project duly characterized.
CE5.2 Perform cutting and recessed operations of different materials given for the ornamentation of books, protective elements and containers according to the design represented in different templates and patterns.
CE5.3 In a given process of manipulating gold bread and color films apply preservation and order criteria.
CE5.4 Determine and prepare watercolors, anilines, dyes and other colouring matters, respecting measures and proportions appropriate to the chromatic indications and the quality criteria sought.
CE5.5 From a binding project to determine:
The skins, fabrics, papers and other materials for mosaic and scale necessary.
The operations necessary for their adaptation to the defined shapes, thicknesses and finishes.
The mordants needed for the ornamentation.
CE5.6 Select and prepare waxes, albumins and varnishes making the mixtures and operations necessary to achieve the quality and the correct adaptation to the characteristics of surfaces and materials to be protected.
CE5.7 Prepare bitrates and other products used in the ornamentation following the correct proportion and performing the appropriate operations that guarantee the quality of the result.
CE5.8 Perform mixing and preparation operations of colorants and other materials used in the ornamentation processes following criteria of order and cleanliness in the development of the different operations and processes.
CE5.9 According to a project of ornamentation given the preparation and testing of application of the colouring materials according to the indications to achieve the result appropriate to the aesthetic and formal criteria sought.
CE5.10 Perform the operations of preparation of products and materials for ornamentation according to the health and safety standards and respecting the indications of environmental protection.
C6: Apply the coloring techniques on different binding materials considering the relationship between the support and the ink, according to certain styles and aesthetics.
CE6.1 Relate the coloring techniques: dyed, skated, marbled, painted and marbled with the binding styles defined in a project.
CE6.2 Relate the colorant elements with the supports to be treated considering the suitability in each case, taking into account the drying time, fixed, resistance to the light and resistance to the rub.
CE6.3 Recognize the different compounds that dissolved in water can create an adequate bath for the marmolate technique.
CE6.4 Pigment and chromatically treat papers, using the bathrooms and colorants necessary to achieve with the required plastic correction textures and motifs sought and defined in a binding project.
CE6.5 In a practical case of colored and textured of different binding materials, duly characterized:
Select the most appropriate tools and tools for defined techniques and colorants.
Pigment and chromatically treat papers, skins and other given materials, getting marbled, skated and different dyed.
Value the results obtained, relating the colorants to the tools used in their application.
CE6.6 Prepare inks, paints, anilines and other colouring products by choosing and mixing them according to the ornamental indications and chromatic effects collected in a project.
CE6.7 From a binding project apply coloring techniques on lids and guards according to:
The color and textural characteristics of the plans and cuts of the book.
The techniques and type of binding applied.
The formal and stylistic characteristics of the material to be bound.
The adequacy with the techniques of ornamentation provided for its application in the interior and exterior planes of the book.
CE6.8 Make different baths for the marmolate, using substances that in dispersion, dilution or cooking in water constitute a bath that for its density, viscosity and alkalinity allows the realization of marmolado.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.4; C2 with respect to CE2.4, CE2.5, CE2.6 and CE2.8; C3 with respect to CE3.6, CE3.7 and CE3.8; C4 with respect to CE4.4, CE4.5 and CE4.6; C5 with respect to CE5.5 and CE5.9; C6 with respect to CE6.4, CE6.5 and CE6.7.
Other capabilities:
Recognize the organization's productive process.
Propose alternatives with the aim of improving results.
Take Responsibility for the work that you develop and the fulfillment of the objectives.
Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment.
Contents
1. Search and organization of the information of binding materials and suppliers
Main means of information of binding materials: technical journals, Internet and others.
Search and material selection criteria.
Material Classification Criteria.
Supplier Classification Criteria.
Databases. Benefits.
Vendor Analysis.
Material storage criteria.
2. Laboratory tests and analysis of material behavior
Test methods. Use of equipment and materials.
Paper behavior. Gramage. Level of acidity/alkalinity (ph), fibre direction.
Cardboard behavior. Gramage. Level of acidity/alkalinity (ph).
Parameters to be checked in the skins: mechanical strength, stability, degree of fineness, chifling capacity and others.
Adhesive behavior tests. Flexibility, adhesion and drying times. Durability. Adequacy to the materials. Adaptation to surfaces.
Material behavior assessment: mechanical and chemical resistance, versatility to treatments.
Coloring, pigmentation and stability fixation tests on the supports.
Testing and stamping tests.
Analysis of material behavior to chiflate, sanding, and recess.
Experimentation and analysis of unconventional materials.
3. Selection and preparation of building materials from the book block, protective elements and containers
Classification of protection elements. Structure and application.
Suitability of the materials in relation to the construction techniques.
Roles: types, composition and loads. Finishes. Availability. Constructive and ornamental applications.
Processes of adaptation and preparation of papers for use and conservation.
Cartons: types, composition and qualities. Applications, adaptation and preparation for use and conservation.
Threads, twine, ribbons, and other textile materials. Nature and composition. Coating. Sections and calibre. Strength and durability. Applications and processes of preparation for their use.
Adhesives: grumpy, glues and glues. Preparation process. Uses and applications. Conservation
Order of use of the materials. Optimization.
Non-conventional materials. Uses and applications.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards related to the preparation of construction materials.
4. Selection and preparation of materials to cover the book, protective elements and containers
Classification and characteristics of the materials. Papers, skins, textiles.
Determination of the materials in relation to the techniques of binding.
Skin selection criteria: nature, quality, strength, elasticity, color and others.
Skins: nature, types and origin of the skins. Operations and types of tanning.
Pergaminos: nature, types and origin of the parchment. Operations and types of tanning.
Skin preparation operations for use: cut, chipping, lowered.
Material analysis techniques, constructive and aesthetic applications.
Preparation of textile material according to patterns.
Adjusting materials to models and models.
Non-conventional covering materials.
Treatment of preservation and preservation of materials
Safety, health and environmental protection standards related to the preparation of the materials to be covered.
5. Techniques for colouring of binding materials
Characteristics of colouring techniques: dyed, patinated, marbled, painted and marbled.
Dyes, pigment, and colorants. Preparation.
Bathroom preparation. Features.
Chromatic treatment of papers, skins and fabrics.
Creating textural effects on binding materials.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards related to colouring techniques.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
45 m2artistic binding test laboratory.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Mastery of knowledge and techniques related to the selection, preparation and treatment of materials required in artistic binding projects, which will be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Technical Engineer, Diplomacy, Technical Architect or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
TRAINING MODULE 4: BUILDING THE BOOK AND MAKING THE PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS AND CONTAINERS
Level: 3
Code: MF1355_3
Associate to UC: Perform and Monitor the Construction of the Book and Make the Protective Elements and Containers
Duration: 180 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Value and determine the disposition and preparation of the tools and equipment of the artistic binding facilities according to the needs of the process.
CE1.1 Identify the tools, machines and equipment needed in an art binding workshop: presses, shears, mills, guillotines, looms, dorar presses, hammers, needles, blades, chiflas, grilles, pleadings, dorar irons and others.
CE1.2 Identify and know the safety and occupational health procedures related to the preparation and disposal of tools, machines and equipment in artistic binding processes.
CE1.3 Plan the installation of a workshop of artistic binding: tools and tools necessary for the installation of the workshop as well as the necessary surface and its organization.
CE1.4 Rate the instructions on the maintenance of the tools, machines and equipment set by the manufacturers in a given manual.
CE1.5 In a practical case, properly characterized in the provision and maintenance of an artistic binding workshop:
Determine the tools, machines and equipment needed to be able to develop the different processes of artistic binding.
Organize and dispose of tools, machines and equipment according to the needs of the work to be developed, considering the requirements that must be met in security matters.
Assess the conservation needs of the tools to keep them in perfect state of use due to the possible wear and tear of the tools.
Foresee a maintenance plan for machines and equipment, considering the recommendations of the manufacturers.
CE1.6 In a practical scenario, properly characterized in the preparation of the machines and equipment needed to develop artistic binding:
Identify and review the necessary machines and equipment, checking the availability and the perfect condition of the machines: presses, shears, mills, guillotines, looms, presses to sleep and others.
Prepare machines and equipment: presses, shears, mills, guillotines, looms, dorar presses and others leaving them in optimal conditions to develop the different processes in artistic binding.
Perform all operations by observing all security measures and complying with environmental protection regulations.
C2: Define a communication scheme to carry out work coordination tasks between different professionals both internal and external to a workshop, analyzing the aspects that must be interlinked in the correct achievement of the work faced.
CE2.1 Identify internal and external professionals who can participate in a defined artistic binding project.
CE2.2 Identify and select information according to recipient, needs, and functions in an artistic binding project.
CE2.3 Recognize the communication protocols and the correct adaptation to the work patterns to be followed by the different professionals involved in the project.
CE2.4 Ensure the correct transmission of information among the different professionals, always following the predetermined guidelines in the project.
CE2.5 In a simulated job coordination situation, within an artistic binding project:
Relate the different professionals involved, with the specific processes that they will develop.
Coordinate the different professionals involved in a project, facilitating the instructions that correspond to each one of them.
Establish a system of control of the correct transmission and interpretation of the instructions of work given to each of the professionals involved.
C3: Apply the construction techniques of the body of the book, ensuring the soundness of the result and responding to the needs raised, observing the applicable safety measures.
CE3.1 Identify the characteristics of the main construction techniques of the body of the books in artistic binding processes: stitched to the Spanish, stitched to the French, with ribbons and others valuing the solidity of the result in each one of them.
CE3.2 Identify and manage machines and tools for the construction of the body of the book: presses, shears, mills, looms, sacs, hammers, needles, blades and others.
CE3.3 Recognize the different materials used in the construction of the body of books in artistic binding: cordels, threads, paper, adhesives and others
CE3.4 Relate the most common tools, tools and materials with the different construction techniques of the body of books.
CE3.5 Describe possible defects that can occur in the construction of the body of books and evaluate possible solutions.
CE3.6 Describe the technological characteristics of the different processes of binding, of the machinery and tools to use, relating and correctly differentiating the steps to be followed in each process of the artisanal and artistic binding for its correct application in different works.
CE3.7 Identify and know the preventive safety measures related to the management of the tools and tools used in the construction processes in artistic binding.
CE3.8 In different practical cases, duly characterized, of construction of the body of books according to the techniques of artistic binding:
Receiver and classify the book or materials to be bound.
Make the union of the different cuadernillos using the prepared materials following the defined technique.
Conveniently attach the caps of the lids next to the body of the book, in the encutted binding, risclando and properly pasting the cords or the ribbons.
Conveniently attach the guards to the body of the book, in the binding of the lids, risclando and properly pasting the cords or the ribbons.
Reinforce, press and leave the body of the book to dry properly, preventing the structure from being deformed.
Guilty the body of the book leaving it to the necessary measures according to the instructions received.
Perform all operations by applying the rules on risk prevention linked to the construction of the body of the book, the protective elements and the containers.
C4: Perform the binding of loose lids or operations of tucking into lids according to the requirements of the type of binding.
CE4.1 Describe the operations to be performed for the manufacture of covers for the manufacture of the cover.
CE4.2 Recognize the necessary tools, tools and machines for the preparation of the covers.
CE4.3 Relate the different materials used in the construction and cover of loose cover of a book: cartons, cardboard, skins, textiles, papers, adhesives and others.
CE4.4 Describe the possible defects that may occur in the making and after being in lids.
CE4.5 In a practical case, duly characterized, of construction of loose lids and their posterior in lids:
Cover the lids and the loin with the selected material and prepared with the adhesive corresponding to the nature of the covering material avoiding wrinkles, airbags and stains.
Return the covering material at the edges of the planes and the back, cinching the edges and corners conveniently to avoid wrinkles and defects in the lids, using the appropriate tools and tools for each process by marking the franchise.
Join the block of the book to the cover by pasting the guards with the reinforcement of the back previously stuck with the appropriate adhesive to the materials used.
Pressing with franchise markers and drying the book to a squadron.
C5: Perform the operations of covering books, according to the types of artistic binding defined.
CE5.1 Describe the characteristics of the main types of binding in relation to the covering: paper, fabric, Dutch with and without tips, whole skin, parchment and others.
CE5.2 Identify the necessary tools, tools and machines in the processes of covering art binding: folding, scalpel, scissors, chifla, entenalla, brushes, rules and others.
CE5.3 Describe possible defects that may occur in cover cover.
CE5.4 Describe the characteristics, format, recessed, shithole, of the materials to be used in the cover of the book.
CE5.5 Identify and know the preventive measures related to the management of the tools and tools used in the processes of covering the book in artistic binding.
CE5.6 In a practical case of book cover, characterized by different types of binding:
Apply the appropriate adhesive evenly over the back by consolidating the seam.
Rounding the lomo symmetrically and evenly with the precise tool
Take out the boxes to the extent of the caps allowing their total opening and retaining the loin rounding
Check the measures of the caps and adjust the eyebrows if necessary
Attach the lids to the body of the book with the cordels through the perforations performed by avoiding protrusions and beveling the edges.
Embroidery the heads in foot and head according to the book covering the core with the selected threads and the required tension and uniformity.
Level the heads and reinforce the assembly with the appropriate materials and adhesives, achieving the surface of the loin without wrinkles or protrusions.
Build a false lomo according to the measures of the loin and the lids allowing the correct opening of the book
Cover the loin and lids with the prepared materials and adhesives by avoiding wrinkles, air bags and stains, and checking that the lids are correctly tucked into the box.
Perform the graces by marking them with the precise tool and shaping the caps covering the heads in full.
Cenir the false nerves by marking them with the precise tools.
Cut the laps to square and level them with the appropriate material and adhesive taking into account the shooting of the caps.
Paste the trays by cinching them into the boxes and paste the guards into the contraas and respect sheet without wrinkles.
Place the closing elements on the planes by ensuring their function.
Dry and press the book to squadron.
C6: Apply restoration techniques in the bodies of books with artistic or historical value, following the criteria set out in binding projects.
CE6.1 Identify the deterioration that may occur and propose restoration treatment proposals for each case.
CE6.2 Interpret the treatment proposals of a given binding project considering the type of binding to be performed and the particular materials.
CE6.3 Rate the need for a restoration and determine the repair treatments to be performed on several given books.
CE6.4 In a practical case, properly characterized, of repair of the body of book:
Check the pagination and number the loose sheets avoiding subsequent errors and faults.
Perform a bookcase scheme by scoring the details of the stitching.
Dismantle the body of the book by undoing the stitching without impairing the booklets.
Repair the booklets and loose sheets that need it, cleaning the support, joining and reinforcing the cracks and reintegrating the losses with neutral, safe and reversible adhesives.
Make the beetles to the loose leaves allowing their stitching.
Folding and cutting edges by adjusting to the set measures
C7: Analyze the quality of different types of binding considering the execution, the finishing, the adequacy of the applied techniques and the mechanical behavior of the book.
CE7.1 Identify the errors and faults that can occur in the binding and propose solutions in your case.
CE7.2 Check the correct opening and closing of the lids, and the stability of the book in a vertical position of different bound books.
CE7.3 Control the quality of execution of the construction of the body of a given book by assessing the repair of the leaves, the folding and stitching of the booklets, the symmetry of the canning and the choice and placement of head types.
CE7.4 Describe the different processes followed in the construction of the book and its binding, as well as the supports used, identifying the time of publication and binding of each work, the system followed in its preparation and the type of support used.
CE7.5 Identify the type of guard in different books by their nature and placement, and analyze their functionality with or without charters.
CE7.6 Control the techniques applied in different binding values by assessing their suitability and functionality according to the parameters established in a project.
CE7.7 In a scenario, from several given books:
Value the quality and correct execution of the binding by checking the absence of defects in the cover and the size of the eyebrows.
Value the finishing of the binding by checking the marking of the graces, the architecture of the cofias and the girdle of the nerves.
C8: Develop new forms of creative binding by applying different artistic concepts.
CE8.1 Identify new construction techniques applicable to binding, valuing their possibilities of realization as well as the tools and tools necessary for their development.
CE8.2 Recognizes types of novel materials that by their nature and structure are applicable in binding, determining their function in the different parts of the process.
CE8.3 Investigate the possible application of the techniques by checking the behavior, compatibility and stability of the novel materials and products.
CE8.4 In different practical cases, properly characterized, of creative binding:
Determine the technique to be applied, materials, and tools and tools necessary to develop the proposed binding.
Adapt selected materials according to the needs of the type and style of creative binding to be developed.
Perform the structure of the book with the prepared materials, consolidating the body and ensuring a stable structure.
C9: Build protection elements from certain specifications, taking into account the needs of the book and considering the functional aspects and maintaining an aesthetic harmony with the book or element to be covered.
CE9.1 Identify the process of building the protection of books in artistic binding: girdles, shirts, boxes, cases, folders and relate their structure to the parts of the book to be protected.
CE9.2 Analyze different books, considering their function and use, valuing protection needs.
CE9.3 Identify the safety, health and environmental protection standards to be observed in the process of building the protection elements.
CE9.4 Consider the aesthetic relationship between the materials to be used in the protective elements and those used in the construction and binding of the book that allows to define the plastic style to be obtained.
CE9.5 In a practical case and from a given art binding project, perform protection elements, taking into account:
Successfully perform the attachment and assembly of the pieces that make up the body of the protection element.
Use the appropriate adhesives to consolidate the attachment of the frame pieces.
Check that the materials to be used are compatible with the cover materials of the book to avoid rubbing, discoloration or marking on the book to be protected.
To fix the different covering materials: skins, textiles, papers and others, on the interior and exterior planes of the protective elements without there being a bad slide of the book, nor can the wear of the surfaces occur and taking into account the shooting of the planes.
Correctly fix the hinges and other systems of rotation or sliding on the protective element, ensuring their function.
Make the girdles and shirts to cover the exterior of the binding with the proper identification and protection needs and containers.
Perform all operations by applying the security rules linked to the process.
CE9.6 In a practical case of performing a protective cover for an artistic binding:
Join the side bands and bottom with the appropriate adhesive creating two trays to the exact measurement of the book covers and ensuring the strength of the structure.
Join and forge the two trays and the loin with the covering material allowing in plane and its perfect fit.
Perform all operations by applying the security rules linked to the process.
C10: Develop containers, adapting them to the document to protect, using strong, resilient supporting structures.
CE10.1 Rate the document to contain, considering its nature, structure, content, and utilization needs
CE10.2 Analyze the compatibility between the nature of a document and the materials to be used, ensuring that they do not alter it either physically or chemically.
CE10.3 In a practical case of container processing and from a given artistic binding project:
Prepare and intervene the surfaces of the faces views of the structural planes of the container by sanding, downgrading, recording and carving according to the indications of the project.
To make solid the union of the structural planes of the frame, guaranteeing the correct assembly of the various parts, and applying in its case with correction both the mechanical means: assembly, tying, stitching, diving, stapling, bolting and others, like the chemicals: resins and other adhesives, to guarantee a good mechanical resistance as well as its durability and functionality.
Make it necessary to mold plastic substances to shape the container using the pressure, injection or other techniques suitable for the material used.
Hold the mobile planes of the container structure in your case according to the joint systems indicated to guarantee their rotation: góznes, hinges, rings, spirals and others, or on which to achieve a correct displacement: guides, rails or others.
Apply carefully the antiparasitic and preservation treatments, the mechanical operations of polishing and sanding, waxing or varnish guaranteeing a finish of the surfaces according to the indications of the given project.
Perform the chromatic and stamping interventions, as well as the incisions and chemical or mechanical treatments on the materials included inside the container by looking for its consolidation and ligature according to the specifications of the project.
Perform all operations in optimal conditions of safety, health and environmental protection, avoiding any possible contamination of both the final product and the operators.
CE10.4 Track all operations and control the correct application of the techniques in the construction of a container, seeking the achievement of a supporting structure that guarantees the solidity and resistance of the container.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.5 and CE1.6; C2 with respect to CE2.5; C3 with respect to CE3.2 and CE3.8; C4 with respect to CE4.5; C5 for CE5.5 and CE5.6; C6 for CE6.2 and CE6.4; C7 for CE7.7; C8 for CE8.3 and CE8.4; C9 for CE9.5 and CE8.4; C10 for CE8.3 and CE8.4; C10 for CE10.3 and CE10.4.
Other capabilities:
Recognize the organization's productive process.
Propose alternatives with the aim of improving results.
Take Responsibility for the work that you develop and the fulfillment of the objectives.
Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment.
Demonstrate autonomy in the resolution of contingencies related to its activity.
Contents:
1. Preparation and handling of machines and tools for artistic binding
Main machines: presses, shears, sacs, mills, mills.
Elements of the machines. Features.
Main tools used: cutting, measuring, folding and bending, pressure, percussion and others.
Organization and arrangement of machines and tools in the workshop of artistic binding.
Regulation of the elements of the machines that require it.
Technical instructions for maintenance.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards related to the preparation and management of machines and tools of artistic binding.
Personal protection equipment.
2. Coordination of work among professionals involved in the processes of artistic binding.
Identification of professionals according to process needs.
Communication schema. Identification and selection according to recipient.
Needs and functions of each professional.
Communication protocols. Correct transmission of information among professionals.
3. Types and styles of artistic binding
Main types of artistic binding: paper, fabric, Dutch, skin and others.
Binding styles: Ornamental, historical and architectural.
Process of developing different styles.
Suitability of the different styles according to the characteristics of the work.
Relationship between the styles of binding and contemporary cultural currents.
4. Techniques of building the body of the book in artistic binding
Methods of creating booklets, joining loose sheets, and making the book more expensive.
Book block rating. Analysis of the booklets.
Main construction techniques: sewn to the Spanish, stitched to the French, stitched with ribbons and others. Features.
Analysis of the characteristics and results of each stitching technique.
Preparing the stitching elements. Relationship to the different techniques.
Quality in the construction process. Possible defects.
Lead preparation operations: straight, half-cane, half-cane with cajo and others.
Refer and/or guillotined operations.
Embodying. Placement of the cover planes. Risclado and gluing of cordels and ribbons.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards in the process of building the book.
5. Artistic binding on loose lids or tucked into lids
Processes to follow in the elaboration of the lids.
Checking and adjusting materials: skins, fabrics, cardboard and others.
Quality in the process. Possible defects.
Cover cover operations.
Operations of tucked into lids. Procedures.
Selection of guards. Placement of guards.
Pressing and drying. Quality verification.
6. Artistic binding in cartone
Canning, pasting, and tape operations. Back-up.
Elaboration of heads with different materials and techniques.
Selection of guards and pasting systems.
Operations to cover carnated book covers.
Cover finish operations: thanks, cozies, nerves, relief elements and others.
Drying and pressing operations based on the different covering materials.
Process quality control. Corrective measures.
Safety, health and environmental protection rules applicable to artistic binding in cartone
7. Interventions in restoration, repair and re-binding
Status of the bookbinding and body of the book.
Need to restore the book.
Book Unbound: Unmounted of booklets, correct paging, and loose sheet numbering. Scheme of booklets.
Repairing of Quadrernils And Loose Leaves.
Cleaning, bonding and cracking. Placement of Beetle
8. Elaboration of protective elements in artistic binding
Valuation of book protection needs.
Book protection items: boxes, cases, folders, girdles, shirts, and others.
Procedures for making protective elements for artistic binding.
Structure and Assembly according to the item type.
Building materials for the protection elements.
Realization of girdles and shirts. Identification and protection functions.
Realization of boxes, Folders and cases. Functionality. Solidity in the structure.
Placement of ligatory materials: cordels, threads, tape and others.
Application of spin or shift materials: hinges, channels, tapes, and others.
Compatibility between materials.
Indoor and exterior floor plan cover operations.
Quality control in the manufacture of protective elements.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards applicable to the development of protective elements.
9. Development of containers in artistic binding.
Analysis of documents, books, or other objects to contain.
Compatibility between the elements: object and container.
Preparation between the structural planes: sanding, carving, engraving.
Consolidation of frame structures.
Application of nails, staples, screws, resins, and others for assembly.
Elaboration of containers by means of plastic material molding by pressure, injection and other techniques.
Antiparasitic and preservation treatments.
Safety, health and environmental protection standards applicable to container development.
10. Experimental techniques of artistic binding
New construction techniques.
Contemporary experimentation, material, constructive and functional aspects.
Characteristics and historical-stylistic conditions.
Formal aspects and aesthetic assessments to consider.
Research on new techniques and their relationship with materials.
Development of unconventional structures.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
100 m art binding workshop2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the construction and monitoring of the construction of the book and the preparation of the protective elements and containers, which will be accredited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Superior Technician or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
FORMATIVE MODULE 5: ORNAMENTATION IN ARTISTIC BINDING
Level: 3
Code: MF1356_3
Associate to UC: Perform the artistic ornamentation of the book, protective elements and containers
Duration: 150 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:
C1: Apply techniques of gold, marbling, colored, chiseled, marbled and waxed in the ornate of the book cuts following previously established parameters.
CE1.1 Identify the ornamentation techniques used in the book cuts recognizing their characteristics and relating them to the most frequent use in different types and styles of binding.
CE1.2 Describe the different operations to be performed on the book cuts relative to the type of ornamentation to be applied.
CE1.3 Relate the tools and tools used in the different types of ornamentation of book cuts with their function and application mode.
CE1.4 Identify and know the preventive measures related to the handling of machines and tools used in the process of ornamentation of book cuts.
CE1.5 In several practical cases properly characterized, prepare several books for later ornate of cuts, performing the following operations:
Prepare the head, foot and skirt of the book to ornament, referring them to the appropriate machines and treating them to a satiny surface of the cuts, which allows the ornamentation.
Pressing the block of the book into the appropriate machine and with the necessary pressure to allow the application of the particular ornamentation in the project, without altering the rest of the body of the book.
CE1.6 Apply the gold bread on the previously treated surface of the cuttings of a prepared book, with the appropriate mortooth allowing its fixation and subsequent brunting.
CE1.7 From a book with the prepared cuts, perform the chisel by applying the necessary pressure on the matrix that allows marking a defined imprint in low relief of the drawing, on the cut of the book.
CE1.8 Perform the marmolate by chromatically treating the previously prepared book cuts in the aqueous solution, ensuring uniform contact throughout its surface and protecting the block from the book with disposable lids.
CE1.9 Perform the dyeing of a book's cuts, previously prepared, by applying colorant elements with the appropriate useful ones that guarantee the uniformity of tone on the cuts and that allows for their subsequent waxing and brunting.
CE1.10 Perform the marbling, splashing or buffering colorant elements on the book cuts, previously prepared, achieving a gauge, shape and density of the drops, in accordance with the pre-established results.
CE1.11 In different books, with previously ornate cuts, perform the finish by applying a wax film on its surface and repairing it evenly.
C2. Apply the techniques of incrustations, incisions and mosaic in the ornamentation of the planes of lids, elements of protection and containers of the book.
CE2.1 Identify the characteristics of the main techniques of ornamentation of plans of a book: scale, incision and mosaic, recognizing the procedures used for each one of them.
CE2.2 Relate the tools and the tools used in the embedding, incision and mosaic processes with their function and method of use.
CE2.3 Identify and know the preventive measures related to the management of machines and tools used in the processes of embedding, incision and mosaic.
CE2.4 In a practical case properly characterized in preparing the covers of different books for their ornamentation:
Assess the surface of the material to be ornate considering its suitability in relation to the technique to be used and the expected results.
Treat the surface of the material, according to the application needs of the different techniques, obtaining the appropriate texture that allows the fixation of the ornamentation.
Positioning and imposing the pieces of the template on the material of the planes, fixing them by removable adhesives following the established design.
CE2.5 In a practical case of ornamentation using the mosaic technique embedded on pre-prepared book lids:
Trim the cover by following the exact shape of the template, ensuring a fine, defined cut, without burrs or breakage of the material.
Trim the pieces according to the template, from the different selected materials ensuring the cleaning of the cut.
Funnel and fix the selected pieces in the corresponding voids and determined by the template, by means of suitable adhesives, uniformly settling the entire surface and dissimulating the joint joints by means of the treatment of the two surfaces.
CE2.6 In a practical case of application of ornamentations using the incisions technique:
Perform the different types of draught according to the ornamentation defined in the template.
Select the tapapores that delimit the absorption capacity of the material cut.
Prepare the inks to be applied depending on the type of draught or incision to be colored, considering its consistency, fluidity, color, tone, opacity and drying.
C3: Apply the techniques of gold and embossed in the ornamentation of the lids, loin, elements of protection and containers.
CE3.1 Describe the characteristics of the main techniques of embossing and dorado in relation to the different supports to be treated.
CE3.2 Acknowledge useful and tool used in the embossing and dorado identifying the function of each one of them by the type of engraving, nature of its composition and thermal resistances.
CE3.3 Carry out tests on front or rear planes or in the back of books to find the points for each iron so that there is no movement and the imprint is accurate.
CE3.4 Describe the defects that can occur in the ornamentation according to the techniques of gold, embossed in an artistic binding.
CE3.5 Describe the different types of hand and hand gold in the artistic binding, knowing and differentiating the technique to follow in each style of decoration, composition and possible decorative solutions with different irons or irons both at hand and at the wheel.
CE3.6 Identify and know the preventive measures related to the handling of irons used in the processes of gilding and embossing.
CE3.7 Perform different golden exercises with threads, paddles and wheels ensuring their horizontality and absence of burrs in the strokes and relating the temperature of the metal and the appropriate pressure.
CE3.8 Perform different golden exercises with different types of gold film, florons and corners getting a correct definition of the drawing without fillings.
CE3.9 In different practical cases of gold and embossing on surfaces of lids, loins, protective elements and containers:
Value and prepare the surface of the material by getting the proper texture that allows the fixing of the gold.
Apply the wetting and fixing elements in the previously marked pieces, obtaining an alteration of the surface that allows for the realization of the ornamentation.
Mark the irons of the composition with appropriate pressure and temperature, defining the stroke and positioning the marking by using the templates.
Make the drawing of the drawing by applying the irons with the right pressure and temperature, and with the color film in the case of the gold.
Remove the rebabas or out-of-line prints by making use of the right tools until you get a perfect definition of the ornamentation.
C4: Perform the Rotuside that identifies the book and its contents, ensuring its fixation, permanence and readability through the appropriate technique
CE4.1 recognize typographical alphabets by identifying their style, family, and body, analyzing the relationship between the stain and the whites.
CE4.2 Identify the different containers for their capacity and application mode.
CE4.3 recognize the procedures by which the lines of text are composed that allow the transmission of its imprint with a uniform pressure.
CE4.4 Rate the temperature of the component necessary for the label to be labeled with different films or colored sheets on different materials related to the pressure needed to obtain the kneecap.
CE4.5 In a practical case, duly characterized, of previously bound book patrolled:
Choose the alphabet taking into account the size of the book, the typography, its style and the rest of the ornamentation.
Perform the letter-rolling template accurately and accurately, as the loin.
Prepare the area that receives the label by applying fixative products, if necessary.
Perform the composition of the text on the component, as the alphabet, maintaining the basic rules of composition and readability.
Heat the component by placing it on a heat source until the required temperature is achieved to allow the transfer of the characters.
Kneel the book by applying the composition on the back with the right pressure and temperature on the gold, color film, getting the text to be aligned, with well defined and perfectly readable features.
Remove the fillings or burrs by rubbing on the stamping with some less hardness exfoliating material than the skin to achieve good readability.
C5: Conduct research on new ornamentation techniques, keeping updated on artistic trends and technological innovations
CE5.1 Analyze contemporary art currents and assess their possible application in the development of ornamental designs.
CE5.2 Distinguished the basic characteristics of the main styles in relation to shapes, colors, images and other graphic elements, as well as the typographical families used.
CE5.3 To conduct research on printed resources, online, to keep up-to-date information on artistic styles.
CE5.4 Identify information sources and update resources, related to novel ornamentation techniques that allow to be continuously updated.
CE5.5 In a properly characterized case study of new techniques:
Rehearsing new methods of ornamentation on known or novel materials with the corresponding assessment of the results and their possible use in future projects.
Make different ornaments by using your own graphics of a certain style.
CE5.6 To teach the application of new artistic trends on different materials with the production of new products, valuing the results obtained and the difficulties in their realization.
Capabilities to be acquired in a real working environment: C1 with respect to CE1.5, CE1.7, CE1.8, CE1.9 and CE1.10; C2 with respect to CE2.4, CE2.5 and CE2.6; C3 with respect to CE3.8; C4 with respect to CE4.5; C5 with respect to CE5.5.
Other capabilities:
Recognize the organization's productive process.
Propose alternatives with the aim of improving results.
Take Responsibility for the work that you develop and the fulfillment of the objectives.
Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment.
Demonstrate autonomy in the resolution of contingencies related to its activity.
Contents
1. Ornamentation of the book cuts
Ornamentation Techniques used. Features.
Suitability relationship between the techniques of cutting ornamentation and binding styles.
Preparation operations of the pre-ornamentation cuts.
Tools and tools used for ornamentation.
Application of gold bread in the book cuts.
The chiseled process over the book cuts.
Marbling and marbling techniques.
Trim of the cuts. Protection and preservation.
2. Embedding, incisions, and mosaic techniques
Features of embedding, incisions, and mosaic techniques. Procedures for implementation.
Tools and tools used in processes.
Suitability relationship between scale, incision and mosaic techniques with binding styles.
Using templates with the layout of the ornamentation.
Preparation of the surface of the materials for the application of the techniques.
Application of the embedding and mosaic technique. Trimming and preparation of the pieces. Sausages and fixed.
Application of the incisions technique. Draught and preparation of inks.
3. Techniques of artistic ornamentation with gilets and waffles
Characteristics of the techniques of gold and waffling. Procedures for implementation.
Tools and tools used in the process of embossing and gilding: irons, florons, squares, wheel.
Test of the techniques. Quality assurance in the process.
Preparation of the surfaces for ornamentation.
Embossing Technique. Marking of the Hirons. Pressure control and application temperature.
Gold technique. Types: by hand and behind the wheel. Application of the gold bread and the color films.
Removing overburs or overprints.
4. Book-rolling processes
Characteristics of the alphabets used for the kneecap: style, family, and body.
Relationship between the book's characteristics: size, typography, style, and the book's kneecap.
Rolled out procedures. Previous templates. Alignment.
Containers. Features. Formats. Capacity and mode of application.
Component application temperatures. Correct transfer of characters.
Rolled out operations with color films, gold bread and others.
5. Updating and research on new techniques of ornamentation and artistic trends
Analysis of contemporary art currents.
Features of artistic style.
Resources that allow for the permanent update: specialized journals, online news and others regarding new artistic trends and technological innovations.
Essays with new techniques, trends, methods.
Assessment of results and difficulties of implementation.
Applying acceptable results in future projects.
6. Safety, health and environmental protection standards in ornamentation processes
Preventive measures
Rules linked to the ornamentation of the book's cuts.
Rules related to the application of scale, incisions and mosaic techniques.
Rules linked to the processes of gilding and embossing.
Rules linked to the process of rolling books.
Training context parameters:
Spaces and installations:
Multipurpose Classroom of a minimum of 2 m2 per pupil.
100 m art binding workshop2.
Professional trainer profile:
1. Mastery of knowledge and techniques related to the realization of the artistic ornamentation of books, protective elements and containers, which will be credited by one of the following forms:
Academic training of Superior Technician or other higher level related to this professional field.
Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.
2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent authorities.
